sign in sign up
<<
Home , Barbican tube station, London County Council

Public Document Pack

Planning and Transportation Committee

Date: TUESDAY, 24 APRIL 20 12 Time: 11.15 am Venue: LIVERY HALL

Members: Martin Farr (Chairman) Robert Howard Deputy Michael Welbank (Deputy Michael Hudson Chairman) Deputy Keith Knowles Alex Bain-Stewart Oliver Lodge Deputy John Barker Brian Mooney John Brewster Sylvia Moys John Chapman Deputy John Owen-Ward Pollyanna Davies Michael Page Revd Dr Martin Dudley Dr Andrew Parmley Peter Dunphy Ann Pembroke Sophie Fernandes Henry Pollard John Fletcher Ian Seaton Marianne Fredericks Jeremy Simons Archie Galloway John Spanner Alderman John Garbutt Angela Starling George Gillon Mark Twogood Alderman David Graves Alderman John White Tom Hoffman

Enquiries: Katie Odling tel. no.: 020 7332 3414 [email protected]

Lunch will be served in Guildhall Club at 1pm

Chris Duffield Town Clerk and Chief Executive AGENDA

Part 1 - Public Agenda

1. APOLOGIES

2. DECLARATIONS BY MEMB ERS OF ANY PERSONAL AND PREJUDICIAL INTERESTS IN RESPECT OF ITEMS ON THIS AGENDA

3. APPOINTMENT OF COMMI TTEE To receive the draft Order of the Court of Common Council, 19 April 2012, appointing the Committee and approving its terms of reference .

(Pages 1 - 2)

4. ELECTION OF CHAIRMAN To elect a Chairman for the ensuing year in accordance with Standing Order No 29.

5. ELECTION OF DEPUTY C HAIRMAN To elect a Deputy Chairman for the ensuing year in accordance with Standing Order No 30.

6. MINUTES (a) To agree the public minutes and summary of the meeting held on 20 March 2012 (copy attached).

(b) To receive the public minutes and summary of the Streets and Walkways Sub Committee meeting held on 21 November 2011 (copy attached).

For Decision (Pages 3 - 18)

7. APPOINTMENT OF SUB C OMMITTEES Report of the Town Clerk (copy attached).

(Pages 19 - 24)

8. ORDERS OF COMMON COU NCIL To consider Orders of the Court of Common Council of 19 April 2012 referring to the Committee the following resolutions of the Grand Court of Wardmote.

(Pages 25 - 26)

9. TOWN PLANNING AND DE VELOPMENT APPLICATIO NS Report of the City Planning Officer relative to development and advertisement applications dealt with under delegated authority.

For Information

2

10. PUBLICATION OF THE N ATIONAL PLANNING POLICY FRAMEWORK Report of the City Planning Officer relative to the Government’s National Planning Policy Framework (copy attached).

(Pages 27 - 36)

11. LIST ED BUILDING MANAGEME NT GUIDELINES DRAFT SPD, VOLUMES I & II Report of the City Planning Officer relative to the Barbican Estate Listed Building Management Guidelines (copy attached).

(Pages 37 - 196)

12. REPORTS OF THE DIREC TOR OF THE BUILT ENV IRONMENT (COPIES ATTACHED)

a) Department of the Built Environment - Business Plan 2012 - 2015

(Pages 197 - 280)

b) Rescission of the City Walkway - Street Housing Estate

(Pages 281 - 286)

c) Progress Report - and Area Strategy

(Pages 287 - 294)

d) Renew Recycling Bins Screen Displays

(Pages 295 - 306)

13. REPORT ON ACTION TAK EN UNDER URGENCY PRO CEDURES/DELEGATED AUTHORITY PROCEDURES The Town Clerk to report on action taken under urgency procedures in accordance with Standing Order Nos. 41(a) and 41(b) (copy attached).

(Pages 307 - 308)

14. QUESTIONS ON MATTERS RELATING TO THE WORK OF THE COMMITTEE

15. ANY OTHER BUSINESS T HAT THE CHAIRMAN CON SIDERS URGENT

16. EXCLUSION OF THE PUB LIC MOTION – That under Section 100(A) of the Local Government Act 1972, the public be excluded from the meeting for the following items on the grounds that they involve the likely disclosure of exempt information as defined in Part I of the Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act.

3

Part 2 - Non -public Agenda

17. NON -PUBLIC MINUTES (a) To agree the non-public minutes of the meeting held on 20 March 2012 (copy attached).

(b) To receive the non-public minutes of the Streets and Walkways Sub Committee meeting held on 21 November 2011 (copy attached).

For Decision (Pages 309 - 312)

18. TOWER ACCESS IMPROVEMENT Report of the City Surveyor (copy attached).

(Pages 313 - 322)

19. CITY OF PARKI NG SERVICE CONTRACTS Report of the Director of the Built Environment (copy attached).

(Pages 323 - 326)

20. QUESTIONS ON MATTERS RELATING TO THE WORK OF THE COMMITTEE

21. ANY OTHER BUSINESS T HAT THE CHAIRMAN CONSIDERS U RGENT AND WHICH THE COMMITTEE AGREES SHOULD BE CONSIDERED WHILST THE PUBLIC ARE EXCLUDED

Any drawings and details of materials submitted for approval will be available for inspection by Members in the Livery Hall from Approximately 9:30 a.m.

4

Agenda Item 3 WOOTTON, Mayor RESOLVED: That the Court of Common Council holden in the Guildhall of the on Thursday 19th April 2012, doth hereby appoint the following Committee until the first meeting of the Court in April, 2013.

PLANNING & TRANSPORTATION COMMITTEE

1. Constitution A Ward Committee consisting of, • four Aldermen nominated by the Court of Aldermen • up to 30 Commoners representing each Ward (two representatives for the Wards with six or more Members regardless of whether the Ward has sides) or Side of Ward.

2. Quorum The quorum consists of any nine Members.

3. Membership 2012/13

ALDERMEN 4 John Richard Cottam White, T.D. 1 David Andrew Graves 1 John Garbutt 1 Dr Andrew Charles Parmley, Mus.M., Hon. F.S.G.

COMMONERS 8 The Revd. Dr. Martin Dudley ...... 4 Sylvia Doreen Moys ...... Aldgate 4 Ian Christopher Norman Seaton ...... 8 Michael Welbank, Deputy ...... 16 John William Brewster O.B.E...... 29 Archibald Duncan Galloway, O.B.E...... Bishopsgate 4 Oliver Arthur Wynlayne Lodge, T.D., B.Sc...... 28 John Richard Owen-Ward, M.B.E., Deputy ...... Bridge and Bridge Without 4 Pollyanna Sarah Davies ...... 18 Stanley Keith Knowles, M.B.E., Deputy ...... 5 Michael Hudson ...... 6 Jeremy Lewis Simons M.Sc...... Castle Baynard 7 Ann Marjorie Francescia Pembroke ...... 4 Sophie Anne Fernandes ...... Coleman Street 1 George Marr Flemington Gillon ...... 4 Peter Gerard Dunphy ...... Cornhill 22 John Alfred Barker, O.B.E., Deputy ...... Within 6 Angela Starling ...... Cripplegate Without 10 James Henry George Pollard ...... 5 Alex Bain-Stewart M.Sc., J.P...... 6 Michael Page , B.A.(Hons.) ...... Farringdon Within 4 Mark Twogood ...... Farringdon Without 10 John Hedley Spanner, T.D...... Farringdon Without 7 John Douglas Chapman ...... 2 Robert Picton Seymour Howard ...... 2 John Fletcher...... 14 Brian Desmond Francis Mooney, M.A...... 5 Marianne Bernadette Fredericks ...... Tower 11 Tom Hoffman ...... 15 Martin Charles Farr ......

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\5\5\ai00007552\$wuykwwnr.docxPage 1 4. Terms of Reference

To be responsible for:- (a) All functions of the City as local planning authority [relating to town and country planning and development control] pursuant to the Town and Country Planning Act 1990, the Planning (Listed Building and Conservation Areas) Act 1990 and Compulsory Purchases Act 2004 and all secondary legislation pursuant to the same and all enabling legislation (including legislation amending or replacing the same).

(b) Making recommendations to Common Council relating to the acquisition, appropriation and disposal of land held for planning purposes and to exercise all other functions of the local planning authority relating to land held for planning (or highways) purposes, and making determinations as to whether land held for planning or highways purposes is no longer required for those purposes, other than in respect of powers expressly delegated to another committee.

(c) All functions of the Common Council as local highway, traffic, walkway and parking authority (other than in respect of powers expressly delegated to another committee) and the improvement of other open land under S.4 of the City of London (Various Powers) Act 1952.

(d) All functions under part II of the City of London (Various Powers) Act 1967 including declaration, alteration and discontinuance of City Walkway.

(e) All functions relating to the construction, maintenance and repair of sewers in the City, including public sewers (on behalf of Thames Water under an agency arrangement).

(f) All functions relating to the Stopping Up of highway (including as local planning authority and highway authority).

(g) All functions relating to street naming and numbering under the London Building Acts (Amendment) Act 1939.

(h) All functions relating to the control, maintenance and repair of the five City river bridges (insofar as matters not within the delegated authority of another Committee).

(i) All functions relating to building control under the Building Act 1984, Building Regulations 2000-10 and London Building Acts 1930-82.

(j) The setting of building control charges under the Building (Local Authority Charges) Regulations 2010.

(k) Response to and resolution of dangerous structures under the London Building Acts (Amendment) Act 1939.

(j) All functions relating to the City of London Corporation’s commemorative blue plaques.

(k) All functions relating to the Local Land Charges Act 1975.

(l) The appointment of the City Planning Officer.

(m) The appointment of such Sub-Committees as is considered necessary for the better performance of its duties including a Streets & Walkways Sub-Committee.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\5\5\ai00007552\$wuykwwnr.docxPage 2 Agenda Item 6 1

PLANNING AND TRANSPORTATION COMMITTEE

20 MARCH 2012

Minutes of the meeting of the PLANNING AND TRANSPORTATION COMMITTEE held at Guildhall, EC2 on TUESDAY, 20 MARCH 2012 at 10.45am.

Present

Members: Martin Farr (Chairman) Michael Hudson Deputy Michael Welbank (Deputy Alderman Sir Paul Judge Chairman) Deputy Keith Knowles Alex Bain-Stewart Oliver Lodge Deputy John Barker Brian Mooney Mark Boleat Sylvia Moys John Brewster Ann Pembroke John Chapman Henry Pollard The Revd Dr Martin Dudley Ian Seaton John Fletcher Jeremy Simons Marianne Fredericks John Spanner Archie Galloway Angela Starling Tom Hoffman Mark Twogood Robert Howard Alderman John White Alderman and Sheriff Alan Yarrow

Officers: Jacky Compton - Town Clerk’s Department Katie Odling - Town Clerk’s Department Simon Owen - Chamberlain’s Department Deborah Cluett - Comptroller & City Solicitor’s Department Peter Young - City Surveyor’s Department Paul Monaghan - City Surveyor’s Department Peter Wynne Rees - City Planning Officer Annie Hampson - Dept of the Built Environment Paul Beckett - Dept of the Built Environment David Stothard - Dept of the Built Environment Philip Everett - Director of the Built Environment Alan Rickwood - City Police

1. APOLOGIES Apologies for absence were received from Peter Dunphy, Sophie Fernandes, Alderman Roger Gifford, Clare James and Deputy John Owen-Ward.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 3 2

2. DECLARATIONS BY MEMBERS OF PERSONAL OR PREJUDICIAL INTERESTS IN RESPECT OF ITEMS TO BE CONSIDERED AT THIS MEETING Sylvia Moys declared a personal interest in respect of Item 5 due to being a friend of the Church and also attending the Church as a Ward Member.

Michael Hudson declared a personal interest in respect of Item 5/4 due to being a member of the Painter-Stainers’ Company.

Ian Seaton declared a personal interest in respect of Item 5/4 as a lease holder of a flat in Queen’s Quay.

Brian Mooney declared a personal interest in respect of Item 5/4 due to being a leaseholder of two apartments in Queens Quay and lived in one of these.

Archie Galloway declared a personal interest in respect of Item 2a and 2b due to being the Church Warden at St. Steven Walbrook Church.

The Reverend Martin Dudley stated that none of the City clergy who had made representations to planning applications had contacted him or discussed them with him.

3. MINUTES The public minutes and summary of the meeting held on 21 February 2012 were approved as a correct record.

MATTERS ARISING FROM THE MINUTES : - Item 5 – City Corporation’s response to the Government’s consultation on the implementation of the sustainable drainage provisions in Schedule 3 to the Flood and Water Management Act 1972 – A more detailed response had been prepared and signed off by the Chairman and Deputy Chairman.

Item 7 – Questions on matters relating to the work of the Committee (Jubilee Pageant and Bridges) – An update regarding arrangements for the Pageant would be provided at the next meeting.

4. TOWN PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT APPLICATIONS The Committee received a report of the City Planning Officer relative to development and advertisement of applications that had been dealt with using his delegated authority since the previous meeting.

RECEIVED.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 4 3

5. REPORTS OF THE CITY PLANNING OFFICER RELATIVE TO PLANNING APPLICATIONS:-

A supplementary agenda was tabled at the meeting which provided additional information in respect of items 5/1, 5/2 and 5/3.

Item No. Registered Plan Address/Title Development Proposal No. 1. 11/00854/FULEIA Land bounded by Planning permission for the , demolition of existing Fen Court, Fenchurch structures on the site and Avenue & Billiter redevelopment to provide a Street (120 mixed use building of 15 Fenchurch Street) storeys, plus mezzanine, London EC3 lower grounds, two basements and a publicly accessible roof garden, to provide Class B1 office use and Class A retail uses including a restaurant at 14 th floor level, together with associated public space and landscaping, motorcycle, car and bicycle parking, servicing and plant accommodation (62,643sq.m).

John Chapman declared a prejudicial interest in respect of this Item due to being a tenant in the current building and left the meeting during discussion and voting thereon.

RESOLVED: That – (a) planning permission be granted for the above proposal in accordance with the details set out in the attached schedule, subject to Planning Obligations and other agreements being entered into as set out in the body of this report, the decision notice not to be issued until such obligations have been executed; (b) the Officers be instructed to negotiate and execute obligations in respect of those matters set out in “Planning Obligations” under Section 106 and any necessary agreements under Section 278 of the Highway Act 1980; and (c) Members agree in principle that the areas of public highway described in the report may be stopped-up to enable the development to proceed and that other land be dedicated as public highway in replacement for the land to be stopped-up and, upon receipt of the formal application, officers be instructed to proceed with arrangements for advertising and making of a stopping-up Order and dedication of land as public highway under the delegation arrangements approved by the Court of Common Council.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 5 4

(John Chapman re-joined the meeting).

Item No. Registered Plan Address/Title Development Proposal No. 2a. 11/00935/FULEIA Bloomberg Square – Planning permission for the Land bounded by relocation and Cannon Street, reconstruction of the Queen Street, Queen remains of the Temple of Victoria Street, Mithras. Bucklersbury and Walbrook

The Committee considered this item in conjunction with Item 5/2b.

The City Planning Officer advised that he wished to seek members views on two particular issues, i) the tone and colour of the external metal work of the proposed building and ii) the retail element within the arcade.

Following a discussion, the consensus of opinion of Members was that the facades should not be gold and that the tone and texture of the external metal work should compliment the use of a warmer coloured stone. In respect of retail, it was considered that the retail units in and adjacent to the arcade should be specialised shops and those units away from the arcade could be used as restaurants.

RESOLVED: That, having taken into account the Environmental Information pursuant to the Town & Country Planning (Environmental Impact Assessment) (England & Wales) Regulations 2011: (a) planning permission be granted for the above proposal in accordance with the details set out in the attached schedule, subject to Planning Obligations and other agreements being entered into as set out in the body of this report, the decision notice not to be issued until such obligations have been executed; (b) the Officers be instructed to negotiate and execute the obligations under Section 106 and any necessary agreements under Section 278 of the Highway Act 1980; (c) Members agree in principle that areas of public highway described in the report may be stopped-up to enable the development to proceed and, upon receipt of the formal application, officers be instructed to proceed with arrangements for advertising and making of a stopping-up Order for those areas, under the delegation arrangements approved by the Court of Common Council; and (d) the be given 14 days (under Article 5 of the Town & Country Planning (Mayor of London) Order 2008) to decide whether to allow the City to issue the decision, direct refusal or issue a direction that he is to act as the local planning authority for this application.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 6 5

Item No. Registered Plan Address/Title Development Proposal No. 2b. 11/00934/LBC Bloomberg Square – Listed Building Consent for Land bounded by the relocation and Cannon Street, reconstruction of the Queen Street, Queen remains of the Temple of Victoria Street, Mithras. Bucklersbury and Walbrook

The Committee considered this item in conjunction with Item 5/2a.

RESOLVED: That Listed Building Consent be granted for the above works in accordance with the details set out in the schedule attached to the report.

Item No. Registered Plan Address/Title Development Proposal No. 3. 11/00916/FULL 20 St Mary At Hill Planning permission for the refurbishment and alteration, including extensions at fourth and fifth floor levels and creation of new sixth and seventh floors, associated with a change of use from office (Class B1) use to hotel (Class C1) use. Replacement of plant and enclosures at roof level’ re- cladding of exterior elevations; alterations to main entrance and reception area; works to rear service yard including creation of disabled car parking spaces and other works incidental to the proposals.

(Ian Seaton left the meeting).

The City Planning Officer advised that there were four additional conditions proposed in respect of BREEAM assessment, disabled parking spaces, cycle parking and shower and changing facilities and these were included in the supplementary agenda.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 7 6

With these additional four conditions, it was

RESOLVED: That planning permission be granted for the development referred to above in accordance with the details set out in the schedule attached to the report.

EXTENSION OF THE MEETING At this point, the time limit for Committee meetings as set out in Standing Order No 40 had been reached, but there being more than a two-thirds majority of the Committee present who voted in favour of an extension, the Committee agreed to continue the meeting.

Item No. Registered Plan Address/Title Development Proposal No. 4. 11/00572/FULMAJ Queensbridge House Planning permission for the demolition of existing buildings and the construction of a new 224 bedroom hotel (Class C1) and 9 residential apartments (Class C3) utilising existing foundations and the provision of a new section of Riverside Walkway (Total floorspace: 21,138sq.m) (AMENDED APPLICATION).

The Deputy Planning Officer referred Members to an amendment to paragraphs 84 and 85 of the report as follows : -

“84.within the northern part of the building” and “85.beneath the southern building accessed from”.

(Jane Barker spoke against the application). (Peter Dines spoke in support of the application).

(Oliver Lodge, Tom Hoffman, Mark Boleat and Marianne Fredericks left the meeting).

Upon being put to the vote, planning permission was granted. Vote: 18 in favour and 1 abstention.

RESOLVED: That planning permission be granted for the development referred to above in accordance with the details set out in the schedule attached to the report and that the Director of the Built Environment and Comptroller and City Solicitor are given delegated authority to negotiate and execute an agreement under Section 278 of the Highways Act 1980 as indicated in paragraph 98 of the report. d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 8 7

6a. VARIATION OF CITY WALKWAY – HIGHWALK The Committee considered a report of the Director of the Built Environment relative to an alteration of the City Walkway that was declared on 11 June 1977, and is known as Moorfields Highwalk.

RESOLVED: That the resolution of the Court of Common Council dated 26 May 1977 to alter the City walkway known as Moorfields Highwalk so as to exclude the area shown cross hatched on the City Walkway Variation Plan No. CWVP-01-12 (Appendix B to the report) in accordance with the resolution set out in Appendix A to the report be varied.

6b. CITY CORPORATION’S RESPONSE TO THE GOVERNMENT’S CONSULTATION ON SIMPLIFYING THE TRAFFIC ORDER PROCESS The Committee considered a report of the Director of the Built Environment informing Members and to agree the City of London Corporation’s response to the Government’s public consultation in connection with Simplifying the Traffic Order Process.

RESOLVED: That the response set out in Annex A to the report be agreed.

7. LIGHTING CITY BRIDGES FOR THE OLYMPIC GAMES (EXCLUDING ) The Town Clerk reported action taken under urgency procedures relating to approval being given to carry out works to the City Bridges in time for the Olympic Games (excluding Tower Bridge) to be funded by Bridge House Estates, local risk budgets and the Authority. It had been proposed that the Director of the Built Environment, in consultation with the City Surveyor, be authorised to finalise the necessary details of the project, including any formal agreement with the GLA.

The reason for the urgency was because the GLA wish to split the funding of their elements on a 50/50 basis between the 2011/12 and 2012/13 financial years. In order for this equipment to be ordered, delivered and receipted by 31 March, the decision whether or not to move forward with these proposals needed to be made as near as possible to the end of February. Works will start immediately on delivery, with the requirement that all elements must be completed by 21 July.

RECEIVED. 8. QUESTIONS ON MATTERS RELATING TO THE WORK OF THE COMMITTEE A question was raised regarding travel routes during the Olympics. It was agreed that the reports containing this information, considered by the Streets and Walkways Committee on 19 March, would be circulated to Members following the meeting. Members were advised that this information could also be found on the (Tfl) website.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 9 8

9. URGENT ITEMS There were no urgent items.

10. EXCLUSION OF THE PUBLIC RESOLVED:– That under Section 100A(4) of the Local Government Act 1972, the public be excluded from the meeting for the following items on the grounds that they involve the likely disclosure of exempt information as defined in Part 1 of Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act as follows:-

Item No. Exempt Paragraphs 11 3, 5 and 7 12 3

SUMMARY OF MATTERS CONSIDERED WHILST THE PUBLIC WERE EXCLUDED

11. NON-PUBLIC MINUTES The non-public minutes of the meeting held on 21 March 2012, were approved as a correct record.

12. BRIDGE MASTER’S HOUSE – POTTERS FIELD DEVELOPMENT PHASE II The Committee considered a report of the City Surveyor relative to Phase II of the Potters Field Development of the Bridge Master’s House.

13. QUESTIONS ON MATTERS RELATING TO THE WORK OF THE COMMITTEE There were none.

14. ANY OTHER BUSINESS THAT THE CHAIRMAN CONSIDERS URGENT AND WHICH THE COMMITTEE AGREES SHOULD BE CONSIDERED WHILST THE PUBLIC ARE EXCLUDED There were no urgent items.

Jacky Compton – The Chairman informed the Committee that this would be Jacky’s last meeting as she was leaving the Corporation at the end of the week. On behalf of the Committee, the Chairman thanked her for her support and offered her best wishes for the future.

Katie Odling – The Chairman also informed the Committee that following Jacky’s departure, Katie would in future be clerking the meeting.

The meeting closed at 1.16pm.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 10 9

------CHAIRMAN

Contact Officer: Katie Odling tel. no. 020 7332 3414 e-mail: [email protected]

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$m0yslplf.docPage 11 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 12 1

STREETS AND WALKWAYS SUB COMMITTEE

21 November 2011

Minutes of the meeting of the STREETS AND WALKWAYS SUB COMMITTEE held at Guildhall, EC2 on MONDAY, 21 NOVEMBER 2011 at 12 noon.

Present

Members: Jeremy Simons (Chairman) Archie Galloway (Deputy Chairman) Martin Farr Marianne Fredericks Alderman Bob Hall Brian Harris Sylvia Moys Deputy John Owen-Ward Deputy Michael Welbank

Officers: Jacky Compton - Town Clerk’s Department Edward Foale - Town Clerk’s Department Simon Owen - Chamberlain’s Department Mark Paddon - Chamberlain’s Department Iain Simmons - Department of Built Environment Victor Callister - Department of Built Environment Paul Monaghan - City Surveyor’s Department Ian Hughes - Department of Built Environment Patrick Hegarty - Open Spaces Department Rob Oakley - Community & Children’s Services Department Alan Rickwood - City Police

1. APOLOGIES Apologies for absence were received from Deputy John Barker, Alderman Alison Gowman and Michael Hudson.

2. DECLARATIONS BY MEMBERS OF PERSONAL OR PREJUDICIAL INTERESTS IN RESPECT OF ITEMS TO BE CONSIDERED AT THIS MEETING Alderman Hall declared a prejudicial interest in respect of item 4a as he had requested the proposal be brought before the Committee. Alderman Hall left the meeting whilst this item was considered.

3. MINUTES The public minutes and summary of the meeting held on 17 October 2011 were approved.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$e4xrua4f.docPage 13 2

MATTERS ARISING Dust Suppressant Trials – A Member advised that she had recently found Bishopsgate to be very dusty. The Director of the Built Environment advised that TfL had undertaken their trials on Upper Thames Street and Lower Thames Street, at which a 17% dust reduction had been noted. A second trial is underway, and updated information from TfL will be provided to Port Health Committee as/when it is available.

Aldersgate Street / Beech Street Junction Review – The Director of the Built Environment Department advised that Transport for London (TfL) was currently awaiting approval from the Department of Transport for a three-month trial of Pedestrian Countdown Timers. The Aldersgate Street / Beech Street junction was likely to be one of the initial locations for the trial. The Director undertook to report any future developments to the Sub Committee. In response to a question, the Director confirmed that, if the trial were deemed a success, the Pedestrian Countdown Timers could be placed on all automated traffic lights nationally.

Staircase under – The Director advised that discussions were continuing with the St Martin’s Property Corporation, and it was now unlikely that the project could be completed in time for the Olympics. The Chairman of Planning & Transportation Committee advised that he would be meeting with St. Martin’s on 14 December.

Alderman Hall withdrew from the meeting whilst the following item was considered.

4a. ST PAUL’S CHURCYARD PROJECT: MEMORIAL TO JOHN DONNE The Committee considered a report of the Director of the Built Environment seeking approval to funding the proposed siting of a “Memorial to John Donne” at Festival Gardens.

The Director of the Built Environment advised that there was already a memorial to John Donne inside St. Paul’s Cathedral. However the proposed memorial would focus on his secular work, whereas the memorial within the Cathedral was focused on his Church career. A discussion regarding the necessity of a second memorial ensued.

A motion was proposed and seconded that a vote should take place as to whether the proposal should be approved.

Upon the motion being put, the votes cast up were as follows:-

FOR = 4 AGAINST = 3

There was one abstention.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$e4xrua4f.docPage 14 3

RESOLVED: That Members agree, subject to the approval in principle of the Culture, Heritage and Libraries Committee, that: i) the necessary permissions, design, procurement and installation of the Memorial be covered by the retention of the St Paul’s Churchyard project at an estimated cost of £33,000 (£8,000 fees, £25,000 works); ii) the design of the memorial be developed using the £8,000 fees element of the budget and be presented to the Culture Heritage and Libraries Committee for approval once developed; and iii) the memorial be produced and installed using the £25,000 works budget following approval of the design by the Culture Heritage and Libraries Committee.

4b. GREEN CORRIDORS PROJECT OPTIONS APPRAISAL The Committee considered a report of the Director of the Built Environment relative to the Green Corridors Project Options Appraisal.

In response to a question, the Director of Open Spaces confirmed that the trees would be planted by the City and that there would be no compensation for trees that die, however the Director reassured Members that only high quality trees would be used in the project in order to minimise this risk. The Director stated that as a TfL-funded project it would place trees in areas close to TfL transport routes. The next stage of the project would be to identify potential tree locations and plant a pothole in each site. Consultation would follow, and if successful, a tree would be planted in each pothole.

RESOLVED: that Members, i) approve the recommended option of a three year programme of planting trees on highways, at a total estimated cost of £415,000, funded by Transport for London; ii) approve Year 1 tree planting at an estimated cost of £50,000, to be funded from the confirmed allocation of TfL 2011/12 discretionary grant; iii) note that Years 2 and 3 of the scheme will be subject to funding from TfL and future Member agreement of how the 2012/13 and 2013/14 TfL formula grant is to be distributed between potential schemes; iv) approve delegated authority to the Director of the Built Environment for determining exact tree locations within the priority areas identified with annual update reports to the Streets and Walkways Sub Committee; and v) agree to £1,744 of funds from the 52-66 Gresham Street S.106 to be used for the 5 years of establishment costs for the proposed tree at Gresham Street, subject to the agreement of the developer.

4c. CYCLE PARKING 2011/12 The Committee considered a report of the Director of the Built Environment seeking approval of a bid report for a project to deliver cycle parking in September 2010. The Director confirmed that the £100k that TfL had provided d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$e4xrua4f.docPage 15 4

to the Corporation could only be used to deliver on-street cycle parking in the City in 2011/12. The City had identified a current shortfall of 27,000 parking spaces within the square mile. The project would contribute between 300 and 400 cycle parking spaces to the City. The Director reassured Members that the project team would consult with the Green Corridors Project officers in order to ensure there were no conflicting sites.

The Director confirmed that cycle hoops would cost £220 each, whereas cycle racks would cost £250 each. Discussion ensued and Members resolved that the cycle hoops should not be installed.

RESOLVED : that, i) Members give authority to commence work; ii) no cycle hoops would be installed; and iii) changes to the value of cost elements be delegated to the Director of the Department for the Built Environment in conjunction with the Chamberlain so as to maximise the benefits and utilise the available budget rather than having to return it to TfL.

4d. EASTERN CITY CLUSTER – GREAT ST HELEN’S & UNDERSHAFT PUBLIC ART SPACE UPDATE REPORT The Committee considered a report of the Director of the Built Environment relative to an update report for the Eastern City Cluster – Great St Helen’s & Undershaft Public Art Space.

The Chairman stated that in paragraph 16 of the report it should be amended to read Deputy Michael Cassidy.

RESOLVED: that, i) the update information is received and actions noted; ii) officers seek to maximise the amount funded through grant applications to bodies such as the Foundation and the Arts Council, and iii) officers report back to the Culture, Heritage & Libraries Committee and the Streets & Walkways Sub Committee in spring 2012 with further details of proposed artworks for approval.

5. QUESTIONS ON MATTERS RELATING TO THE WORK OF THE SUB COMMITTEE Queen Anne Statue – In response to a question, the City Surveyor advised Members that the Queen Anne statue within the grounds of the protest camp at St. Paul’s Cathedral was maintained by the City of London. However, it was currently unclear as to the ownership of the statue. The City Surveyor undertook to provide Sub Committee with an update on the condition of the statue in due course

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$e4xrua4f.docPage 16 5

Drainage outside St. Giles Church – A Member advised that the drainage next to St. Giles Church had become a problem. Furthermore it was in close proximity to the School evacuation meeting location and represented a hazard. The City Surveyor undertook to address this issue and report back to the Sub Committee.

6. ANY OTHER BUSINESS THAT THE CHAIRMAN CONSIDERS URGENT There were no urgent items of business.

7. EXCLUSION OF THE PUBLIC RESOLVED - That under Section 100A(4) of the Local Government Act 1972, the public be excluded from the meeting for the following items of business on the grounds that they involve the likely disclosure of exempt information as defined in Part I of Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act as follows:-

Item No. Paragraph(s) in Schedule 12A 8-9 3

Part 2 – Non-Public Agenda

8. NON-PUBLIC MINUTES The non-public minutes of the meeting held on 17 October 2011 were approved.

9. QUESTIONS ON NON-PUBLIC MATTERS RELATING TO THE WORK OF THE SUB COMMITTEE There were no questions.

10. ANY OTHER BUSINESS THAT THE CHAIRMAN CONSIDERS URGENT AND WHICH THE SUB COMMITTEE AGREES SHOULD BE CONSIDERED WHILST THE PUBLIC ARE EXCLUDED There were no urgent items.

The meeting closed at 1.06pm

------CHAIRMAN

Contact Officer: Jacky Compton tel. no. 020 7332 3389 e-mail: [email protected]

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\4\5\ai00007540\$e4xrua4f.docPage 17 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 18 Agenda Item 7

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no. Planning & Transportation Committee 24 April 2012 Subject: Public Appointment of Sub Committees Report of: For Decision Town Clerk Summary

1. This annual report sets out the composition and membership of your Committee’s two Sub Committees and its Working Party. You are asked to consider whether you would like to re-appoint the existing membership or make any changes and approve their terms of reference. You are also asked to decide whether you would like to appoint a general Reference Sub Committee, which in the past you have chosen to refrain from doing unless it becomes necessary. 2. It would be helpful if Members interested in serving on or standing down from the Sub Committees would inform Katie Odling at [email protected] (or on 020 7332 3414) of their interest before the Committee. Those details will be reported orally at the meeting on 24 April before Members are asked to consider making the necessary appointments. Recommendations 1) I recommend that the Committee:-

a) appoints the Streets and Walkways Sub Committee for the ensuing year and approves its terms of reference detailed at Appendix A to this report;

b) decides whether to defer the appointment of a general Reference Sub Committee until it is required; and

c) appoints for the ensuing year the Sub Committee and Working Party that consider the Local Development Framework and Local Implementation Plan, the membership of which to be the same for the Working Party; and

d) appoints a representative to the Policy and Resources Committee’s Energy and Sustainability Sub Committee for the ensuing year.

Main Report

Background 1. This report seeks your approval of the annual appointment of your Sub Committees and the approval of their Terms of Reference.

2. Your Committee has, for some years, chosen not to appoint a Reference Sub Committee, but has appointed an active Streets and Walkways Sub Committee and a Local Development Framework Sub Committee, the latter of which also considers the

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\5\5\5\ai00007555\$2zvis5of.docPage 19

Local Implementation Plan, when required. You have also regularly appointed a Working Party linked to the Local Development Framework Sub Committee.

Streets and Walkways Sub Committee 3. The Sub Committee was originally formed in 2004 and has acted fairly independently of the Grand Committee since then. The Terms of Reference have always included responsibility for such things as traffic engineering and management, street scene enhancements, the Riverside Walkway, and road safety matters. Your Committee is therefore asked to consider this Sub Committees Terms of Reference as set out at Appendix A to this report. It should be noted that the Sub Committee continues to have power to act in those matters, in order to prevent potentially delaying projects by requiring the Grand Committee’s approval as well, when they often involve tight timescales to complete them or use external funding.

4. The Streets and Walkways Sub Committee in 2011/12 comprised:-

Chairman of the Grand Committee Deputy Chairman of the Grand Committee Deputy John Barker Marianne Fredericks Archie Galloway Michael Hudson Sylvia Moys Deputy John Owen-Ward Jeremy Simons

Together with three ex-officio Members representing the Finance, Police and Open Spaces, City Gardens and West Ham Park Committees, which in 2011/12 were Brian Harris, Alderman Alison Gowman and Alderman Bob Hall, respectively.

5. Expressions of interest are sought for seven Members of the Committee who wish to serve on this Sub Committee.

6. The Sub Committee meets monthly on Monday mornings and has met five times since it was last appointed in April 2011. Two of its meetings were cancelled during the past year owing to lack of business.

Chairman and Deputy Chairman of the Sub Committee

7. The Sub Committee elects its own Chairman and Deputy Chairman at its first meeting following the first meeting of the new Grand Committee which in this case will be 21 May 2012. This was confirmed in 2011, subject to a review being held in 2013. (The Deputy Chairman would also be eligible to stand as Chairman of the Sub Committee for that election). Jeremy Simons has served as the Sub Committee’s Chairman for the past year.

8. The Committee is therefore requested to agree the membership and the Terms of Reference (at Appendix A), with power to act, of the Streets and Walkways Sub Committee for the ensuing year.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\5\5\5\ai00007555\$2zvis5of.docPage 20

Reference Sub Committee 9. The Committee has not appointed a general Reference Sub Committee for the last ten years, nor has one been required, so you may once again decide to refrain from doing so until the Reference Sub Committee is required to meet to consider a particular issue that the Grand Committee has referred to it.

10. You are asked to decide whether you would like to refrain once again from appointing a general Reference Sub Committee until it is required.

Local Development Framework Sub Committee 11. The Committee first appointed in October 2004 a Sub Committee with the specific task of considering the Local Development Framework (LDF), which will replace the Unitary Development Plan as the spatial planning strategy for the City. You later agreed that this Sub Committee would be suitable for considering details of the traffic-related Local Implementation Plan (LIP) as well. Its Terms of Reference are simply to consider those documents in detail and make recommendations to the Grand Committee.

12. The LDF Sub Committee in 2011/12 comprised:-

Chairman Deputy Chairman Deputy John Barker Marianne Fredericks Archie Galloway Michael Hudson Sylvia Moys Jeremy Simons

Together with an ex-officio Member appointed by the Policy and Resources Committee, which to date has been Stuart Fraser.

13. Expressions of interest are sought for five Members of the Committee who wish to serve on this Sub Committee.

14. The Committee also agreed in September 2005 to appoint a Working Party to consider the LDF in more detail, when necessary. Those meetings usually take place in tandem with those of the existing Sub Committee, and they share the same membership, except the Working Party also includes two officers: the Town Clerk or his representative and the City Planning Officer or his representative.

15. This Sub Committee and Working Party meet when necessary to progress the LDF or LIP, and the Sub Committee has met once in 2011/12. The Working Party has not recently met. Although the meetings can be long, membership of the Sub Committee presents the opportunity to be involved in the early stages of deciding the many policies upon which the City’s entire planning strategy is based.

16. The Committee is requested to agree for the ensuing year the membership of the Sub Committee that considers the Local Development Framework and Local Implementation Plan, which will be the same for the Working Party, although the latter will also include the officer representatives listed in paragraph 14.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\5\5\5\ai00007555\$2zvis5of.docPage 21

Energy and Sustainability Sub Committee 17. You are also asked to appoint one representative of your Committee to the Policy and Resources Committee’s new Energy and Sustainability Sub Committee: -

18. The composition of the Sub Committee is as follows:-

• Three Members of the Policy and Resources Committee as well as its Chairman and Deputy Chairman; • One representatives from each of the following Committees:- o Planning and Transportation o Finance (to be appointed 1 May 2012) o Port Health and Environmental Services (to be appointed 1 May 2012) o Open Spaces, City Gardens and West Ham Park (to be appointed on 25 April 2012 ; and • Up to 4 Members appointed by the Court of Common Council.

19. The Policy and Resources Committee will appoint its representatives (in addition to its Chairman and Deputy Chairman) on 3 May 2012. In 2011, the following Members were appointed:- • Robert Duffield; • Catherine McGuinness; and • Wendy Mead.

20. The Terms of Reference for the Sub Committee are:- (a) In consultation with the relevant service committee, to develop specific strategies and policies associated with the fields of sustainable development, reporting as appropriate to the Grand Committee (or for information to such other Committee as required);

(b) To encourage sustainable development, energy, water and carbon issues being taken into account in the development of all City Corporation policies plans and projects and to raise awareness of the practical steps which should be taken in applying sustainable principles and addressing climate change;

(c) To advise on matters relating to energy management and sustainability to the City’s stakeholders;

(d) To make recommendations for enhancing energy conservation, reduce carbon dioxide production and enhancing the efficient use of resources; and

(e) To advise on practical environmental management initiatives for implementation in the Guildhall complex and the City’s other operational properties e.g. practical programmes, plans and awareness training schemes for improving the City’s environmental performance, energy conservation and carbon dioxide production. d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\5\5\5\ai00007555\$2zvis5of.docPage 22

21. The Sub Committee will elect its own Chairman and Deputy Chairman at its first meeting.

22. Some Members of your Committee are already Members of the Energy and Sustainability Sub Committee, so you could appoint one of them to represent this Committee, or alternatively appoint another Member who is interested in serving in that role.

Conclusion 23. The Committee is asked to approve the membership and Terms of Reference of its Sub Committees and Working Party, and to decide whether it wishes to appoint a Reference Sub Committee or wait until one is necessary.

24. Any Member who is interested in being appointed to one of these Sub Committees is asked to make his/her intention known when we reach this item on the agenda. However as mentioned earlier in the report, it would also be particularly helpful if you would notify Katie Odling of the Town Clerk’s Department of your interest in the week before the meeting.

Background Papers: Minutes and report on appointments, 19 April 2011 Contact: Katie Odling (020) 7332 3414 [email protected]

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\5\5\5\ai00007555\$2zvis5of.docPage 23

APPENDIX A

Streets and Walkways Sub Committee – Proposed Terms of Reference

The Sub Committee is responsible for:- (a) traffic engineering and management, maintenance of the City’s streets, and the agreement of schemes affecting the City’s Highways and Walkways (such as street scene enhancement, traffic schemes, pedestrian facilities, and authorising Traffic Orders) in accordance with the policies and strategies of the Grand Committee; (b) all general matters relating to road safety; (c) the provision, maintenance and repair of bridges, subways and footbridges, other than the five City river bridges; (d) public lighting, including street lighting; (e) day-to-day administration of the Grand Committee’s car parks (f) all matters relating to the Riverside Walkway, except for adjacent open spaces; and (g) to be responsible for advising the Grand Committee on:- (i) progress in implementing the Grand Committee’s plans, policies and strategies relating to the City’s Highways and Walkways; and (ii) the design of and strategy for providing signposts in the City.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\5\5\5\ai00007555\$2zvis5of.docPage 24 Agenda Item 8 Wootton, Mayor A Court of Common Council holden in the Guildhall of the City of London on Thursday, the nineteenth day of April, 2012

Annual Resolutions of the Annual Wardmotes:- Wardmote Resolutions From the Ward of Aldersgate

To review the traffic lights at the Aldersgate Street/Beech Street junction as regards the safety of pedestrians in the light of traffic light phasing, timing and the resulting traffic flow and the effect it appears to have had on undisciplined cyclists.

Resolved – That the resolution be referred to the Planning and Transportation Committee for consideration and any necessary action.

From the Ward of Castle Baynard

Noting the frequent delays caused by the tail back of traffic from the pedestrian crossing in front of St Paul's, and the resulting increased pollution, the voters of the Ward of Castle Baynard request the City of London Corporation to install a temporary traffic light controlled crossing for a six month trial period to test whether this would overcome this long-standing problem.

Resolved – That the resolution be referred to the Planning and Transportation Committee for consideration and any necessary action.

From the Ward of Farringdon Within

Concern was expressed about the apparent lack of co-ordination in and the frequency of the carrying out of road works and the length of time that it takes to redesign and reconstruct roads in the Ward and the City all of which cause substantial difficulties to all road users in the Ward. The City of London Corporation is requested to review again what steps could be taken to reduce the considerable inconvenience to all road users of the incidence of road works in the Ward in particular and the City in general.

Resolved – That the resolution be referred to the Planning and Transportation Committee for consideration and any necessary action.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\6\5\5\ai00007556\$ne2h55tq.docPage 25 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 26 Agenda Item 10

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no. Planning & Transportation 24 th April 2012 Subject: Public Publication of the National Planning Policy Framework Report of: For Information City Planning Officer

Summary

• This report advises Members that the Government’s National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) was published and took immediate effect in England on 27 th March 2012.

• The Government is committed to reform of the planning system including the simplification of existing Government planning guidance which it regards as being so elaborate and forbidding that it discourages local involvement in the planning process. The Government considers that the much shorter NPPF provides a framework within which local people and their accountable councils can produce their own distinctive local and neighbourhood plans which can reflect the needs and priorities of their communities.

• The draft NPPF published in July 2011 was the subject of considerable lobbying and the finalised version has been amended to address many of the issues raised by respondents. It is a significant improvement on the draft NPPF with welcome confirmation that the purpose of the planning system is to contribute to the achievement of sustainable development. However its brevity means that it is less comprehensive than the guidance it replaces and this may lead to some initial uncertainty over its interpretation and implications.

• The NPPF includes a presumption in favour of sustainable development and recognises that sustainability has economic, social and environmental dimensions which are to be considered jointly and simultaneously. It states that planning should operate to encourage and not to act as an impediment to sustainable growth, and therefore states that significant weight should be placed on the need to support economic growth through the planning system.

• The NPPF confirms the statutory position that decisions should be taken in accordance with the development plan unless material considerations indicate otherwise. It emphasises that development plans should be kept up-to-date and should be consistent with the principles and policies in the NPPF. Where the development plan is absent, silent or relevant policies are out of date then the NPPF will be a relevant material consideration.

• NPPF paragraph 51 relating to change of use from offices to housing is particularly significant for the City. The City Corporation had previously objected to the Government’s proposal to relax national planning controls over change of use from offices to housing because of its potentially adverse effect

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 27 on the City cluster of commercial activities. The Government has responded favourably to this argument by including paragraph 51 in its finalised NPPF. This paragraph gives local planning authorities discretion not to approve such applications for change of use where there are strong economic reasons why such development would be inappropriate. This will enable the City to continue resisting inappropriate housing which would adversely affect the City’s economic role.

Recommendations Members are asked to: • Note the publication of the Government’s National Planning Policy Framework and that it took immediate effect from 27 th March 2012. • Note that the National Planning Policy Framework must be taken into account when preparing local plans and neighbourhood plans and is a material consideration in planning decisions.

Main Report

Background

1. The Government is committed to reforming the planning system as part of its wider promotion of ‘localism’. It considers that the existing planning system is so elaborate and forbidding that it discourages local involvement in the planning process and local acceptance of new development arising from it. It considers that replacing over 1,000 pages of existing national planning guidance with a much shorter NPPF provides a simpler national framework within which local people and their councils can produce their own distinctive local and neighbourhood plans which can reflect the needs and priorities of their communities.

2. The draft NPPF published in July 2011 attracted widespread criticism that economic considerations were being given priority over other objectives with a particular threat to the existing countryside. The Government has made significant changes in response and the finalised NPPF is better balanced with welcome confirmation that the purpose of the planning system is to contribute to the achievement of sustainable development. It recognises that sustainability has economic, social and environmental dimensions but also states that significant weight should be placed on the need to support economic growth through the planning system.

3. Copies of the NPPF are available in the Members’ Reading Room and on the DCLG website at: http://www.communities.gov.uk/publications/planningandbuilding/nppf

Format of the NPPF

4. The NPPF replaces over 1,000 pages of national planning guidance with a document comprising just 219 paragraphs of text in 49 pages. It is prefaced by

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 28 a brief Ministerial foreword and Introduction, and is then divided into three sections providing national planning guidance on Achieving Sustainable Development, Plan-making and Decision-taking. It is noticeable that England’s national planning policy framework contains no maps or diagrams to help illustrate the spatial consequences of the document.

5. The brevity of the document is justified by a comment that ‘it sets out the Government’s requirements for the planning system only to the extent that it is relevant, proportionate and necessary to do so’ (NPPF para 1). The most extreme example of brevity relates to the enforcement process where the whole of the former Planning Policy Guidance Note 18 is replaced by the single NPPF paragraph 207 comprising 4 sentences.

6. The NPPF is complemented by Annex 1: Implementation (paras 208-219) and by Annex 2: Glossary. Annex 3 lists the 44 Planning Policy Statements, Planning Policy Guidance, Minerals Planning Guidance, Circulars and miscellaneous Letters which are superseded by the NPPF.

Content of the NPPF

Introduction 7. The Introduction (NPPF paras 1-5) explains that the NPPF must be taken into account in the preparation of development plans and is a material consideration in planning decisions. It also recognises that the NPPF covers most but not all subjects and so should not be read in isolation from other Government documents.

8. It explains that it does not contain specific policies for nationally significant infrastructure projects as these are determined in accordance with the decision- making framework set out in the Planning Act 2008 and relevant national policy statements. It advises that it should be read in conjunction with the Government’s planning policy for traveller sites also published in March 2012. It also states that it does not contain specific waste policies since national waste planning policy will be published as part of the National Waste Management Plan for England.

9. The NPPF was accompanied by a separate document ‘Technical Guidance to the NPPF’ which provided further detail on flood risk and minerals policy in 54 paragraphs over 24 pages. This extra guidance is stated to be an interim measure pending a wider review of guidance needed to support planning policy.

Achieving Sustainable Development 10. The Introduction is followed by a long section titled ‘Achieving Sustainable Development’. This section emphasises that the purpose of planning is to contribute to the achievement of sustainable development and recognises that economic, social and environmental dimensions of sustainability are mutually dependent. The NPPF regards the presumption in favour of sustainable development as a golden thread running through both plan-making and decision-taking.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 29 11. The NPPF elaborates on the presumption in favour of sustainable development with reference to 12 core land-use planning principles set out in full as Annex A of this report. Most of these principles summarise previous national planning guidance to achieve sustainable patterns of growth though there are some differences in emphasis. There is increased emphasis on the empowerment of local people to shape their surroundings consistent with the Government’s wider localism agenda. There is also increased emphasis on the need to proactively drive and support sustainable economic growth. It is also noticeable that there is a specific recognition for the ‘intrinsic character and beauty of the countryside’ in response to previous criticisms that the draft NPPF placed it under threat.

12. The remainder of this section of the NPPF provides a policy overview of thirteen main policy areas; their content can be inferred from their titles:

• Building a strong and competitive economy • Ensuring the vitality of town centres • Supporting a prosperous rural economy • Promoting sustainable transport • Supporting high quality communications infrastructure • Delivering a wide choice of high quality homes • Requiring good design • Promoting healthy communities • Protecting Green Belt land • Meeting the challenge of climate change, flooding and coastal change • Conserving and enhancing the natural environment • Conserving and enhancing the historic environment • Facilitating the sustainable use of minerals

Plan-Making 13. The second section in the NPPF comprises 35 paragraphs and 8 pages of national guidance on plan-making to supersede the previous 30 pages of guidance in PPS12. Local plans must have the objective of contributing to the achievement of sustainable development, should set out the strategic priorities for their area and should be consistent with the policies and principles in the NPPF. Local plans should still be supported by adequate, up-to-date and relevant evidence but this should be proportionate.

14. The NPPF includes new emphasis that local plans should ensure viability and deliverability so that the sites and scale of development identified in the plan should not be subject to such a scale of obligations and policy burdens that their ability to be developed viably is threatened (NPPF para 173). The NPPF also advises that where possible the Community Infrastructure Levy (CIL) should be worked up and tested alongside the Local Plan as it should support and incentivise new development (NPPF para 175).

15. The NPPF gives additional emphasis to the need to plan strategically across local boundaries (NPPF paras 178-181). This emphasis compensates for the

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 30 intended abolition of Regional Spatial Strategies and local planning authorities will need to demonstrate they have responded to this new duty to cooperate.

16. The other key innovation is the encouragement given in the NPPF to neighbourhood planning (NPPF paras 183-185). The NPPF gives guidance on this new tier of development planning established by the Localism Act 2011. It sees neighbourhood planning as a powerful set of tools for local people to ensure they get the right types of development for their community. However this advice is tempered by the statement that ‘neighbourhood plans and orders should not promote less development than set out in the local plan or undermine its strategic policies’ (NPPF para 184).

Decision-Taking 17. The third section in the NPPF forms 21 paragraphs in 3 pages of national guidance on how local planning authorities should approach decision-taking in positive way to foster sustainable development. A significant feature is the increased emphasis given in the NPPF to pre-application engagement to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the planning application system for all parties. Similar encouragement is given for the parallel processing of other consents to help speed up the process.

18. The NPPF refers to the new ‘localism’ concepts of Neighbourhood Development Orders and Community Right to Build Orders which would avoid the need for specific planning permission. However it advises that the NPPF is still relevant in those circumstances as policies in the NPPF that relate to decision-taking should be read as applying to the consideration of proposed Neighbourhood Development Orders (NPPF para 202).

19. The national approach to planning conditions and obligations is set out in four short paragraphs that supersede Circular 05/2005 on Planning Obligations. The approach has not changed but there is increased emphasis on the need for local planning authorities to take account of changes in market conditions over time and, wherever appropriate, be sufficiently flexible to prevent planned development being stalled (NPPF para 205).

Implications of the NPPF

20. From 27 th March 2012 the NPPF became a material consideration for the plan- making and decision-taking activities of the City Corporation as a local planning authority. It is considered that the finalised NPPF is an improvement on the draft NPPF and that the City’s existing planning policies and sustainable growth objectives are broadly consistent with it. Therefore it is likely that the NPPF will stimulate refinement of existing policies rather than fundamental change in the City’s planning policy approach.

21. The concise nature of the NPPF means that much complex planning policy guidance has been summarised and simplified. This will lead to some uncertainty in the medium term over the exact meaning of the some of the new text until the interpretation is clarified through the planning appeals process and the courts. Meanwhile the existing , Core Strategy and Unitary Development Plan still carry weight as parts of the City’s development plan.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 31

22. The replacement of the UDP policies has slowed recently due to uncertainty over the content of the NPPF and in particular the separate proposal to relax planning controls over change of use from offices to housing. The policy review process can now proceed once more as these two issues have been addressed. Review of the UDP policies can now progress in the context of the new NPPF and the opportunity will be taken to refine parts of the Core Strategy if needed to bring greater consistency with the NPPF.

23. NPPF paragraph 51 relating to change of use from offices to housing is particularly significant for the City. The City Corporation had previously objected to the Government’s proposal to relax national planning controls over change of use from offices to housing because of its potentially adverse effect on the City cluster of commercial activities. The Government has responded favourably to this argument by including paragraph 51 in its finalised NPPF. This paragraph gives local planning authorities discretion not to approve such applications for change of use where there are strong economic reasons why such development would be inappropriate. This should enable the City to continue resisting inappropriate housing which would adversely affect the City’s economic role. However it is still possible that the issue will be debated again later this year as part of a promised Government wide-ranging review of the Use Classes Order.

24. The wording of NPPF paragraph 51 regarding change of use is as follows:

“51. Local planning authorities should identify and bring back into residential use empty housing and buildings in line with local housing and empty homes strategies and, where appropriate, acquire properties under compulsory purchase powers. They should normally approve planning applications for change to residential use and any associated development from commercial buildings (currently in the B use classes) where there is an identified need for additional housing in that area, provided that there are not strong economic reasons why such development would be inappropriate.”

Corporate & Strategic Implications

25. The NPPF affirms the Government’s commitment to the achievement of sustainable development. The Government’s commitment accords with the City Together’s Sustainable Community Strategy and with the commitment of the City Corporation as a local planning authority in its Core Strategy to deliver a world class City and sustainable growth.

Conclusion

26. The finalised NPPF is a significant improvement on the draft NPPF with welcome confirmation that the purpose of the planning system is to contribute to the achievement of sustainable development. It also includes significant clarification in NPPF para 51 that local planning authorities, such as the City, have discretion to continue resisting inappropriate housing where there are strong economic reasons why such development would be inappropriate.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 32 Background Papers:

• Report of the City Planning Officer: ‘City Corporation’s Response to Consultation on the Draft National Planning Policy Framework’ to Planning &Transportation Committee 4 th October 2011.

• Report of the City Planning Officer: ‘Suggested Response of the City Corporation to the Government’s Consultation on the Relaxation of Planning Rules for Change of Use from Commercial to Residential’ to Policy & Resources Committee 16 th June 2011 and Planning & Transportation Committee 27 th June 2011.

Contact: [email protected] | telephone number: 020 7332 1970

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 33 Annex A: Core Planning Principles in NPPF paragraph 17

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 34

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\7\5\5\ai00007557\$hayjeuz0.docPage 35 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 36 Agenda Item 11

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no.

Barbican Residential Consultation 12th March 2012 Committee 26 th March 2012 Barbican Residents Committee 24th April 2012 Planning and Transportation Committee

Subject: Public Barbican Estate Listed Building Management Guidelines Draft SPD, Volumes I and II

Report of: For Decision The City Planning Officer

Summary The Barbican Estate Listed Building Management Guidelines were adopted in May 2005. A planned review of the Guidelines has been carried out. Members are asked to agree the draft Barbican Estate Listed Building Management Guidelines SPD, Volumes I and II and agree to a formal public consultation exercise being carried out, prior to its adoption as a Supplementary Planning Document. The recommendation has been approved by the Barbican Residential Consultation Committee and the Barbican Residents Committee. Recommendations

• Members approve the draft text of the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Draft SPD, Volumes I and II, appended as Annex A to this report and agree that the document be published for formal public consultation in May 2012.

Main Report Background 1. In May 2005, the Barbican Estate Listed Building Management Guidelines Supplementary Planning Guidance was adopted by Planning and Transportation Committee. This is a material consideration in the assessment of applications for planning and listed building consent on the residential part of the Barbican Estate. 2. Volume I, Section 12, set out the procedure for the review of the Management Guidelines. Paragraph 12.6 states ‘There will be a full review of each Volume, 5 years after its completion. The Corporation of London will ask all those that sat on the original working parties to be involved in this review. If substantial changes are proposed, views on the changes will be sought through consultation.’

Page 37 3. The five year review of the document began in 2010 with the reconvention of the original Working Party. Avanti Architects, the consultants for the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines, were retained to assist the process. 4. 7 Working Party meetings have taken place during 2011 to review and discuss possible changes to the Guidelines. 5. There are numerous textual changes throughout Volumes I and II to provide greater clarity. The significant content changes are in Volume I: addition of list description for the registered Park and Garden; updated contacts list; changes to reflect the introduction of PPS5; changes to reflect the adoption of the Local Development Framework Core Strategy; new sustainability and climate change policy; revised review procedure. Current Position 6. The Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines comprises two volumes. Volume 1 covers the entire Barbican Estate, and deals with the background to the development of the management guidelines, the legislative framework, stakeholder responsibilities, and procedural issues. Volume II relates to the residential buildings of the Estate, considers their architectural significance, and provides Management Guidelines relating to specific elements of the buildings, and guiding how change to these elements should be managed. 7. The reviewed document is proposed as a Supplementary Planning Document (SPD) to the LDF Core Strategy. SPDs must be prepared in accordance with procedures set out in relevant regulations and public consultation must be carried out in accordance with the City’s Statement of Community Involvement, adopted in 2009. 8. It is proposed that the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Draft SPD, Volumes I and II should be the subject of formal public consultation in May 2012 to take advantage of new Regulations. 9. At the end of the formal consultation period I will report on the responses received and any amendment to the SPD as a result, to your Committee for adoption. Financial and Risk Implications 10. There are no financial or risk implications arising from the proposed consultation process. Formal consultation for the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines will take place in May 2012 concurrently with consultation on Conservation Area Character Summary SPDs. This will deliver cost and efficiency savings over separate consultation on each SPD. Legal Implications 11. There are no legal implications in this report.

Page 38 Strategic Implications 12. The draft SPD supports Policy CS12 of the LDF Core Strategy, which seeks to safeguard ‘the City’s listed buildings and their settings, while allowing appropriate adaptation and new uses.’ 13. The Community Strategy: The City’s Together Strategy contains five key themes. The theme relevant to the Barbican Estate is to ‘protect, promote and enhance our environment’, including the built environment of the City and its public realm. 14. The Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Draft SPD, Volumes I and II supports the Strategic aims of the Departmental Business Plan, relating to the sustainable design of the streets and spaces and the protection and enhancement of the City’s built environment. These aims are met by promoting the protection and enhancement of the Barbican Estate. 15. An Equality Impact Assessment was carried out and no equality issues were identified. 16. A Sustainability Appraisal Screening has been carried out and this indicates that the SPD will not have significant environmental impacts beyond the site. Therefore a full Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) will not be necessary. This finding is subject to the approval of the Environment Agency, English Heritage and Natural England . Consultees 15. The Town Clerk, Comptroller & City Solicitor, City Surveyor, Director of Open Spaces and the Department of Community and Children’s Services have been consulted on this report and their comments have been incorporated. Conclusion 16. Members are recommended to agree the draft text of the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines SPD, Volumes I and II and agree to the draft Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines SPD, Volumes I and II being subject to formal public consultation in May 2012. Background papers Annex A Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Draft SPD, Volume I Annex B Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Draft SPD, Volume II Contact: Petra Sprowson 020 7332 1147 [email protected]

Page 39 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 40 Barbican

Page 41 Listed Building Management Guidelines

City of London Corporation Supplementary Planning Document

Volume I – Introduction

Updated edition 2011

(Originally published 24 May 2005)

Introduction engaged to assist in the production of the updated edition of 2012. These are the first two volumes of the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines. Volume I covers the Estate The first edition of the guidelines was approved by the as a whole. Volume II relates to the Residential Buildings of Barbican Estate Residents Consultation Committee, Barbican the Estate. Originally adopted in 2005, they have now been Residential Committee and adopted by Planning and comprehensively reviewed, updated in the light of five years of Transportation Committee as Supplementary Planning operation on the estate and published as a Supplementary Guidance in May 2005. Further volumes for the Arts Centre, Planning Document. Schools and other buildings and Landscaping are proposed, subject to funding. It should be noted however that Volume I Part of the original project brief included the establishment of of this document applies to all parts of the estate and that any a Working Party to offer guidance and advice on behalf of key works being planned or undertaken on the Arts Centre, interested parties. The group met regularly and included five Schools and other buildings or Landscaping are subject to the residents, four of whom were members of the Barbican Estate provisions of these Guidelines.

Page 42 Residents Consultation Committee and one Chairman of the Barbican Association as well as representatives from English Heritage, the Twentieth Century Society, the Department of Community Services and the Department of Planning and Transportation. The Working Party, chaired by Alderman Hall, was vital to the development of the project, offering feedback on drafts of the Guidelines and discussing wider issues associated with the pressure for change on the estate.

The Working Party was re-constituted for the purposes of carrying out the 2012 review, and has included several of the original members.

Volume I was the work of the City of London Corporation’s Department of Planning and Transportation. Volume II was produced by Avanti Architects Ltd, 361-373 City Road, London, EC1V 1AS. Avanti Architects have also been

Volume I, page 2 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 CONTENTS

Plate 1 Map of the Barbican Estate and extent of listing ...... 5 5. ‘Special architectural and historic interest’ of Barbican Estate as a whole ...... 30 List description issued by the Department of Culture, Media

and Sport ...... 7 6. Legislation, ‘listing’ and listed building control ...... 33 Registered Parks and Gardens Description issued by English Listed Building Consent ...... 34 Heritage Listed building policy ...... 35 14 Appendix A: List of principal contacts ...... 17 Breaches of planning controls and enforcement ...... 36

7. The role of English Heritage ...... 38 Page 43 1. Listed Building Management Guidelines: background and policy ...... 18 8. The role of the City of London Corporation as Local

2. The Barbican Estate: best practice ...... 21 Planning Authority ...... 39

3. Aims and objectives of the Barbican Listed Building 9. The role of the City of London Corporation as

Management Guidelines ...... 22 freeholder ...... 40 Landlord’s consent ...... 41 4. History of the Barbican Estate ...... 23

Planning policy in the post-war era ...... 23 10. How to apply for Listed Building Consent ...... 43 Chamberlin, Powell and Bon ...... 24 11. How to apply for planning permission ...... 45 The Barbican Estate ...... 25

12. Procedure for review of the Management Guidelines .46

Volume I, page 3 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

Barbican

Listed Building Management Guidelines

Volume I: Introduction

Plate 1 Page 44 Map of the Barbican Estate, extent of listing and other Heritage Assets Page 45

Volume I, page 5 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Barbican

Listed Building Management Guidelines

Volume I: Introduction

List description issued by the Department of Culture, Media and Sport

Page 46 Registered Parks and Gardens Description

Volume I, page 6 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Barbican

Grade II

Listed – 5 Sep 2001

Estate of flats, maisonettes and terraced houses, hostel, girls' school, school of music and drama, and arts centre (with concert hall, theatre, studio theatre, cinemas, library, art gallery, conservatory, restaurants and offices), with underground car parking, pedestrian walks and canal. Designed 1955-59, arts centre element redesigned 1964-8; built with modifications in 1962-82 to the designs of Chamberlin, Powell and Bon (subsequently Chamberlin, Powell and Bon (Barbican)) for the Corporation of the City of London; engineers, Ove Arup and Partners.

Poured in situ reinforced concrete with exposed surfaces largely pick hammered and with smaller areas bush hammered, exposing Pen Lee granite aggregate, with glazed engineering brick cladding to for Girls, the Guildhall School of Music and Drama, Wallside, the Postern and plinths to lakeside blocks and water features. Flat asphalted roofs, paved with concrete tiles in keeping with the wall finishes. The main blocks are supported by concrete columns forming an extension to the bored piles sunk up to 60ft deep. The tower blocks' main structure is formed by a central lift shaft and stairwells with a peripheral framework of beams and split piers rising from exposed columns; the structure of the Page 47 terrace blocks is based in concrete cross-walls supported on columns with floor slabs spanning between the cross-walls and the balcony edge beams. Podium and the tower blocks have thick upswept concrete balustrades developed by Ove Arup and Partners in consultation with the architects in 1961.

Housing built 1964-75. 35-acre rectangular site developed with seven-storey blocks set on raised pedestrian podium with mews housing, basement storage and car parking below, for 2,500 cars, and with three triangular towers of 44, 44 and 43 storeys rising above. Most flats are served directly from lifts, but some blocks comprise flats or maisonettes set on a scissor plan around spinal corridor. Generally, there are similarities between the long east-west running terraces, and between the shorter north-south terraces, and this is true to a lesser extent also in North Barbican (Blocks XIV-XVIH). Blocks IX and XIII and the mews blocks are distinctive, and there are many variations to the layouts of the individual units. Blocks are described in terms of their number of storeys above podium level, which for North Barbican (blocks XIV and upwards) is a half-storey higher than that for the rest of the development. The different levels meet in the arts centre.

The terraces of flats are mainly set in pairs off top-lit stairwells and lift towers. All have a balcony, reached via sliding aluminium windows in thick varnished timber surrounds. These have concrete paviours, and some retain planting boxes. The interiors of the flats have cupboards by the front door containing letter boxes and metre boxes, and some retain kitchen cupboards, tiled bathrooms and a Garchey waste disposal system. The seventh-floor flats have high ceilings into distinctive round-arched roof spaces. Flats in the towers are larger, and with penthouse units that are larger still. The mews houses are designed to a simple yet high standard; these have not been inspected internally.

Blocks I, II and 111: Triangular plan with upswept balconies running round, jagged stepped tops containing penthouses, of up to three storeys with roof gardens. Below penthouse level there are three large flats per floor, the living rooms in the prows, served by a central triangular well with a lift on each side, which can be ordered from a common central control panel. Sliding timber windows, metal and glass balustrades, the steel

Volume I, page 7 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 uprights painted. Double-height glazed entrances, Lauderdale House also incorporating two ground-floor shops.

Block IV: Nos. 1-178 Defoe House. Seven storeys above podium with two storeys under. Twelve broad bays between giant concrete columns supporting cross beams, the ends of the beams on other floors exposed to form large bays. Each of these are subdivided into three room spans, forming a pattern for the flats along the facades of two and one units width between glazed firescreens. The podium is open, but with glazed entrances to the flats in each of the twelve bays. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and many with concrete window boxes, painted undersides of roof. 24 rooftop penthouses, with double height fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a distinctive white finish. The one-two pattern of the flats is explained by their being 'L '-shaped and having a double aspect, each pair wrapped around a central fully glazed lightwell containing staircase and lift.

Block IVB: Nos. 1-8 Lambert Jones Mews. Two storey houses of glazed engineering brick set forward of and below the level of the podium, reached via their own roadway, with granite setts continued as low walls to the fronts of the houses. Each house has a garage to the right of the front door. Doors and windows of timber under concrete lintels. First floor with corner windows and glazed doors under deep concrete lintels giving on to central stairs leading to roof. Paved near-flat roof, brick parapets with 1990s metal tops, behind which are slabbed roof gardens and projecting ventilated service or stores turrets. Interiors not inspected.

Block V: 101-114, 201-214, 301-314, 401-414, 501-514, 601-614, 701-704 Gilbert House, with attached public house. Seven wide bays, each three

Page 48 windows wide, with narrower bays at end, supported on twelve giant double pairs of concrete columns which descend into the lake. There is no podium, but a bridge (Gilbert Bridge) over the lake. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and some with concrete window boxes (more removed here than elsewhere), painted undersides of roof. Rooftop penthouses, with double height fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a distinctive white finish. Each flat is a structural bay wide, reached via lifts and stairs at each end. Under the bridge at the southern end is a public house, Crowders. A plaques commemorates the foundation of the Lady Eleanor Holles School on this site in 1711 (installed 1984) and at the northern end is the foundation stone of the Arts Centre, unveiled by HRH Queen Elizabeth and the Duke of Edinburgh on 20 November 1972, on the occasion of their Silver Wedding Anniversary.

Block VI: 1-114 Speed House. Seven storeys above podium with two storeys under. Seven broad bays between concrete columns supporting cross beams, the ends of the beams on other floors exposed to form large bays. Each of these are subdivided into three room spans, forming a pattern for the flats along the facades of two and one units width between glazed firescreens. A narrower eighth bay set at right angles. The podium is open, but with glazed entrances to the flats in each of the eight bays. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and many with concrete window boxes, painted undersides of roof. 24 rooftop penthouses, with double height fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a distinctive white finish. The one-two pattern of the flats is explained by their being 'L'-shaped and having a double aspect, each pair wrapped around a central fully glazed lightwell containing staircase and lift. Two-storey maisonettes set around similar staircases and lifts on the levels below the podium, with car ports and bedrooms on the lower level.

Block VII: 101-124,201-204,301-344,401-404,501-544,601-604, 701-724 Willoughby House. Flats and two-storey maisonettes. Seven storeys. Seventeen main bays, with eight wide bays and shorter end units set symmetrically either side of a central lift and stairwell, with escape doors on to the west-facing balcony, and with further lifts and stairs at either end. Each bay is made up of two units, each three varnished timber windows wide, with the right-hand window sliding opening on to balcony. Metal and glass balustrades, many with concrete planting boxes, painted undersides of balcony roof. Rooftop penthouses, with double height fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a white finish.

Volume I, page 8 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

Block VIIB: 1-26 Brandon Mews, including water shute into the lake. Low mews block clad in glazed engineering brick set forward of Willoughby House by the east end of the lake. Two- storey mews houses, with internal bathrooms and staircases served by angled rooflights, covered over in the 1980s by round-arched brown perspex glazing. Houses accessed in groups of four or five via walkways off the public podium; a further walkway extends out into the lake, via staircase to a podium in the lake containing planting and a water shute which recycles and aerates the water in the lake.

Block VIII: 1-192 Andrewes House. Seven storeys above podium with two storeys under. Eleven broad bays between giant concrete columns supporting cross beams, the ends of the beams on other floors exposed to form a rhythm of large bays. Each of these are subdivided into three room spans, forming a pattern for the flats along the facades of two and one units width between glazed firescreens. The podium is open, but with glazed entrances to the flats in each of the eleven bays. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies (renewed 1999-2000), with metal and glass balustrades and many with concrete window boxes; painted undersides of roof. 22 rooftop penthouses, with double height fully- glazed ends under rounded tops, given a distinctive white finish. The one-two pattern of the flats is explained by their being 'L'-shaped and having a double aspect, each pair wrapped around a central glazed lightwell (glazing renewed with thicker sections and roof partly infilled in 1999- 2000) containing staircase and lift. Two-storey mews houses clad in glazed engineering brick set under podium, with south-facing patios incorporating ventilation holes to car park below.

Page 49 Block IX: 1-10 The Postern. Four-storey houses over basement, all clad in glazed engineering brick, and with flat two-step roofs with higher service duct. The houses can be entered at third storey and from street level two storeys below, where there are garages also. Lowest openings with inverted round-arched form. Long, narrow plans to living and bedrooms on lower floors, kitchen and dining rooms at podium level, with bedroom and roof garden over, all linked via internal dog-leg stairs with open treads. The podium is finished with round-arcaded pattern to mullions supporting balustrade on the open east side.

Block XIII: 1-16 Wallside. Houses, including two units for doctor, dentist, or similar professional chambers. Glazed engineering brick cladding, with two-step flat roofs incorporating roof garden, and higher ventilation flue. Four storeys, set on, above and below the podium. Houses set in pairs save at either end, and entered at podium level, with square brick clad piers supporting floor above the podium. Bedrooms mainly on lower floors, reached via open tread dog-leg stair, but with some variations in the internal planning that makes it distinctive from the more regular adjoining Postern.

Block X: 101-114,201-214,301-314,401-414,501-514, 601-614, 701-704 Mountjoy House. Seven storeys. Five wide bays, each three windows wide, with narrower bays at end, supported on giant double pairs of concrete columns which descend to the level of the lake. There is a series of narrow walkways. The block is entered via lifts and stairs at either end, with flats set either east or west of these internal stairwell lobbies. Each flat is a structural bay wide, save for the penthouse flats. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and some with concrete window boxes, painted undersides of roof. Rooftop penthouses, with double height rooms lit by fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a white finish.

Block XI: 1-155 House. Seven storeys above podium with two storeys under. Eleven and a half bays between concrete columns supporting cross beams, the ends of the beams on other floors exposed to form a rhythm of large bays. Each of these are subdivided into three room spans, forming a pattern for the flats along the facades of two and one units width between glazed firescreens. The podium is open, but with

Volume I, page 9 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 glazed entrances to the flats in nine bays. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and many with concrete window boxes. Painted undersides of roof. 24 rooftop penthouses, with double height fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a white finish. The one-two pattern of the flats is explained by their being 'L'-shaped and having a double aspect, each pair wrapped around a central fully glazed lightwell containing staircase and lift. At the eastern end Thomas More House abuts Mountjoy House, and has underneath it the sports hall range of the City of London School for Girls.

Block XII: 101-112, 201-212, 301-312,401-412, 501-512,601-612, 701-703 Seddon House. Seven storeys. Six wide bays, each three windows wide, with narrower bays at end, supported on giant double pairs of concrete columns which descend to the level of the lake below the podium. The block is entered via lifts and stairs at either end, with flats set either east or west of these internal stairwell lobbies save for the penthouse. Each flat is a structural bay wide, save for the penthouse flats which are two. Sliding varnished timber windows set behind paved balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and most with concrete window boxes. Painted undersides of roof. Rooftop penthouses, with double height rooms lit by fully-glazed ends under rounded tops, given a white finish.

Block XIII: See The Postern above.

Block XIV: 1-133 John Trundle House: Twelve bays, with four entrances, stairs and lifts, and central corridor serving single-aspect flats. Seven storeys plus mezzanine entrance, set above podium level of North Barbican above Beech Street (Beech Gardens). The block is supported on

Page 50 paired columns which support the cross walls, with cross beams expressed externally and with white-painted soffits. Rooftop flats have higher, full-glazed round-arched form, eight to the block, set in pairs save at the ends, set behind balconies, forming a distinctive white roof-line. The lower floors have three windows per bay, each with central varnished wood door opening on to balcony, all with planting boxes behind metal and glass balustrades. The steps up the mezzanine entrances are tiled, and each has a glass door. Deep curved balustrade to podium on both sides, under which is White Lyon Court, giving on to a ramp which leads from Goswell Road to Beech Gardens. This elevation is entirely glazed, with steel windows and doors.

Block XV: 201-223, 301-323, 501-523 Bunyan House: seventeen-bay block, mainly of maisonettes arranged in scissor plan around central corridors. Six storeys set over open ground floor, supported on two rows each of ten paired giant columns, which extend down to frame brick paved ramp leading from Goswell Road to Beech Gardens. Entrance, lift and stair tower at north-east end. Underneath the podium is a fitness centre, entirely glazed with metal framed windows. Maisonettes have varnished timber windows set behind balconies, with metal and glass balustrades and planting boxes. Complex north elevation with paired balconies on levels 2, 3 and 5, with continuous glazing to levels 1 and 4. On the south elevation levels 1 and 4 are set behind the others. White-painted soffits. Roof level with high round-arched motif to principal rooms, entirely glazed between exposed concrete frames. These higher rooms are set in pairs with balconies between. Bunyan House is set behind a landscaped forecourt on the podium, with planting boxes formed of red paviours, and a circular fountain pool.

Block XVI: 101-108,201-208,301-308,401-408,501-508, 601-608,701-708 Bryer Court. Eight bay block of seven storeys set over open podium floor with large pool on podium, supported on paired giant columns. Rear access gallery reached from entrance lobby, stairs and lifts at southern end of block. The single aspect design is dictated by the presence of Murray House (1956) behind, which intrudes into the Barbican site. The lower floors with varnished wooden windows, those in the centre opening on to balconies with metal and glass balustrades and planting boxes; white- painted soffits; the top floor with higher, round-arched rooms entirely glazed between concrete frame and with white tops.

Volume I, page 10 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Block XVII: 201-268, 301-368, 501-568 Ben Jonson House. 52-bay block set over open podium floor and supported on two rows each of giant paired columns. Seven storeys. Complex north elevation with paired balconies on levels 2, 3 and 5, with continuous glazing to levels 1 and 4. On the south elevation levels 1 and 4 are set behind the others. White painted soffits. Roof level with high round-arched motif to principal rooms, entirely glazed between exposed concrete frames and forming roof-line. These higher rooms are set in pairs, save around lifts at either end and in centre, with balconies between. Podium with planting boxes and fountain in paved surrounds, the same red tiles facing round capsules set under the block and serving as exits, mainly for the conference centre underneath. To side of podium balustrade are large concrete raised planting boxes. Links to Breton House.

Block XVIII: 1-111 Breton House. Seven storeys and rooftop, entered from three entrances at mezzanine level above podium, with spinal corridor and rooms at podium level on north-east elevation. The block is supported on paired columns which support the cross walls, with cross beams expressed externally. White painted soffits. Roof-top flats have higher, full-glazed round-arched form, eight to the block, set in pairs save at the ends, set behind balconies, forming a white roof-line. The lower floors have three windows per bay, each with central varnished wood door opening on to balcony, with planting boxes behind metal and glass balustrades. The steps up the mezzanine entrances are tiled, and each has a glass door. YMCA (1965-71): 16-storey tower set off ramp at northern entrance to site from Goswell Road. The lower three floors fully glazed communal areas, with external escape stairs, the upper floors with smaller rooms set off staircases to north and south and with set-back bathrooms in the centre of the long ranges. Floor of staff flats and penthouse flat for warden. South side with projecting concrete fire escape, with glass screens flanking the exit from each floor. All windows of black painted steel, those to the rooms slightly inset with central pivots.

Page 51 Continuous set-back vertical glazing band to north stair. The height and position of the YMCA was designed to unite Barbican with Chamberlin, Powell and Bon's earlier , which features a tower of the same height.

The Podium has upswept concrete balustrades and brick/tile paviours. There are some large concrete planters at the northern and southern edges. To the south west of the site, Seddon Highwalk and John Wesley Highwalk are covered ways under white round-arched roofs. John Wesley Highwalk terminates in a glazed brick service tower containing stairs to Aldersgate Street and up to roof, with rounded walls and pyramidal roof.

Lake with brick paved surrounds, follows the remodelled line of the Underground railway between Barbican and Moorgate stations, and serves the filtration system for the Barbican Arts Centre. Geometrically placed fountains. Raised circular brick beds with fountains and planting front the broad terrace serving the Arts Centre, reached via steps down from the podium and from within the Arts Centre itself. Eight similar round brick gardens set at the level of the lake, and slightly sunken within it, accessed via spur in front of Andrewes House. The lake steps down a level, with fountain and waterfall, under Gilbert House.

City of London School for Girls. 1963-9, with infilling of 1990-1 by Dannatt, Johnson and Partners. Red semi-engineering brick on reinforced concrete frame, with exposed concrete in piers and beams. Main block of four storeys and semi-basement, with two-storey wing to side, which incorporates gymnasium and swimming pool. Flat roof on top serves as entrance and playground, and is paved in red brick paviours. A strong grid of timber and aluminium windows recessed behind projecting brick piers with concrete tops. Dannatt's infill, in grey brick, is treated as a simple pavilion. Timber and glass entrance doors give on to entrance hall overlooking main assembly hall, whose main floor is at basement level. Stairs rise through the centre of the school, with classrooms on either side and second-floor dining hall. Hard finishes of tiled floors and timber screens (overlooking hall and light wells) a particular feature of the interior, unusually finely detailed. Art and crafts rooms concentrated on the third floor. Lower wing retains brick arcade within Dannatt's extension, and built-in seating and concrete table in open section retained at southern end. Beyond this is the gymnasium, with swimming pool below; this extends to top-lit double-height section at deep end beyond.

Volume I, page 11 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

The school is of special interest for the quality of its materials, the strongly architectural quality of its double-height spaces, staircase hall and infilled arcade, and for the way its complex plan fits logically into an awkward site. It has been extended by Dannatt. It was the first part of the Barbican complex to be completed.

The Guildhall School of Music and Drama ( designed 1959, revised 1968, built 1971-7; partners in charge Peter Chamberlin and Christoph Bon, John Honer executive architect) is like the School for Girls clad in brick on a concrete frame, with bush hammering to exposed frame, which is expressed as a series of paired columns forming a ground-floor loggia overlooking the lake to the south. Exposed concrete lift tower at eastern corner of School. The Music School consists of practice studios on three levels spaced around two sides of the , which is about 75ft by 45ft, with recording studios underneath. The practice studios are seen externally as a line of octagonal boxes, stacked two and three storeys high, with lines of six facing the lake and of four to the east. Windows in thick timber surrounds, which with the spandrel panels below them are painted red. In the larger windows abstract stained glass frieze by Celia Frank. Roof-top garden above the music hall. An expansion joint separates the Music School at the front from the Drama School facing north, which has a theatre and movement studio, with library in between extending into barrel-vaulted roofs and bar below. The conservatory which surrounds the Arts Centre Theatre is extended eastwards to link with the small conservatory over the GSMD flytower. Hard red tiled floors to the small internal spaces, with wood block floors to larger rooms and halls, and carpet to music practice studios.

Page 52 The Arts Centre was largely designed in its present form in 1968, and was built 1971-82. Peter Chamberlin and Christoph Bon were architects in charge, with John Honer and Gordon Ruwald as project architects. Reinforced concrete, with innovative diaphragm walling, largely set below podium level. The principal spaces comprise a theatre designed for the Royal Shakespeare Company; a studio theatre -The Pit -added as the plans were evolved; a concert hall designed in conjunction with the London Symphony Orchestra; a public lending library; an art gallery for temporary exhibitions; three cinemas; a conservatory; offices; restaurants; shops and foyers. Principal entrance from Whitecross Street under canopy added to the designs of Diane Radford and Lindsey Bell in 1993-5, with glazed doors and security entrance to side; driveway over timber setts to left, with stage door for theatre beyond that. Above is the podium, and glazed conservatory wrapped around the theatre flytower (and that of the Guildhall School of Music and Drama) with aluminium glazing and doors. Beyond, on the higher podium of North Barbican, entrance to Barbican Exhibition Halls via glazed single-storey building, highly glazed under deep frieze. The halls are set below the podium. To the lake, bank of cafes and restaurants to right, clad in vertical white tiles. Stepped profile, with first-floor balcony over projecting ground-floor 'waterside' cafe, and landscaped roof terrace to upper level. Four storeys (three with restaurants), four main bays wide. To left, rounded staircase tower, and main arts centre of six and seven bays stepped behind Defoe House. Four bays facing lake expressed in square areas of vertical white towers over roof- garden, with fascia and metal glazed foyer areas below.

Foyers on three main levels including balcony, with theatre foyers on mezzanine level, now with wheelchair access bridge across. Woodblock floor at stalls (service road) level. Regularly spaced stairs either side of central lifts, and forming open wells through the three levels. Suspended iridescent perspex sculpture by Michel Santry, and busts of Shakespeare by Roubiliac (1760) and of Vaughan Williams by Jacob Epstein. Alterations and additional sculpture by Pentagram 1993-5.

To west of foyer, separated from it by internal glazed partitions, the library is set on two main levels, including areas for children's library and music library. There are internal staircases (one of which is now blocked) and natural timber fittings. Broad external staircase from North Barbican has entrance to side. Art Gallery on two floors over library and foyer. The main, upper level has small galleries opening off a central core around

Volume I, page 12 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 central staircase, which overlooks the foyers below. Separate lower gallery curved round the Barbican Hall, marks the form of Frobisher Crescent above. There is a sculpture Court over the Barbican Hall, with doors (not used) into art gallery, and which is backed by Frobisher Crescent. Frobisher Crescent houses offices for the Barbican Arts Centre's administration.

Theatre: first designed 1959 as an adjunct to the Guildhall School of Music and Drama, with theatre consultant Richard Southern. The scheme was expanded in 1964 with the involvement of the Royal Shakespeare Theatre, and the final designs date from April 1968. Built 1970-82, Peter Chamberlin architect in charge succeeded by Christoph Bon. Fan-shaped continental seating, with steeply raked stalls and balconies, and steep side slips. Seating devised by Robin Day. The theatre is lined in Peruvian walnut, lightly stained, which contrasts with the bush- hammered balcony fronts. Louvred ceiling unites the auditorium and fixed forestage areas. The front rows of seats can be lowered to make an orchestra pit if required, although there is more room for musicians above the wings to either side. Stage with 100ft fly tower to grid, with storage area for flats, and stairs to traps below.

The theatre is entered from stairs on two side, which have doors opening on to the separate rows, and controlled by magnets. The dog-leg stairs on either side form high spaces, and give on to foyers set between the theatre and the main Barbican space.

Concert hall, designed in consultation with Hugh Creighton, acoustic consultant. Spans are bridged by post-tensioned reinforced concrete double cruciform beams, with timber canopy, reflective decoration in aspen pine to side walls and (a remodelling of 1994) balcony fronts. Stepped timber

Page 53 section over stage and along rear stage wall profiled to reflect the sound forward into the auditorium, and conceals film screens, .house curtains, lighting an loudspeakers, as well as a maintenance gantry. The rear of the stage can be raised. and the front brought forward by removing seats and raising a 5' section of the auditorium. Stalls with two balconies, designed with a fan-shaped plan so as to minimise the distance between the stage and the rear seats. Seating by Robin Day incorporated into the stepping of the levels, with timber floors (the steps form the back of each row).

Cinema and studio theatre (the Pit) set in basement, simply finished, The Pit designed for maximum flexibility, with tiered seats around a central space that can be adapted for end - stage, three-sided or in-the-round productions. Two further cinemas at conservatory level.

Volume I, page 13 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

Registered Park and Garden - THE BARBICAN Grade: II* Date first registered: 20 Feb 2003

Details - A group of public, communal, and domestic gardens, courtyards, and squares of 1962-82 forming an integral part of a housing estate designed by Chamberlin Powell and Bon with Ove Arup and Partners for the Corporation of London.

HISTORIC DEVELOPMENT

The Barbican encloses the medieval and later St Giles' church and the site of its former churchyard, and mainly covers the site of late C19 industrial warehouses which were bombed during the Second World War. After the bombing, the Corporation of London, who owned the area, identified it for commercial use (Forshaw and Abercrombie, 1943). In 1951 however part of the site was earmarked for residential development. Subsequently a competition was held which was won by the architect Geoffry Powell, who had formed a partnership with the architects Chamberlin and Bon (CPB). The work of CPB was strongly influenced by the architecture of Le Corbusier (Building 1978). CPB produced their first detailed plans for The Barbican

Page 54 in 1956, which were revised in early 1959 and approved in December that year. In 1960, Ove Arup and Partners were appointed as structural engineers. Work on The Barbican did not start until 1963, and the estate was not completed until 1973.

The series of public, communal, and domestic gardens, courtyards, and squares forms an integral part of the architecture of The Barbican, focused on the public open space occupied by the main canal in front of the Arts Centre. Built-in plant boxes were specifically designed for the balconies of the residential blocks, as were large concrete planters to line the raised walks. Series of small private gardens were also designed, such as, for example, for the lower-level apartments in Andrewes House and the various mews houses.

The site remains (2002) in the ownership of the Corporation of London with properties being sold leasehold to individuals.

DESCRIPTION

LOCATION, AREA, BOUNDARIES, LANDFORM, SETTING The Barbican, which covers an area of c 15ha, is situated in a densely built up area in the City of London. Immediately to its north lies the YMCA building and Golden Lane Housing Estate (1950s). To the east the site is bounded by Silk Street and Moor Lane, with Moorgate Tube Station beyond. The southern boundary is formed by , Wood Street, and Fore Street, and the western boundary by Aldersgate Street and Barbican Tube Station. The site rises above street level, with car parking below it, and comprises terraces and buildings built on various levels linked by a network of steps, raised walks, and pedestrian bridges.

ENTRANCES AND APPROACHES Surrounding roads, and in particular Barbican Tube Station situated to the west, or Moorgate Tube Station to the east of the estate, allow pedestrian access to The Barbican. The estate can also be approached by car from Aldersgate Street to the west or London Wall, Wood Street, and Fore Street to the south, where various entrances give access to the car parks situated below The Barbican.

Volume I, page 14 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

PRINCIPAL BUILDINGS The Barbican is a largely residential estate set on a raised pedestrian podium above ground-level car parking, built 1962-82 by the architects Chamberlin, Powell and Bon. It comprises 2113 flats, maisonettes, and terraced houses and a number of communal and public buildings including the Arts Centre, the Guildhall School of Music and Drama, the City of London School for Girls (all listed grade II), and St Giles' church (listed grade I). From within the various buildings of the estate are extensive and fine views of the gardens.

GARDENS AND PLEASURE GROUNDS The main layout consists of two large lawns planted with trees, one in the east part of the site, surrounded by Speed House, Willoughby House, Andrewes House, and Gilbert House, and the other to the west surrounded by Defoe House, Seddon House, Thomas More House, and Mountjoy House. A formal canal running west to east through the centre of the site links the lawns, and at its east end, in front of Willoughby House, flows over a large cascade. From here the canal runs westwards underneath Gilbert House and is set with a series of fountains in a grid pattern. Along the north side of the canal, to the south of, and overlooked by, the Arts Centre, is Lakeside Terrace, incorporating a series of eight further fountains. Five are circular and recessed into the terrace with linked steps down to the canal. A further three, two semicircular, are set on the edge of the terrace. Along the south side of the canal, just east of Gilbert House, is a series of small circular islands constructed of red brick with seating areas and flower beds, which can be accessed from a spur on the north front of Andrewes House. Further westwards, west of Gilbert House, along the north side of the canal, are three semicircular fountains with a terrace beyond. A further L-shaped canal runs south from the City of London School for Girls, then to Mountjoy House; the eastern arm connects Mountjoy House and the terraced housing called Wallside and The

Page 55 Postern. The two canals surround a brick-paved square on three sides, known as St Giles Terrace, which covers the former churchyard of St Giles' church, the latter standing just off-centre in the square. Part of the building of The City of London School for Girls stands within the north-west corner of the square. In the square north of St Giles' church are a series of rectangular and semicircular raised beds in which C18 and C19 gravestones of the former churchyard are set. The beds are lined with Victorian-style lamp posts and bollards introduced in the late 1980s. On the south side of the square, small steps lead down through the retaining wall, in which old gravestones have been re-set, to the level of the canal from where a small bridge leads into a secluded communal garden which incorporates the excavated footings of the city's Roman wall (scheduled ancient monument). The remains of the Roman wall lead southwards, bounding the east side of a lawn to the east of the , beyond which wall and lawn lies the garden of the Barber Surgeon's Hall (outside the area here registered).

In the northern part of The Barbican lies the Arts Centre with, adjacent to its east, the Guildhall School of Music and Drama. Attached to the south-east of the Arts Centre, several storeys above ground level, is a large conservatory housing a collection of tropical trees and plants, an aviary, and a small lake. Several doorways lead from the Conservatory south and south-east onto the roof of the Arts Centre, to an alpine garden with a pond, various sculptures, and a pergola walk. North-west of the Arts Centre lies Frobisher Crescent, which design is based on Jewin Crescent that formerly stood here and was damaged during the Second World War. The public sculpture display area planned by Chamberlin, Powell and Bon for Frobisher Crescent was never used as such. In the far northern part of the site stand three 125m high, triangular residential tower blocks: Lauderdale Tower, Shakespeare Tower, and Cromwell Tower, following the line of Beech Street, with John Trundle Court, Bryer Court, Ben Johnson House, and Breton House beyond the road. These residential blocks and the Towers are set in extensive terrace gardens paved in red brick and adorned with ponds, fountains, sculptures, flower beds, and borders. In particular Beech Gardens lies to the north of the estate, surrounded by Bunyan Court, Bryer Court, and John Trundle House, laid out to incorporate a small water feature with a fountain and various raised beds. The terrace gardens originate from the 1970s, and were refurbished in 1983 by Building Design Partnership for the Corporation of London.

Volume I, page 15 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 The Barbican includes various small private gardens, including roof gardens, attached to individual apartments or mews houses, and the balconies on the exterior of the residential buildings contain built-in concrete plant boxes creating an effect of hanging gardens. The design and structural planting of these gardens and balconies is uniform, and closely follows the lines and rhythm of the architecture.

REFERENCES

The Builder, (1 June 1956), p 623; (29 May 1959), pp 949-51 Architects' Journal, (7 June 1956), pp 632-6; (28 May 1959), pp 795-6; (4 June 1959), pp 34-41 Architectural Design, (October 1959), pp 416-19; (September 1960), p 365; (July 1970), p 354 E Carter, The Future of London (1962) F E Cleary, The Flowering City (1969), p 47 Building, (16 June 1978) S Bradley and N Pevsner, The Buildings of England: London 1 The City of London (1997), pp 281-6

Maps Forshaw and Abercrombie, Plan, 1943 (in Carter 1962)

Description written: March 2002 Amended: July 2002; February 2003 (SR) Register Inspector: FDM Edited: November 2003 Page 56

Volume I, page 16 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Appendix A: List of principal contacts

Department of the Built Environment Department of Open Spaces City of London Corporation City of London Corporation PO Box 270 City Gardens Guildhall Rooms 73-77, 65 London Wall London EC2P 2EJ Londo

Tel: 020 7332 1710 Tel: 020 7374 4127 E-mail: [email protected] Website: www.cityoflondon.gov.uk/open_spaces Website: www.cityoflondon.gov.uk/plans

Page 57 Barbican Estate Office Twentieth Century Society City of London Corporation 70 Cowcross Street Lauderdale Place London EC1M 6EJ Barbican London EC2Y

Tel: 020 7029 3944 Tel: 020 7250 3857 E-mail: [email protected] e-mail: [email protected] Website: www.cityoflondon.gov.uk/our_services/residents_housing website: www.c20society.org.uk

English Heritage 1 Waterhouse Square 138-142 Holborn London EC1N 2ST

Tel: 020 7973 3000 E-mail: www.english-heritage.org.uk/policy Website: www.english-heritage.org.uk

Volume I, page 17 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 1. Listed Building Management Guidelines: • Management Agreements set out the concordat that background and policy has been agreed between individual owners and occupiers, the Local Planning Authority, English 1.1 Listed Building Management Guidelines are intended to Heritage and other relevant parties about the degree be a tool for the positive, pro-active management of of acceptable change within a listed building, historic buildings and to guide future change. They although the extent to which this can be conclusive is provide a structured framework from which informed constrained by the current legislation (see paragraph decisions can be made. Listed Building Management 1.4). These are usually employed in cases of Guidelines aim to set out the agreements made between buildings where there is a single owner of a building, all parties including owners, residents, the Local such as a public or corporate owner. Planning Authority, English Heritage and amenity societies about the degree of change which may be • Management Guidelines offer guidance on the acceptable to and within the building or heritage asset, special architectural or historic interest of a building Page 58 although the extent to which this can be definitive is or group of buildings, the types of changes that may constrained by current legislation (see paragraph 1.4) or may not require Listed Building Consent, and the conditions in which these may be acceptable. They 1.2 There are a number of different conservation policy may also contain advice on good practice in repair instruments that may be employed to assist in the and maintenance. The extent to which such management of change in listed buildings: documents are able to offer definitive guidance on change is limited by current legislation (see • Conservation Plans aim to assess how the paragraph 1.4). They are prepared by the Local significance of a building should be protected in any Planning Authority in conjunction with owners, future use, alteration or development, and identify residents/occupiers, English Heritage and amenity areas of vulnerability that may need particular societies and are subject to consultation. They are vigilance. These are usually produced by specialist more suited to circumstances where there are a consultants who identify the key heritage values of substantial number of individual stakeholders, such the building/s and recommend appropriate measures as large housing estates, where it would be for good stewardship. Conservation Plans are impractical to obtain the individual agreement of each sometimes used to help justify or steer planning owner or occupier/ householder and where it may be and/or grant applications for significant changes. unrealistic to rely on enforcement as the primary means of control. They may then be adopted as

Volume I, page 18 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 supplementary planning documents by the Local change may or may not require Listed Building Consent. Planning Authority and considered as a ‘material Essentially, Section 7 of the Planning (Listed Buildings consideration’ in the processing of individual cases. and Conservation Areas) Act 1990 means that Listed Building Management Guidelines cannot remove the 1.3 The first Listed Building Management Guidelines were need to obtain Listed Building Consent for works of produced for the Willis Corroon Building in Ipswich in alteration which affect the character of a building of 1992. Guidelines produced since then have been special architectural and historic interest (see predominantly for post-war listed buildings or estates paragraphs 6.6 and 6.9). The guidelines provide an where there is ongoing pressure for change and where assessment of the balance to be sought in preserving building owners have sought greater clarity on the extent the character and special interest of listed buildings of their freedom to make alterations without the need for against the pressure for change and offer advice on the formal consent. In 1995, English Heritage published a responsible stewardship of heritage assets. guidance note entitled, ‘Developing guidelines for the management of listed buildings’. More recently in June 1.5 Listed Building Management Guidelines provide an

Page 59 2003, in collaboration with the Office of the Deputy opportunity to explore and articulate the special Prime Minister (ODPM), the findings of the jointly architectural and historic interest of the building/s and commissioned study titled ‘Streamlining Listed Building their setting; something that the description in the list Consent: Lessons from the use of Management entry is not intended to provide (see paragraph 6.4). The Agreements’ were published. In July 2003, the result should be an informed understanding of the Department for Culture, Media and Sport (DCMS) building and the aspects which contribute to its special published a consultation paper ‘Protecting our historic architectural or historic interest and which should be environment: making the system work better’, which safeguarded during the management of change. suggests that greater opportunity should be given to owners of listed buildings to enter into Management 1.6 Listed Building Management Guidelines can only be an Agreements. The use of such documents has a clear informal consensus between stakeholders on the and increasing role to play in the listed building control acceptability of change within the building. Section 7 of system and in promoting constructive, continued the 1990 Act provides that Listed Building Consent will dialogue and mutual trust and understanding between be required where works will affect the character of a building owners and the statutory authorities. listed building, irrespective of any agreements between parties regarding the acceptability of the proposals. 1.4 One of the key functions of Listed Building Management Guidelines is to provide clarification as to what types of

Volume I, page 19 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 1.7 Given that guidelines are an informal consensus between stakeholders but can have weight when • To recommend other conservation strategies for the adopted as a planning policy document (see section benefit of the estate 1.8), appropriate consultation is key to their success. The views expressed should represent a consensus • To provide an opportunity for all interested parties to reached by all those involved in the production of the contribute to the document document including consultees. The document should also be reviewed on a regular basis. • To provide an opportunity for regular review

1.8 It is intended that the updated Guidelines will have the status of a Supplementary Planning Document within the Local Development Framework. They have been prepared in conformity with Core Strategy policy CS12 ‘Historic Environment’ .The purpose of these Guidelines

Page 60 is to provide further detailed guidance on how the City’s development plan policies concerning the Barbican are to be implemented.

1.9 In conclusion, the key aims of Listed Building Management Guidelines are:

• To record and analyse the character and special interest of the buildings and their setting both as a whole and as individual parts

• To provide clear guidance on the implementation and management of change and the protection of character and special interest

• To set standards of best practice for the maintenance of the estate by the City of London Corporation (Hereafter called the City Corporation)

Volume I, page 20 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 2. The Barbican Estate: best practice • By recognising that there are different types of buildings and uses within the Barbican Estate and 2.1 This document has been prepared in line with best that each of these should be appraised separately practice, guidance notes, and advice issued by English rather than applying broad-brush policies across all Heritage and CLG. English Heritage has been actively buildings involved in the production of this document and has contributed towards the overall costs of production. • By adopting a systematic approach to change across the whole Estate so that a consistency of 2.2 The Department of the Built Environment at the City approach is maintained throughout Corporation - which has project managed the production and review of these Guidelines - seeks to achieve best • By exploring diverse possible conservation solutions practice in all its work.The City Corporation has for the Barbican Estate including assessing the managed the review of the Guidelines in line with the potential for establishing Heritage Flats, salvage of statutory framework for the preparation of SPD and fixtures and fittings, and other measures

Page 61 taken into account policy guidance issued by English Heritage (the research report titled ‘Streamlining listed • By including a review programme for the Listed building consent: Lessons from the use of Management Building Management Guidelines within the Agreements’ in particular) in the following ways: document to ensure that it remains relevant and sustainable • By actively involving all key interests in a project Working Party • By arranging a comprehensive review of the Guidelines after 5 years in operation to assess their • By consulting with all owners and occupiers of the effectiveness in action, and invite and incorporate as residential Barbican buildings on the principles of the appropriate further consultation responses and Listed Building Management Guidelines and taking revisions. views and ideas into account in the final draft of the document 2.3 Volumes I and II are the first stage of a three stage plan for the development of Listed Building Management • By appointing independent consultants experienced Guidelines for the Barbican Estate. The further planned in such work stages comprise Volume III: Arts Centre, Schools and Other Buildings and Volume IV: Landscaping to be undertaken when funding permits.

Volume I, page 21 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

3. Aims and objectives of the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines

• To identify the nature and extent of the special architectural and historic interest of the Barbican Estate.

• To provide succinct information about the

implications of ‘listing’ to occupiers, managers, their

agents and decision makers regarding all the

buildings on the Barbican Estate.

• To provide a degree of certainty to help the Page 62 occupiers, managers, their agents and decision

makers understand how proposals for alterations to

the buildings on the Barbican Estate will be

considered and to outline the process to be followed

if consent is required.

• To provide a working manual for cultivating best

practice in the general maintenance and care of the

Barbican Estate.

• To enable the City Corporation and English Heritage to manage changes which could affect the special architectural and historic interest of the Barbican Estate, and to provide information and advice regarding these changes, effectively.

Volume I, page 22 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 4.3 In 1947, the Holden-Holford Plan was published under 4. History of the Barbican Estate the title of ‘Reconstruction in The City of London’. The basic premise, was to create a ring road around the city, Planning policy in the post-war era part of which would be raised up on stilts to enable the centre to become traffic free and developed with courts 4.1 In the middle of the 19 th century over 130,000 people and gardens as a response to the increasing dominance were resident in the City of London but by 1952 the of the motor vehicle. The only parts of the plan to be number of people living within the Square Mile had implemented were the east-west routes on Upper and dropped to just 5,000. Business and commerce had Lower Thames Streets and the extension to Victoria become the main uses of land in the City. Residents Embankment. who had lost their homes during the bombing of the 2 nd World War were re-housed in areas outside the centre. 4.4 The subsequent Martin-Mealand Scheme concentrated However, the City Corporation was concerned about the on the area to the north of St Pauls, a part of the City depopulation of the City and turned its attention to this that had been totally devastated by bombing raids during

Page 63 issue when planning the rebuilding of the City in the WWII. The Scheme was the result of a partnership post-war era. between London and the City Corporation. The detailed work was undertaken by H.A. 4.2 Plans and reports at this time were concerned with land Mealand (City Planning Officer, City Corporation) and Sir use zones such as the grouping of shopping and other Leslie Martin (London County Council). Announced in community facilities. Mixed developments of houses and September 1955, the Scheme was based around the flats with public open spaces and some private gardens concept of an integrated series of office towers along were popular with planners and were based on the both sides of Route XI (London Wall) on a north-south community principle of the neighbourhood unit axis to minimise overshadowing of the high-density developed in the USA during the 1920’s. There was also residential development behind it around St Giles a shift away from the ideal of the garden suburb, which Church. The concept of Route XI had formed part of the had been popular in the early 20 th century, towards that earlier Holden-Holford Plan but on a different alignment. of the garden city. The innovation of ‘highwalks’ as a Further towers were also proposed in the north-east and means of separating road traffic from pedestrian north-west of the area. movement and facilities was also an increasingly popular planning strategy in developing self-contained 4.5 The Scheme, while never fully implemented, provided communities. the seed for the proposals for the Barbican Estate. The

Volume I, page 23 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Committee Report of May 1956 to the Court of Common Kingston School of Art College, in 1952. He invited his Council on the proposals states; colleagues Christoph Bon and Joseph Chamberlin to join him in developing a detailed design for the Golden “In any event, any scheme propounded by the Architects Lane Estate. is to be fully integrated with the proposals contained in the Martin-Mealand Scheme for commercial 4.8 Chamberlin, Powell and Bon embraced Modernism as development on the Eastern and Southern boundaries of exemplified in schemes by architects such as Le the above defined area”. Corbusier whose vision of a rational, functional approach to design rejected some of the conventional forms of Chamberlin, Powell and Bon urban design, such as streets lined with houses. They sought to create an urban enclave with high density 4.6 Following the end of WWII, there was a national housing and a clear definition of planned spaces: private expectation that standards of living should improve and and public, segregated vehicular and pedestrian that the provision of new housing should be the latest in movement systems, and fully integrated retail and

Page 64 architectural design. Bomb damage combined with community facilities. concerns about and loss of the countryside led planners and architects to re-examine the potential 4.9 The original design for Golden Lane Estate, the of living in urban areas. Modernist architectural imagery Barbican’s immediate antecedent (and also now listed) also had a significant impact on planners and architects was dominated by a block eleven storeys high with in Britain and the work of Le Corbusier - particularly at twelve low blocks and a community centre arranged Unité d’Habitation at Marseilles (1947-52) - had a around a series of courts. The design continued to be significant influence upon Chamberlin, Powell and Bon. modified during the nine years it took to construct the Estate. Crescent House, the final building to be 4.7 Architectural competitions were launched by a number constructed, marks a departure from the earlier curtain of local authorities across the country to design and wall blocks of the 1950’s. It is a more robust, expressed construct high density, low-cost modern housing. In structure and its shape responds to the gently curving 1951, the City Corporation compulsorily purchased land line of the street, hence the name Crescent House. The around Goswell Road and Golden Lane and announced ideas explored in the design of this building had a a competition to design such a housing estate mainly for significant impact on the subsequent character of the single people and couples who had key jobs in the city Barbican Estate and to reflect its importance in the such as caretakers, nurses and policemen. This was development of design concepts in the later project it is won by Geoffrey Powell, a lecturer in architecture at the listed grade II*.

Volume I, page 24 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

4.10 The texture and colour of the facing materials were key aspects of the design of Golden Lane. Pick-hammered The Barbican Estate concrete and expressed loadbearing brick crosswalls gave depth to the elevations while the use of opaque 4.12 In 1955, the City Corporation commissioned Chamberlin, glass cladding created interest through colour. As the Powell and Bon to prepare a scheme for redevelopment architects’ ideas developed, the design of the blocks (with estimated costs) which was to be integrated with became more robust and textured with bush-hammered the proposed commercial development along London concrete that was later used on the Barbican Estate. Wall as part of the Martin-Mealand Plan. This scheme Great Arthur House was the focal element in the design, was submitted to the Corporation of London in May as emphasised by its rooftop canopy and other features. 1956. It was the first tower to exceed the contemporary 100ft height restriction and was for a time, the tallest 4.13 At the same time, a voluntary group called the New residential building in London, later exceeded by the Barbican Committee prepared a scheme for the

Page 65 Barbican towers. The architects were as concerned redevelopment of the area. The scheme was refused by about the urban character of the spaces between the the City Corporation and dismissed on appeal as it was buildings as they were about the buildings themselves considered that the vast commercial premises it and the landscaping at Golden Lane was radical - proposed would greatly increase congestion in Central creating hard landscaped areas on different levels. London. The Minister of Housing indicated in his decision that that there would be advantages in creating 4.11 The dominance and scale of towers set within groups of a genuine residential neighbourhood in the city, which lower scale residential blocks, the use of textured incorporated schools, shops, open spaces and other concrete, terraces, balconies and planned landscaping amenities even if this meant foregoing profitable returns intended to be viewed from above are all common on the land. features of Golden Lane and Barbican Estates. Both also sought to employ a mix of commercial, residential 4.14 The City Corporation resolved to accept the Minister’s and community uses in an effort to make the Estates recommendations and invited Chamberlin, Powell and self-contained and sustainable. Thus although the Bon to prepare a revised scheme which was presented design vocabulary can be seen to develop over the two in November 1959. This scheme included flats and projects, they are both pre-eminent in presenting the first maisonettes, new buildings for the City of London substantial built visions of what the central fabric of a School for Girls and the Guildhall School of Music and post-war city might be like. Drama, a theatre, concert hall, art gallery, lending

Volume I, page 25 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 library, hostel for students and young people, shops, many other high rise buildings conceived as individual restaurants, public houses, car parking space as well as unrelated statements. reserving sites for a swimming pool and a gym. The scheme was accepted in principle and the City 4.17 The architectural vocabulary employed in the Barbican Corporation undertook to construct the Scheme itself. has been associated with the ‘Brutalist’ style with which The elevated walkway system on the podium, designed the architects had experimented in the later phases at to separate pedestrians from vehicles, was carried Golden Lane. The Brutalism movement was concerned forward from the Martin-Mealand Scheme and was to strike out in an alternative direction to what was then important in the Corporation’s assessment of perceived as the increasing blandness and conformity of Chamberlin, Powell and Bon’s proposals. much post-war modernism. Instead it made a virtue of exploiting the expressive qualities of common materials, 4.15 The City Corporation was also keen that the historical mainly exposed concrete (‘ beton brut’ ), and the explicit associations of the area be preserved in the new (and often exaggerated) representation of the ‘facts’ of development. Barbican - which means fortified outpost building construction. Thus structural members such as

Page 66 or gateway - refers to the entrance to the walled columns and beams are typically revealed unclad as if to medieval city through Cripplegate, which stood just north demonstrate their weight bearing tasks, with services of the earlier Roman fort. The names of famous elements conspicuously expressed as if to declare the historical figures associated with the area were chosen reality of the building’s operational anatomy. Bush- for the residential blocks and include Oliver Cromwell, hammering, where the surface of the cast concrete is Sir Thomas More, John Milton, Daniel Defoe and William ‘distressed’ using a power hammer with a special head Shakespeare. to expose the constituent aggregate, is widely used across the Barbican Estate. It gives the buildings 4.16 The Estate combined a sense of spaciousness with a distinctive ‘elemental’ texture and is an important high density of residential units by concentrating flats characteristic of the Estate. Bush-hammering is time- into three high towers of 43 storeys and a series of 7 consuming and expensive; an indicator of both the storey terrace blocks in u and z shapes as well as the architects’ and the Corporation’s commitment to creating YMCA hostel and now the converted Frobisher a high quality finish at the Barbican. Other distinctive Crescent. There are 2,070 flats and houses in 21 and characteristic materials include the metal framed buildings and housing for some 4,000 people. At the glazed panelling and the extensive use of engineering time of construction the towers were the tallest brick both in building elements and landscape works. residential buildings in Europe, and remain unique as a group composition in central London in contrast to the

Volume I, page 26 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 4.18 The residential buildings were never conceived as purpose built facilities. The City of London School for ‘social housing’. Instead, the City Corporation instructed Girls was the first part of the Barbican complex to be that the flats be designed for young professionals who completed. would work in the City. The influences of continental travel and food and the popularity of contemporary 4.21 The spaces between, and formed by, the buildings were Scandinavian design were all considered in the planning as important to the design as the buildings themselves. of the interior of the residential units. The internal spaces The use of brick to surface the walkways, edge the were generous and light, with flexibility for use of space. planter beds and minor structures ensures that the The kitchens and bathrooms were designed to be elemental palette of materials used at the Barbican is compact and functional. Balconies are an important further extended and emphasised. Other important feature of Barbican flats and can be found off most features of the landscaping include the lakes, public rooms with windows, such as living rooms, bedrooms terraces and gardens - designed to give aspect to every and studies. flat on the estate. The Barbican Estate landscaping is a designated heritage asset by virtue of its Listed status

4.19Page 67 The theatre, concert hall, cinemas, art gallery, lending and its inclusion on the English Heritage Register of library, restaurants and shops were integrated into an Parks and Gardens at grade II*. Registration is a Arts Centre with access from the elevated walkways. material consideration’ in the planning process, meaning The Arts Centre was the last building to be constructed that planning authorities must consider the impact of any on the Estate. One of the greatest challenges for the proposed development on the landscapes special architects was to fit so many facilities into such a defined character space. The building was designed to accommodate as many uses as possible below ground level, linking 4.22 St Giles Church (St Giles-without-Cripplegate) was one various performance buildings by multi-level walkways. of the few buildings in the area that survived the Hence the visual impact of the building within the Estate bombing raids of 1940. Constructed in the 16th century is minimised even though it is the largest multiple arts and incorporating an earlier tower, the church was venue in Europe. refaced in the 19th century and substantially repaired after WWII. While the building does not form part of the 4.20 There are two schools in the Barbican: the Guildhall Barbican Estate listing, it is a significant heritage asset in School of Music and Drama and the City of London its own right, listed Grade I and an important part of the School for Girls. Both schools were established prior to setting of the Barbican Estate and vice versa. Other the development of the Barbican Estate and relocated earlier surviving elements, including the gravestones there partly as it offered the opportunity to provide around the church and fragments of Roman and

Volume I, page 27 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 medieval walling (designated as Scheduled Ancient Monuments) also contribute to the sense of continuity between the Barbican and London’s rich history.

Page 68

Volume I, page 28 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

Phases of development Phase IV 1972-1973 John Trundle Court completed October 1972 4.23 The Barbican was constructed in 5 phases as follows: Breton House completed November 1972 Bunyan Court completed December 1972 Phase I: 1963-1966 Bryer Court completed February 1973 Public Services Buildings (Milton Court) Ben Jonson House completed March 1973 It should be noted that this building (demolished in 2008) Commercial areas did not form part of the listing. YMCA Hostel Block

Phase II 1963-1974 Phase V: 1971-1982 City of London Girls School 1963-1969 Arts Centre The Postern completed March 1971 Frobisher Crescent Wallside completed March 1971 Guildhall School of Music and Drama

Page 69 Mountjoy House completed April 1971 Thomas More House completed September 1973 Phase VA 1976 Defoe House completed December 1973 Shakespeare Tower completed February 1976 Lambert Jones Mews completed February 1974 Seddon House completed May 1974 Lauderdale Tower completed October 1974

Phase III 1969-1973 Speed House completed July 1969 Gilbert House completed August 1969 Andrews House completed November 1969 Brandon Mews completed November 1969 Willoughby House completed April 1971 Cromwell Tower completed January 1973

Volume I, page 29 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 5. ‘Special architectural and historic interest’ of changes to the building that may contribute to its Barbican Estate as a whole cumulative interest.

5.1 Listed building legislation requires that buildings have to The publication Conservation Principles produced in be identified as being not just of some interest but of 2008 by English Heritage, defines a series of values – ‘special architectural or historic interest’ in order to be evidential, historical, aesthetic and communal – the sum listed (Mynors:1995). ‘Special interest’ can include those of which would constitute the overall value, or special elements of a building’s architectural quality, structure, interest, of a heritage asset (whether or not it may be form and fittings which are part of its character, formally designated). It should be noted however that appearance and/or interest as well as its relationship this document does not form part of the statutory criteria with other buildings and the spaces that they create. used to assess a building for designation. There may also be circumstances relating to a building’s history that may lead to it being listed. What makes a 5.3 The Barbican Estate is of special architectural and building of special interest, and therefore eligible to be historic interest for a variety of reasons which are Page 70 listed, will vary in each case. explored in detail in Volume II of these Guidelines. 5.4 Section 4 of this volume outlines the social and historical 5.2 Section 7 of the 1990 Act, in discussing the control interest of the Estate, how the Corporation’s aspirations mechanism for a listed building refers to the requirement for the site evolved from commercial to mixed-use for consent for any works which would “affect its development dominated by residential buildings, and the character as a building of its special architectural or concepts which influenced the design of the Estate. historic interest”. The character of a listed building may Each of the subsequent volumes of these Guidelines will be defined by the architectural strategies exemplified in focus on the special architectural interest of their subject its organisation as well as its features: height, scale, buildings/areas (see 2.3). mass, form, materials and detail – both interior and exterior – its plan form, structural technique or other 5.5 In general terms, the Barbican Estate is considered to attributes, including its contribution to an architectural be of special interest because of the design concepts ensemble, or ‘group value’. This means that character employed by the architects. In successfully combining can be identified by the urban composition to which it such a wide variety of uses across a large estate of contributes in addition to such features as roof profiles, dense, high quality housing, the Barbican Estate is a construction materials and the scale and design of its unique example of coherent inner city planning in the windows as well as more intrinsic elements such as the early post-war era. It also combined the key planning relationship between different rooms in a building or later

Volume I, page 30 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 themes of highwalks and mega structure, both favoured 5.7 The architectural vocabulary of the residential buildings, planning strategies of their time. incorporating such features as planted balconies and white barrel vaulted roofs, distinguishes these buildings 5.6 The planning of the Estate as a complete composition, from the others on the Estate. However, the overall plan the placing of the towers with their distinctive silhouettes, form of the Barbican, and the integrated relationship the form of, and relationship between, the lower scale between buildings, spaces, lakes, podium walkways all housing blocks and the spaces and other uses all contribute to the special value of the composition as a contribute to the Estate’s special architectural interest. totality. The structural expression of the individual While the residential towers of Lauderdale, Shakespeare buildings on the Estate, the scale and rhythm of and Cromwell with their saw-tooth balconies, proclaim columns, edge beams and the consistent use of a the Estate far beyond its immediate boundary, it is the limited palette of selected materials - bush-hammered smaller scale buildings set around landscaped courts concrete, brindled brickwork, metal and timber framed that create the ambiance of the Estate itself. The glazed panels and screens are all particularly geometric order of the buildings and spaces is a strong characteristic.

Page 71 feature of the Estate when read in the context of the city plan and the discipline of its planning in contrast to its 5.8 The Estate stands distinct from its surrounding area, surroundings is equally legible in three dimensions. The both in terms of its overall scale and in the differentiation formal composition of buildings around a series of of its architectural language. The analogy of the Estate spatial ‘reservoirs’ balances a sense of segregation from as a fortress, particularly from street level on Aldersgate the city with its actual proximity, enhanced by the high Street, is another defining characteristic and reflects the walk connections. Despite the high density of the name ‘Barbican’. There are no roads across the Estate, scheme the civic scale and grandeur of the main spaces all vehicle movement taking place below the podium with their interpenetrating views prevent the while pedestrian traffic takes place at podium level and development from feeling oppressive. It is important that via the highwalk. This too contributes to the experience the external spaces in the Barbican are not diminished of the Barbican as a discrete urban ensemble – ‘a city or compromised by infill development or extensions. within a city’ – notwithstanding its actual linkages and Routes traversing the Estate are provided between, bridge connections. through and under buildings and across spaces – continuing into the adjoining parts of the City - and this 5.9 The Museum of London (adjacent to the Barbican Estate permeability is a significant part of the Estate’s on the highwalk) was designed by Powell and Moya coherence and connectivity. (1968-76). It is not listed and is not included as part of these Guidelines.

Volume I, page 31 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

5.10 The former Public Services Building, Milton Court, situated at the junction of Silk Street and Moor Lane, was constructed in the first phase of the development of the Barbican Estate. It was designed to house a fire station, coroners’ court and the City Weights and Measures Office. It was a free standing structure and its design and construction were different to the subsequent buildings on the Estate. It was not part of the ‘listing’ and has subsequently been demolished and replaced with a new residential tower incorporating new performance and rehearsal space for the Guildhall School of Music and Drama.

5.11Page 72 The Church of St Giles, Cripplegate is listed grade I. It is a much earlier building (mid 16th century), and though carefully integrated into the Estate was not part of the work constructed by Chamberlin, Powell and Bon. It is therefore not included in these Guidelines.

5.12 There are sections of the medieval London Wall, scheduled as an Ancient Monument, within the curtilage of the Barbican. These are also not covered by the Listed Building Management Guidelines (see paragraphs 8.5-8.6). However, the landscaping around these structures and St Giles Church is considered part of the Barbican Estate and will be considered as part of further volumes.

Volume I, page 32 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

6. Legislation, ‘listing’ and listed building control Listing: methodology and criteria

II th 6.1 Listed building controls are defined in primary legislation, 6.2 The Barbican Estate was listed at Grade on 5 government guidance and local policy. These Guidelines September 2001 by the Department of Culture, Media do not set out in full all the relevant legislation and and Sport (DCMS). guidance. Instead, this section aims to draw attention to the key sections of the most relevant documents as they 6.3 Under Section I of the 1990 Act there is a requirement apply to the management of change to listed buildings. that the Secretary of State keeps a statutory list of The main documents to which it will refer are: buildings of ‘special architectural or historic interest’. I II II Buildings can be given one of three grades: , * and I • Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) which reflect their relative importance with Grade being Act 1990 as amended the highest, recognising buildings of exceptional interest.

Page 73 II The Barbican is listed at grade , and it should be noted that post-war buildings, particularly those less than 30 • Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) years old, have to be of outstanding quality to be eligible Regulations 1990 as amended for listing.

• Arrangement for Handling Heritage Applications- 6.4 When a building is listed, a description of the Notification and Directions by Secretary of State, building is issued by English Heritage. This description is DETR Circular 01/2001 principally to aid identification. While list descriptions will

include mention of those features which contribute to its • Planning Policy Statement 5 (PPS5): Planning for special architectural and historic interest, they are not the Historic Environment March 2010 and Planning intended to provide a comprehensive or exclusive record Practice Guide of all the features of importance. Absence from the list

• description of any reference to a feature (whether London Plan 2011 internal or external) does not, therefore indicate that it is not of interest or that it can be removed or altered • City of London Local Development Framework Core without consent. Strategy 2011

Volume I, page 33 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 This applies to all list descriptions. Therefore the list the polycarbonate roofs at Brandon Mews, which were description for the Barbican, which is set out in plate 2, erected prior to the listing of the Estate, form part of the should not be interpreted as being the extent of the listed building. Any proposals that affect these later special architectural and historic interest of the Estate. works would need to be carefully assessed.

6.5 Users of this document are reminded that the Barbican Listed Building Consent Estate is listed in its entirety, both internally and externally. The Department of the Built Environment is 6.8 The Planning (Listed Building and Conservation Areas) happy to clarify any queries about the extent of the Act 1990 sets out the legislation as it relates to listed listing and recommend that they be contacted if there is buildings. Chapter II of Part I of the Act sets out the any uncertainty in this respect prior to the execution of process for the authorisation of works affecting listed any works. Contact details are set out in Appendix A. buildings. Section 7 of the Act states;

6.6 The Listed Building Management Guidelines aim to set ‘ no person shall execute or cause to be executed any

Page 74 out what is considered to be the extent of the special works for the demolition of a listed building or for its interest of the building, which cannot be circumscribed alteration or extension in any manner which would affect within the list description itself. The requirement of its character as a building of special architectural or Section 7 of the 1990 Act is that Listed Building Consent historic interest, unless the works are authorised.’ must be obtained for all works which would affect the character of the listed building even if those works are 6.9 This means that Listed Building Consent is required for agreed by all relevant parties. It also means that this any alteration to the building that affects its character, document can only offer guidance rather than provide a derived from its special interest. These Guidelines definitive list of works covering all eventualities. cannot override this or remove the requirement for Listed Building Consent where alterations are to be 6.7 It should be noted that the effects of ‘listing’ only came undertaken even if all parties agree, through this into force when the building was ‘listed’ in September document, that such alterations would be acceptable in 2001. Any changes to the Estate prior to this date did principle. In other words, Listed Building Management not need Listed Building Consent and do not require it Guidelines cannot have a higher status than the Act retrospectively. Similarly, there is no provision within the itself. Act that requires a listed building to be brought back to its original state provided that the changes were 6.10 Listing is not intended to fossilise a building. Its aim is to undertaken prior to the date it was listed. For example, ensure that the architectural and historic interest of the

Volume I, page 34 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 building is carefully considered before any decisions are conditions, including conditions to be discharged prior to made about the future of the building and before any the commencement of works on site will be emphasised alterations - internal or external - are undertaken. throughout this document. 6.11 Listed Building Consent is required before any works of demolition or alteration or extension to any part of a 6.16 Works can be undertaken as urgent works providing listed building that is part of its special interest are they comply with Section 9 of the 1990 Act. This is undertaken. This includes both the interior and the reserved for works that are urgently necessary for health exterior of the building. Repairs which match exactly the or safety reasons or for the preservation of the building existing materials and profiles may not need consent but and providing the works carried out are the minimum it is strongly recommended that even such works are required. Urgent works could include stabilisation of a only undertaken with the prior agreement of the building after a fire or temporary repairs to openings Department of the Built Environment as the effect of damaged in a burglary until full and proper repairs can repairs are not always straightforward. be completed. Such circumstances are extremely rare. The Department of the Built Environment and where

6.12Page 75 Section 10 of this Volume contains guidance on how to appropriate, the Barbican Estate Office, should be apply for Listed Building Consent. contacted immediately.

Listed building policy 6.17 The development plan for the City comprises the Mayor’s London Plan, the Core Strategy adopted in 6.13 When considering matters that affect a listed building, September 2011 and 55 saved policies in the City of each Local Planning Authority will be guided by the London UDP 2002. The London Plan (2011) includes relevant planning policies, both national and local. policy 7.8 ‘Heritage Assets and Archaeology.

6.14 National Policy for Listed Buildings is currently set out in The Core Strategy (2011), which sets out the spatial Planning Policy Statement 5, ‘Planning for the Historic framework for the development of the City to 2026 and Environment’ (March 2010) issued by the Department of beyond,) includes Policy CS12 : ‘Historic Environment’ Communities & Local Government. which seeks ‘To conserve or enhance the significance of the City’s heritage assets and their settings, and provide 6.15 Sections 8 and 9 of the 1990 Act confirms the an attractive environment for the City’s communities and importance of discharging any conditions that may be visitors,’ Further policies may be included in the future set and that the works be executed as agreed under the Development Management DPD (Development Plan terms of the consent. The importance of compliance with Document).

Volume I, page 35 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 enforcement action. Under Section 9 of the 1990 Act, it Status of the Guidelines within local planning policy is a criminal offence to execute, or cause to be executed, without first obtaining Listed Building Consent 6.18 The Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines any works for the demolition of a listed building or any will have the status of a Supplementary Planning works of alteration or extension which would affect its Document (SPD). While they will not have development character as a building of special architectural or historic plan status the Guidelines will be a material interest. consideration in determining for alongside other local and national planning policy. 6.23 The Department of the Built Environment will investigate all alleged breaches of planning control of which it is 6.20 The Guidelines have been subject to a detailed review aware and aims to resolve the matter by negotiation approximately 5 years after their adoption, as set out in wherever possible to achieve a satisfactory result. A full section 12 of this Volume. This revised edition of the investigation of an alleged breach will be carried out Guidelines constitutes the outcome of that 5 year review before a decision is made as to what action should be

Page 76 project. taken. Once a breach has been established, an Enforcement Officer will contact the occupier and the Breaches of planning controls and enforcement freeholder to advise them of this and offer to meet those responsible for the works to discuss the issues and how 6.21 Planning enforcement action is taken when works have they may be resolved. been undertaken without the appropriate planning consent and the City Corporation is satisfied that it is 6.24 If negotiations with those parties responsible for the ‘expedient’ to do so (Section 172, Town and Country works fails to resolve the breach to the satisfaction of the Planning Act (as amended) 1990). [NB: Listed building Enforcement Officer, the Department of the Built enforcement notices may be issued under s,38 of Environment may take enforcement action. It will P(LB&CA)Act 1990 where works executed to a listed normally seek to deal with such matters as described building contravene s.9 and the lpa consider it expedient above but in cases of serious breaches of the legislation, to do so having regard to the effects of the works on the it reserves its right to prosecute. The current penalty for character of the building as one of special architectural conviction in a magistrates’ court is a fine of up to or historic interest.] £20,000 or imprisonment for up to six months (or both), whereas upon conviction in the Crown Court an 6.22 To undertake works to a listed building without first unlimited fine or a prison sentence of up to two years (or obtaining Listed Building Consent can carry the risk of both) may be imposed.

Volume I, page 36 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Particularly addressing the challenges posed by listed 6.25 Where there is a breach of planning control, the buildings whilst respecting their architectural and historic Department of the Built Environment aims to deal with importance. everyone, particularly small businesses and/or private householders in an open and fair manner. The Policy CS15: Sustainable Development and Climate Department will also deal with breaches of planning Change control by the freeholder (i.e. the City Corporation). In all cases, the decision to take action is made in accordance 6.28 Some of the key sustainability issues that may relate to with government guidance. Barbican Estate include; energy efficiency; carbon emission reduction; climate change adaptation; and 6.26 The Department of the Built Environment has an waste management Enforcement Charter that sets out in detail its enforcement procedures and is available from the 6.29 English Heritage has produced a series of guidance Department of the Built Environment upon request or on documents on the subject of climate change and the

Page 77 the City Corporation website: historic environment, available at www.cityoflondon.gov.uk/planning. www.helm.gov.uk/climatechange . In addition, they have created a specific website to advise property owners Sustainability and Climate Change www.climatechangeandyourhome.org.uk

6.27 The introduction of ‘environmental’ initiatives, on historic 6.30 The piecemeal introduction of such initiatives across the buildings must be carefully considered to be sensitive to Barbican Estate is to be resisted, due to the damaging the historic environment, and only carried out where the effect that minor incremental change could have on the significance of the historic asset is not compromised, character of the estate. Proposals should be carefully However, the City Corporation is committed to being at considered on an Estate-wide coherent basis. the forefront of action in response to climate change and other sustainability challenges that face high density urban environments. The policies in the Core Strategy are identified below:

Policy CS5: The North of the City, number 8 – Requiring developers to make use of innovative design solutions to mitigate and adapt to the impacts of climate change.

Volume I, page 37 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

7. The role of English Heritage • Is for works of alteration which comprise or include the demolition of a principal external wall or a 7.1 English Heritage (also known as the Historic Buildings substantial part of the interior or public and and Monuments Commission for England) is the communal areas. Government’s statutory adviser on the historic built environment. It is a non-departmental public body, 7.4 English Heritage may offer advice to the City sponsored by the DCMS and was established in 1983. Corporation on applications for planning permission which may affect the fabric of the Barbican and/or its 7.2 English Heritage advises the Secretary of State (DCMS) setting. In practice, this is usually reserved for large on requests made to list buildings. applications or where the proposed alterations will have a significant impact on the character of the listed 7.3 In relation to works which require Listed Building building. English Heritage does not normally advise on Consent at the Barbican, English Heritage will: individual household applications.

Page 78 • Advise the First Secretary of State (CLG) on 7.5 These arrangements are set out in the Act and applications for Listed Building Consent where the Regulations as described in Section 6 of this document. applicant is the City Corporation. The legislation prevents a Local Planning Authority from determining LBC applications on its own buildings.

• Authorise the City Corporation’s Department of the Built Environment (under delegated powers of by Committee) to determine as it sees fit, or direct a decision as to the granting of Listed Building Consent when the application:

• Includes land owned by the City Corporation and/or

Volume I, page 38 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 8.5 Where the applicant is the City Corporation as the 8. The role of the City of London Corporation freeholder of the Barbican Estate, the City Corporation as Local Planning Authority as Local Planning Authority is not permitted to determine the application. In such cases, the application is referred 8.1 The Department of the Built Environment is responsible to the CLG’s National Planning Casework Unit. for handling planning applications made in relation to the Barbican. Scheduled Monuments

8.2 The Department’s service objectives for processing 8.6 There is one Scheduled Ancient Monument within the planning applications are set out the ‘Development Barbican Estate. These are surviving standing and Management Charter’ dated December 2008. The buried remains of the Roman and medieval city wall and Department all applications for Planning and Listed defences, the Roman fort wall, and part of the former Building Consent and seeks to do so in accordance with graveyard of St. Giles’ s Church. It is protected under policy and legislation (see Section 6).The Department the Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Areas Act Page 79 will consult interested parties on applications including 1979. Any works which may affect the monument or its residents, English Heritage and amenity societies as set setting may require scheduled monument consent out in Circular 01/2001. (SMC).

8.3 Officers can give pre-application advice to any occupier, 8.7 Scheduled monument consent is obtained from the prospective purchaser or building manager and/or their DCMS on advice from English Heritage. Application professional advisors. Information on the process for forms and guidance are available from the Inspector of obtaining such advice is set out on the City Ancient Monuments at English Heritage, London Corporation’s website. In cases where it is considered Region, who should be consulted prior to making an that consent is not required, this may be recorded by an application. The management of the Scheduled exchange of letters. Monument does not form part of these Guidelines.

8.4 The Department of the Built Environment holds records 8.8 Advice on archaeological remains on the Barbican relating to the planning history of the Barbican which can Estate should be sought from the Assistant Director, be inspected without appointment Mondays to Fridays Historic Environment, Department of the Built (excluding Bank Holidays) between 9.30am and 4.30pm Environment (contact details in Appendix A). at the Department’s Enquiry Desk. Files can also be requested although 48 hours’ notice is necessary.

Volume I, page 39 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 9. The role of the City of London Corporation 9.4 Soft landscaping in public and semi-public spaces on the as freeholder and manager Barbican Estate is managed by the Department of Open Spaces within the City Corporation, on behalf of the 9.1 The City Corporation is the freeholder and landlord of Barbican Estate Office (Appendix A). the Barbican Estate. This summary is intended as a general guide on the role and responsibility of the City in 9.5 Each of the schools on the Estate has its own Board of this capacity. Governors that include elected members of the City Corporation. The Board of Governors works in 9.2 The Barbican Estate Office is responsible for matters collaboration with the City’s Department of the Built relating to the residential buildings on the Estate such as Environment, which is responsible for works to these roofing works, rainwater goods and drainage, external buildings. Contact details are given in Appendix A. redecoration and redecoration of common parts. Guidance on how such works should be undertaken is 9.6 The Youth Hostel is leased to and managed by the contained within Volume II, Section 4: Best Practice. YMCA. It is responsible, through their building manager, Page 80 Costs of certain works undertaken can be recovered for the internal and external repair of the building under from long leaseholders. Further details of the the terms of the lease. responsibilities of the Estate Office and tenants are set out in the Tenants Handbook (available from the 9.7 The walkways within the Estate have the status of City Barbican Estate Office) and in their document titled Walkway as opposed to public highway. The City ‘Barbican: Experience the Lifestyle’ and in Volume II of Corporation is responsible for their repair and these Listed Building Management Guidelines. Contact maintenance and this is undertaken by the Department details for the Barbican Estate Office are given in of the Built Environment (contact details in Appendix A). Appendix A. 9.8 In the past, management of the Barbican Estate has, in 9.3 The Arts Centre, including the cinemas, gallery, general been split between several departments and conservatory and restaurants, are all managed by the third parties with unclear responsibilities. This has Services Division of the Department. resulted in some’ grey areas’. Level by level plans of the The theatre is also managed by the Services Division entire Barbican development have now been prepared, with the exception of minor repairs which are undertaken showing where the responsibility for each element lies. by theatre staff. These plans are available to view at the Barbican Estate office. All areas of the Barbican have been allocated to

Volume I, page 40 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 the relevant stakeholders, and this data will inform the should be made with the Barbican Estate Office (contact future comprehensive management of the Barbican. details in Appendix A). The procedure for this consent is outlined in the document “Standard Conditions Relating 9.9 It is proposed that each stakeholder accepts full to Proposed Works and Alterations on the Barbican responsibility for those areas designated to them on the Estate”. This is available from the Barbican Estate approved plans. The Director of Community and Office. Details must include the following information: Children’s Services takes the overall lead role in co- ordinating and supervising the management • The full name(s) of the person(s) proposing the responsibilities to the common parts of the Barbican, in works consultation with other stakeholders as appropriate, including Budget management and allocation. • The full address of the flat where the proposed work will be undertaken 9.10 The benefit of this approach to the City will be a coordinated response to the management and • A location plan showing the position of the flat within

Page 81 maintenance of the overall Barbican Estate. This will the block result in more efficient, effective approach to repairs and planned maintenance, especially in areas where co- • A plan showing the location of the proposed works operation between stakeholders is required to achieve a within the flat solution. • Existing and proposed drawings showing details of Landlord’s consent the main changes and other relevant information to ensure the standard conditions are complied with 9.11 Landlord’s consent is mandatory prior to any works being undertaken by any leaseholder. Short-term • Photographs of the relevant areas where work is leaseholders are not permitted to make alterations to proposed, before commencement their flat. It should be noted that obtaining Listed Building Consent does not mean that Landlord Consent will also • Any available details of proposed installation or be granted. equipment, such as manufacturers literature

9.12 Before carrying out any alterations to a property in the • Information about the building works such as Barbican, consent must be obtained from the freeholder, anticipated start date, duration of works and which is normally the City Corporation. Initial contact

Volume I, page 41 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 completion date, as an inspection of works may be necessary • A schedule of works if available

Further information may be required, depending on the nature of the works that are being proposed.

9.13 It is essential that landlord’s consent be obtained prior to commencing works. Page 82

Volume I, page 42 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 requirements are set out on the websites identified in 10. How to apply for Listed Building Consent 10.2 above.

10.1 It is advisable to contact Planning Officers at the 10.4 It will usually take eight weeks after an application has Department of the Built Environment before submitting been lodged for the Department of the Built Environment an application for Listed Building Consent. Applications to make a decision, whether by delegated powers or by are normally submitted by the owner of a property Committee. In some cases, it will be necessary for the whether they are a leaseholder or freeholder. However, decision to be referred to the National Planning other persons, such as a prospective purchaser, can Casework Unit of CLG. This will be for applications also apply for Listed Building Consent prior to the which are submitted by the City Corporation itself which, purchase of a property. It may be advisable to employ as a Local Planning Authority, cannot determine its own an architect who is used to working with listed buildings, applications (see Section 8). particularly for larger schemes. City Corporation Planning Officers will be able to advise as to whether 10.5 Conditions are normally attached to any decision notice

Page 83 proposals are likely to be acceptable. The procedure for granting Listed Building Consent. These conditions must obtaining pre-application advice is set out on the City be discharged in writing by the Department of the Built Corporation’s website. Environment before any works can begin. In cases where the applicant is the City Corporation, any 10.2 Listed building consent application forms are available submitted details must also be approved by CLG’s online at www.cityoflondon.gov.uk/planning or National Planning Casework Unit. Failure to do so could www. planningportal .gov.uk/ Advice on completing result in enforcement action (see section 6.21-6.26) the forms is also available online or from officers in the Department of the Built Environment (see Appendix A 10.6 When writing to discharge a condition, you should for contact details). include the following information:

Submitting an application • Full site address

10.3 When submitting an application for Listed Building • Application reference number Consent certain standard information is required to enable officers and others to understand the proposals • Date of approval and determine whether they are acceptable. These • Condition number

Volume I, page 43 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 10.10 For more details see section 9 of HM Revenue & • Appropriate details as required by the condition Customs' VAT notice 708: Building and Construction available from VAT offices or on their website 10.7 In the rare circumstances that an application is refused, (www.hmrc.gov.uk ). Please note that this is written to applicants have the right of appeal. Applicants can also guide VAT registered builders rather than owners of appeal against conditions if they consider them to be listed buildings. VAT regulations are subject to change. unreasonable although this is also extremely rare. It is therefore advised to refer to HM Revenue & Details of the appeal procedure are sent with all Customs to establish the current position and clarify any decisions issued by the Department of the Built related matters. Environment. It is important that all copies of consent documents are safely retained by applicants as they will be needed as evidence of proper authorisation for alterations when properties are sold.

Page 84 VAT regulations

10.8 In certain circumstances, VAT is zero rated for ‘approved alterations’ to listed buildings. This means that this can only be applied to works of alterations which both require and obtain Listed Building Consent. It is also restricted to residential buildings or those which are in a non-business use, such as a charity. It does not apply to repairs and ordinary maintenance.

10.9 Qualification for VAT relief will depend on using a VAT registered builder. A refund is not available on materials purchased for DIY work, for labour only sub-contractors or for professional fees, such as architects, surveyors or structural engineers.

Volume I, page 44 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 The procedure to discharge a condition attached to any 11. How to apply for planning permission permission granted is the same as that for Listed Building Consent (see section 10.6) 11.1 Sometimes planning permission is needed for building works in addition to Listed Building Consent. Pre- 11.5 Building Regulations Approval is required if any application advice is available from the Department of alterations to structure, fire safety or drainage are made. the Built Environment prior to making a planning application and all potential applicants should speak to a Planning Officer before submitting an application. A site visit at this stage may be necessary to help determine if the proposals are acceptable in principle.

11.2 Planning Permission application forms are available online at www.cityoflondon.gov.uk/planning or Page 85 www. planningportal .gov.uk/ Advice on completing the forms is also available online or from officers in the Department of the Built Environment (see Appendix A for contact details).

Requirements for drawings are similar to those for Listed Building Consent and are identified online (see 10.2 for web addresses). 11.3 Planning application forms and accompanying drawings can be submitted online via the planning portal, through the city of London website, or in a hard copy format. If planning permission is granted, it will contain certain conditions that must be discharged, sometimes prior to the start of the building works.

11.4 It will usually take eight weeks after an application has been lodged for the Department of the Built Environment to process the application and for a decision to be made.

Volume I, page 45 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 Subsequent Reviews 12. Procedure for review of the Management Guidelines 12.4 Volume I will be updated should there be changes in the legislation concerning Listed Buildings, 12.1 In order that this document remains relevant and or procedural changes. effective, regular review is important. The monitoring and review of the document will be carried out by the Volume II (and subsequent Volumes) Department of the Built Environment. The aims and It is recommended that a further review is carried out objectives of the review process are to ensure that the every 5 years (next review in 2017). It is anticipated that document is offering effective guidance on matters text will be reviewed only where there is evidence of a relating to Listed Building Consent and to identify any lack of guidance, or insufficient clarity in the document. issues arising from their use. It is not intended to review substantive issues or alter the Guidelines unless 12.5 To enable the review process to be consistent in its significant issues arise. For each review approach, stakeholders have agreed that the following Page 86 the relevant Working Party will be reconvened. criteria will be considered as part of each review:

• Initial Review Procedure The number of owners that have undertaken works which fall into the ‘green’ category and have asked 12.2 Upon final approval of each Volume, there should be a for Landlord’s consent review meeting by the relevant Working Party every six months for the first two years of its implementation. • The number of Listed Building Consent applications Volumes I and II have completed this procedure. received since the last review and how many have been approved. This should include the entire 5 year review procedure Barbican Estate.

12.3 A full review of each Volume will be undertaken 5 years 12.4 Other matters for consideration at the review meeting after its completion. If substantial changes are will include: proposed, views on the changes will be sought through consultation . A comprehensive review has • Situations which have arisen where the Guidelines been completed for Volumes I and II in 2012 have offered no guidance (i.e. a gap in its advice)

• Any applications which have been refused

Volume I, page 46 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012

• Any appeals lodged, including appeal decisions

• Any enforcement action that has been taken

• Maintenance and repair issues, where these relate to the application of planning controls

• Updates on other related strategies such as conservation strategy, further Volumes of the Guidelines etc.

12.5 The results of the review meeting and any recommendations for amendments to the Guidelines will Page 87 be reported to the Residents Consultation Committee, Barbican Residential Committee and Planning and Transportation Committee for their consideration.

Volume I, page 47 Draft Revised SPD – March 2012 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 88 1.0 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.1 INTRODUCTION 1.1.2.2 The original Working Party, which met regularly throughout the 1.1.1 Position of this document in relation to the whole project, was chaired by the Chairman of the Barbican Guidelines Residential Committee and comprised representatives of English Heritage, the Twentieth Century Society, the This volume is the second of a planned four Volume series Department of Community Services, the (then) Department of entitled ‘Listed Building Management Guidelines for the Planning & Transportation , the Barbican Estate Office, Barbican Estate in the City of London’. It provides detailed representatives of the Residents Consultation Committee, the guidance regarding alterations and physical management of the Barbican Association and the consultants themselves. residential elements of the Barbican Estate. It should be studied and understood in conjunction with the other components of the 1.1.2.3 A process of consultation on the document draft included overall Management Guidelines, which will comprise dissemination through the Barbican Association, the Barbican Residents’ Consultation Committee, the House Groups, Volume I Introduction residents’ newsletters and the City Corporation’s website. The City Corporation and English Heritage are responsible for formal Volume II Residential Buildings approval of the final document and will remain joint owners of Volume III Arts Centre, Schools and other buildings copyright.

Page 89 Volume IV Landscaping 1.1.3 How to use this document

NOTE Volumes III and IV are subject to funding being made available. 1.1.3.1 This reviewed version of the Barbican Listed Building However any persons involved with works in these areas are Management Guidelines is published in electronic format. advised to consult the current volumes I and II for guidance on Reference copies are held at the Barbican Estate Office, the general issues regarding the special interest of the Barbican and Barbican Library and at the Department of the Built the legal requirement for listed building consent prior to initiating Environment. any works that would affect the character of the buildings or the landscaped areas of the estate. 1.1.3.2 The document is intended to be used by all stakeholders in the Barbican including residents, conservation agencies such as 1.1.2 Provenance of this document English Heritage and the Twentieth Century Society, the City Corporation itself and interested members of the public. 1.1.2.1 This volume was originally prepared by independent consultants, Avanti Architects Ltd., working to a brief developed 1.1.3.3 It offers guidance both to the City Corporation as freeholder and jointly by the City of London CorporationBuilt and English landlord, and to leaseholders and rental tenants. It describes the Heritage. The commission was awarded in the autumn of 2003 formal procedures that should be followed in connection with and the process of developing the Guidelines has been planning or Listed Building Consent (LBC) applications. It should managed through a Working Party set up for this purpose. This be consulted before any works or repair, alteration or revised updated version has also been undertaken by Avanti maintenance are undertaken by any of the above parties. Architects, to a commission by the City Corporation, in conjunction with a re-activated Working Party. Volume II, page 1 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Draft – March 2012

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1.1.4 Other sources of information/ guidance to which reference removals or extensions should be introduced that could cause should be made detriment to the integrity of the ensemble. Likewise no interventions should be undertaken in the design or A list of sources consulted in the preparation of these Guidelines management of the exterior spaces which constitute the setting is appended at the end of this document. of the buildings, including hard landscape, aquatic and planted areas, that would affect their original character and special interest. 1.2 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.2.2.2 The architectural form and character of the residential buildings 1.2.1 Scope of this document is consistent and distinctive. No alteration should be made that would affect the silhouette, massing, volume, modelling, material 1.2.1.1 This document seeks to describe the reasons for the character, surface, colour (except as provided for by the designation of listed building status of the Barbican Estate and approved Palette of Colours) or regularity of any of the buildings. the implications this has for the future management of changes The distinctive weathering patina has now also become a to the residential buildings. characteristic feature of many of the buildings, such that any proposal for cleaning should now be considered very carefully 1.2.1.2 The document defines the special interest of the residential and may be subject to listed building consent.

Page 90 buildings. It proposes guidance for the management of change to the residential buildings - for the external fabric, the common 1.2.2.3 The materials and components of the roofs, terraces, facades, interior parts and the apartment interiors. This guidance is balconies, guardings, windows, screens, and other glazing, and structured in a ‘traffic light’ format, citing examples of works that entrance porches combine to create an architectural language need no authorisation (green); that would require prior enquiry that unifies the Estate as a whole. (amber), that would definitely trigger the LBC application No alterations should be made that would introduce general or procedure (red), and would be unlikely to gain consent even local departures from, or interruptions of, this language. when applied for (black). 1.2.2.4 Any repairs or replacement works must be closely matched to 1.2.1.3 It offers best practice advice in respect of the roofs and terraces, maintain visual consistency across adjacent areas. There external repair and redecoration and the Garchey system. should be no generic changes of the materials used in façade It makes proposals for other conservation strategies to be fabric, components or finishes whatsoever, i.e. concrete, considered including the designation of a number of brickwork, timber or metal glazed screens, windows, doors, representative heritage flats; record surveys; the establishment panels. of a salvage store and the possible installation of a permanent 1.2.2.5 The smaller accessories including balustrade glazing, architectural exhibition/visitor centre. metalwork and planter boxes are also of importance to the Barbican Estate’s character in providing a layer of detail, lightness 1.2.2 Key conclusions and recommendations and human scale on the outer edges of the buildings, and it is essential that these be maintained in a unified way with no 1.2.2.1 The Barbican is a unique urban composition in which buildings piecemeal or individual exceptions. The maintenance of a and spaces play complementary roles in creating its character consistent graphic identity in the Barbican Estate’s signage and and special architectural interest. No new buildings, infilling, Volume II, page 2 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Draft – March 2012

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

wayfinding system is of similar importance, and new, uncoordinated will be secure. Specifically, the simplicity and grandeur of the or one-off signs should be avoided. hard and soft exterior landscape is an integral part of the overall architectural character of the Barbican Estate and should be 1.2.2.6 Specifically the planter boxes along the balconies of the terrace maintained so as to respect that original design intent. blocks have a significant cumulative impact on the overall appearance of the Barbican Estate, softening the edges of the 1.2.2.11 The design of the apartment interiors was also an intrinsic part buildings and providing a natural contrast to the architectural order. of the original Barbican vision of urban living and flat layouts Although it is not essential that these occur on every level for every were developed in an unusually wide diversity. The resulting dwelling or even that they are always planted out, wherever they do range and quality of domestic design is part of the character of occur they should be of the same type throughout, relate to the the Estate. Special architectural interest is to be found both in modular rhythm of the balustrading and be light grey in colour, the basic organisation of interior layouts as well as in the matt finish, with no variations. particular features within them. It can also be found in interiors which survive in an authentic and completely intact state. 1.2.2.7 Painted finishes to common areas both externally and internally, should be renewed consistently for whole blocks and only 1.2.2.12 A pragmatic approach is appropriate in dealing with the pressure employ colours from the approved Palette of Colours (refer to for change within the interiors of individual apartments. Detailed Section 4.2 External redecoration). The soffits to the terraces guidance is given through the ‘traffic light’ system noted above

Page 91 and block undersides should always be maintained in matt white with examples of work that would require no authorisation only. Uncoated concrete surfaces should remain uncoated. (green); works where an enquiry should be made before proceeding (amber); works that would require Listed Building 1.2.2.8 The materials, components and layout of the common areas Consent (red) but which may be granted where they do not contribute to the architectural character that is both varied yet impact adversely on the building’s character; and finally works consistent across the Estate. No alterations should be made which would be unlikely to gain consent (black). that would introduce local departures from this character. Repairs or maintenance should be carried out in such a way 1.2.2.13 The protection of special architectural interest in interiors where as to be compatible with the original intent and appearance of all or most original authentic details survive intact is proposed the building. through the designation of heritage flats, and through other conservation strategies (see 1.2.2.15). 1.2.2.9 Fixtures and fittings in the common areas are important in providing a consistent vocabulary of details and it is essential 1.2.2.14 There is an ongoing cycle of repair and maintenance to the that these are maintained in a unified way, with any repairs or external fabric of the Barbican which must be implemented upgrade work being conceived in such a way as to blend with systematically within an informed Estate-wide framework of best the original design. practice. This is of self-evident importance in ensuring that any major works projects are undertaken in full cognisance of the 1.2.2.10 The character and special interest of the Barbican Estate architectural significance of the buildings, and are prepared and resides predominantly in its urban form, architectural scale, executed with due process strictly observed. However it is quality and consistency of material fabric, and exterior and equally important that cumulative minor works operations on the interior public spaces. If these can be conserved as the key exterior of the buildings or public spaces do not impact priority, the most important elements of the Estate’s significance adversely on the character and special interest of the Estate as Volume II, page 3 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Draft – March 2012

1.0 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

a whole. Uncoordinated or thoughtless interventions – for implementation of these Guidelines will depend on commitment example surface mounting of service installations, or ill-matched on all sides and sustained management and control procedures. ‘repairs’ or replacements – can be highly detrimental to the overall sense of order and integrity of the original design. It is 1.2.2.18 Recommendation was also made for the regular review of the essential that effective protocols are applied and observed in the operation of these Guidelines, with amendment and control and management of ‘small contract works’. development as appropriate, and these reviews have indeed been carried out. A review procedure is included in Volume I, 1.2.2.15 A range of other conservation strategies has been Section 12 of the Guidelines and it is recommended that the recommended for the further protection of the special interest of criteria proposed are consistently observed in order to establish the Estate. These include: meaningful data on how the Guidelines are working to facilitate future review and improvement. The adoption of Management • the designation of ‘heritage flats’ where all, or most, of the Guidelines for a listed asset the size of The Barbican was a original features and authentic details remain and are pioneering project in conservation practice The effective maintained intact application of these guidelines as well as their regular review can provide a valuable model for others seeking an exemplar in • the documentation by drawn and photographic surveys of the good stewardship of large post-war modern buildings and authentic flats for record purposes estates.

Page 92 • the establishment of a salvage store whereby a stock of original fixtures and fittings may be made available for residents wishing to use authentic items in renovation work

• the possible establishment of a permanent exhibition of the Barbican and its history to serve as an educational and conservation resource.

1.2.2.16 The adoption of any or all of these strategies will promote the objective of conserving the special interest of the Barbican into the future. Progress has been made over the five years of the Management Guidelines’ operation in relation to establishing the first heritage flat, and this achievement should be extended. In addition, the operation of the Salvage Store has contributed significantly to the retention and recycling of original fabric and fittings on the Estate, and its continuation is strongly encouraged.

1.2.2.17 It is recommended that information on all of the above proposals is widely distributed amongst all stakeholders. Effective Volume II, page 4 INTRODUCTION AND EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

2.1 Character and special interest 2.1.6 A dictionary definition of ‘character’ refers to “a combination of traits or qualities distinguishing the individual nature of a person 2.1.1 The aim of Management Guidelines is to promote good or thing”. In the case of a building or place, its character or stewardship of significant buildings and sites through a well- special interest may reside in a variety of aspects including its informed consensus of all stakeholders. This is more likely to be intrinsic architectural, aesthetic, spatial or material qualities, its achieved if there is general agreement on why the object of this rarity or pre-eminence as an example of its type, its contribution attention – the ‘heritage asset’ – is of special interest and to a larger urban unity or building group. It might also consist of therefore why it requires special care in its maintenance, repair cultural significance or historical association. Alternatively, and alteration. technical or scientific attributes might constitute the principal special interest of a site or structure. An example of the former is 2.1.2 The term ’special interest’ derives from The Planning (Listed the Grade I house in Ebury Street, London, where the 8 year old th Building and Conservation Areas) Act 1990 Section 7, which Mozart composed his 6 Symphony, while in the latter case the prohibits demolition, alteration or extension of a listed building Lovell Telescope at Jodrell Bank is listed Grade I on account of “in any manner which would affect its character as a building of its pivotal significance in the development of radio astronomy. special architectural or historic interest, unless the works are authorised”. The Listed Building Consent procedures required to 2.1.7 In the case of the Barbican, which has been described as one of obtain such authorisation are described in Volume I of this the most ambitious urban reconstruction projects in Europe,

Page 93 document. special interest may be said to reside in its historical, social and architectural significance – the latter also including several 2.1.3 The cornerstone of good conservation management practice is technical aspects of its realisation. A resumé of the historical the establishment of understanding among all stakeholders and and social background to the Barbican project is included in their agents of the ‘heritage asset’, in order to identify the nature Volume I. This section accordingly focuses on its special and appreciate the value of its special interest. From this architectural interest. understanding an informed approach can be developed to guide future works of repair, alteration or upgrade that extend 2.2 Significance of the residential buildings of the Barbican beneficial use, and therefore sustainability, without detriment to the asset itself. 2.2.1 The residential buildings of the Barbican constitute the dominant component of the overall complex both in the forms of the 2.1.4 By the same token, the identification of the types of change that buildings themselves and also in the spaces of the Estate that would not affect its character can streamline the Listed Building they contain. However a defining and pre-eminent aspect of the Consent process by eliminating the need for formal application Barbican’s special interest is that it is not merely a ‘housing procedures for insignificant works or alterations that do not estate’ but was envisioned and planned as a whole piece of city impact on the special interest. fabric. Thus in addition to the residential buildings are schools, library, cinema, arts centre, exhibition halls, theatre, concert hall, 2.1.5 This section of the document therefore seeks to identify the youth hostel. shops, restaurants, pubs and diverse external character and special interest of the residential buildings of the landscape amenities (walkways, bridges, terraces, lakes, Barbican Estate and it is from this assessment that the guidance planting, etc) – all combining to create an overall social and in Section 3 of this document is derived. spatial urban composition. Accordingly equal understanding and care is required in the stewardship not just of the residential

Volume II, page 5 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

buildings but of all the other components of the estate as a 2.2.5 This distinct identity is reinforced both by the scale and whole. spaciousness of the development – atypical in the intricate grain of the City generally – and also by its material and stylistic 2.2.2 The layout of the Barbican Estate is characterised by offset consistency in contrast to the diversity of building forms and open courtyards visually connected by water on an east-west types surrounding the Estate. The three towers for example are axis with an implied central counter-axis defined by Frobisher unique as a group composition in the City, in contrast to the Crescent and the Arts Centre to the north and the City of many other high-rise buildings, which read as individual London School for Girls and St Giles Church to the south. A unrelated one-off structures of different heights, girths and third axis is created by the east-west oblique line of Beech styles. The absence of any through-roads (an earlier scheme for Street which with Ben Johnson House and its smaller a central north-south link having been abandoned) and what neighbours reconnects the geometry of the Barbican Estate with turned out to be only limited continuation of the high-level the city fabric to the north. The residential buildings create walkway system beyond the Estate boundary further defines the various types of urban space between, under and around them, Barbican as a discrete, self-contained and coherent urban while the three towers (whose triangular plan forms reflect the enclave. (This notwithstanding, there are well-used routes three Estate axes noted above) provide a vertical scale through and across the estate that provide functional commensurate with the scale of the Estate on plan. There is connections to the neighbouring areas of the City.) Specifically, rare special interest in the group value of the buildings and the high-level links that were achieved, even where not

Page 94 spaces as a complete and coherent urban ensemble. designated, should be understood and retained as an intrinsic part of the original vision.) 2.2.3 This asymmetrical yet formal quality of the building organisation and the resulting partly contained, partly interpenetrating, spatial 2.2.6 The other components of the complex – including the Barbican character is a unique urban achievement of its period and Centre, the City of London School for Girls, the Guildhall School suggests that it is unlikely to be possible to add to, or subtract of Music and Drama, the YMCA Hostel, the historic church of St from, what was clearly intended as a finite architectural Giles Cripplegate and fragments of Roman walling, the composition without detriment to the ensemble as a whole. In expanses of landscaping and water – are of vital significance in other words the open areas around and between the buildings diversifying and enriching the amenities and social facilities of are to be understood as positive spatial reservoirs, or ‘void’, the Estate. Yet these are all contained within the residential rather than as development opportunities, or ‘room’ that could framework. The significance of this is that much of the character be infilled. and formal identity of the Barbican is vested in its residential buildings and the spatial interrelationship between them and 2.2.4 The City Corporation’s original decision to prioritise good quality these other components. housing (as distinct from potentially more lucrative commercial development) as the principal element of the Barbican project in 2.2.7 The limitation and effective control of any change in the external order to repopulate the City has already been mentioned in fabric of these buildings, and the exterior spaces they contain Volume I, and in architectural terms this is manifested in the way and define, is therefore of the utmost importance in preserving that the formal composition of the residential buildings, with their the special character and architectural integrity of the Barbican strong sense of enclosure, impart the sense of a ‘city within a Estate as a whole. city’.

Volume II, page 6 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

2.3 Strategic design – building typology, urban space, podium living with immediate outlooks at, or near, natural ground level (the plinth units). Below podium space is also used for other, 2.3.1 One of the most distinctive aspects of the Barbican, given its non-residential, purposes – most notably the Barbican Exhibition size and the extended history of its construction, is the Halls below Ben Johnson House. The combination of this limited conception and implementation of its design as an integrated set of generic building types and the considerable diversity of totality. All the key design ideas are strategically interrelated and individual dwelling plans provided within them constitutes a key the Estate is presented as a single coherent organism. As such aspect of the Barbican’s special interest and character, there is special interest in the Estate in its entirety as possibly especially in the contemporaneous context of monolithic and the largest example of post-war central urban infill of any major repetitive local authority housing. world city. 2.4 Architectural language, formal composition, structure 2.3.2 The achievement of high density living, in combination with the overall sense of spaciousness is dependent upon both built form 2.4.1 The above typology is expressed clearly in the architectural and land design. The use of multi-storey buildings enables the language of the Estate. The height of the towers (the tallest requisite density to be achieved within a limited building residential buildings in Europe when built) is emphasised by the footprint. The creation of an artificially raised ground level – the dominance of their vertical over their horizontal structural podium – allows segregation of pedestrian and vehicular elements, i.e. the piers projecting proud of the floor slabs that

Page 95 movement, discreet servicing and extensive under-block car rise up the full height of the elevations. Conversely the parking, while liberating large areas of the site to remain open horizontality of the slab blocks is emphasised by recessing their for landscaping and amenity. The concept of ‘urban columns behind the building line and expressing the projecting megastructure’ enjoyed a wide currency among architects and strata of the apartment balconies as a series of continuous planners during the period that the Barbican was being layers. Meanwhile the ‘grounded’ identity of the terraced conceived, but there is particular interest in the successful and dwellings is expressed in their individual punched windows and humane application of such ideas (more often associated with the continuity of brickwork for both paving and walling. alienating urban interventions) in the heart of an historic city like London and on such a scale. 2.4.2 Each of these building forms is given a distinctive architectural signature – the exo-skeletal framework and serrated silhouette 2.3.3 The residential building typology effectively uses just three of the towers with their ‘boat profile’ or saw tooth balconies; the architectural forms – towers, slab blocks and terracing units i.e. longitudinal use of this same profile in the podium parapet; the accommodation below podium level. One exception is where the white barrel-vaulted rooflines of the apartment blocks; and the slab block is formed as a crescent (Frobisher Crescent) counter-arch motif of the below podium dwellings. immediately north of the Barbican Arts Centre, which provides the anchoring focus to this part of the estate. (See below para. 2.4.3 Architectural modelling also plays an important part in the 2.6.16) The three key types are exploited respectively to act as character of the buildings. The rooflines of the towers, the urban markers, as precinct containers and as ground level penthouse units crowning the terraces, the deep brick reveals of edging. They also offer three types of residential experience – the podium windows all impart a strong sculptural quality to the high-rise living with long views over London (the towers), respective residential buildings. The architects themselves medium rise apartments raised on pilotis (columns lifting the characterised the roof as ‘the fifth façade’ of the development. main buildings above pedestrian level) with localised views over Likewise the visual detachment of the apartments from the generous landscaped courts (the slab blocks), and ‘mews style’ podium by means of deeply recessed enclosure at podium level

Volume II, page 7 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

is crucial in representing the slab blocks as ‘raised structure’ and the podium as ‘ground’. Together these constitute the 2.5.2 The careful gradation of scale is also an important architectural language of the Barbican and are all key features consideration, ranging from the massive monolithic concrete of special interest that could not be altered without impacting on infrastructure down to the domestic sized planter boxes, which the character of the listed buildings. sit within the balcony balustrades. The latter vitally introduce both the lightening effect of innumerable ‘ornaments’ against the 2.4.4 The influence of the great modern architect Le Corbusier -an darker tone of the concrete, and also the humanising foil of influence freely acknowledged by the architects themselves- is nature to the man-made artifice of the buildings. evident not only in the urban strategies indicated above, most of The Barbican vocabulary thus encompasses the full range of which he had worked out in the inter-war period, but also in contrast, from the collective to the individual, from the urban to many detailed aspects of the scheme - the powerful expression the natural, within the fabric of the Estate. of building structure, the monumental character of the exposed concrete fabric, the use of natural materials, notably timber, and 2.5.3 The sheer strength of the Barbican means there may be the counterpoint of rectilinear and curved forms in the plan and legitimate ways of embellishing the Estate through public art, modelling of the composition. Special interest accordingly lies in sculpture, temporary installations, further planting, flags, the way this continental provenance is anglicised and assumes banners and the like, provided any such interventions are an identity that now seems indigenous to London. carefully and sympathetically judged. However, the essential

Page 96 gravitas of its buildings and legibility of its landscape should be 2.4.5 The Barbican represents the high point of mature modernism at preserved from makeovers, prettification or camouflage as its most serious and urbane in Britain. At a time when large otherwise the essential character of the Barbican will be schemes in the modern idiom were being widely compromised or obscured. pursued in this country and elsewhere, often on a minimum cost basis, the Barbican is notable not only for its size, site, and its 2.6 Domestic design enormous commitment of intellectual and financial resources, but also for the sustained consistency and quality of its 2.6.1 A large part of the character of the Barbican as a work of special architectural design and detail, over decades of building. architectural interest consists in the way in which the original architects’ vision of a new way of urban living is pursued 2.5 Materials and components throughout the whole project, from macro to micro scale. The character of the flat interiors is a product of a consistent and 2.5.1 The materials and components employed at the Barbican continuous design intelligence that embraces major urban contribute another element of its character and special interest. planning at one end and fine domestic detailing at another. Its visual consistency stems from the highly disciplined use of a limited vocabulary of materials, components and finishes – 2.6.2 In addition to the manifest importance of the exterior character uncoated concrete, finished with as much care and attention as of the Estate, which listing is intended to safeguard, the statutory fine stone, rich engineering brick, quality hardwood, white designation of the Barbican means that alterations to the painted soffits, and roof coverings and architectural metalwork in common parts of the residential buildings and interiors of the a limited number of sober colours. Specifically the pick flats themselves also need to be considered carefully to assess hammered monolithic concrete of most of the built structure whether the works being contemplated might affect their assumes a monumental quality, such is the ubiquity and character as buildings of special architectural interest. conviction of its use.

Volume II, page 8 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

2.6.3 This character may reside in particular features of the flats – that lends a directional identity and saw-tooth profile to each of including their general arrangement or specific details– but it the tower blocks. may also reside in the totality of a single domestic interior where it survives in an intact, or nearly intact, state and thereby stands Raised Slab Blocks as an authentic and complete record of the original design in its 2.6.7 The slab blocks are the principal containers of residential entirety. accommodation within the Estate and accordingly needed to provide flat plans for north-south as well as east-west 2.6.4 Examples of the former may include: the essential plan and/or orientation. Additionally, they needed to be able to take account sectional organisation of the interior; the position, size and of the varying neighbouring context immediately beyond the shape of kitchens and bathrooms; the incorporation of double Estate boundaries. height space; the use of internal staircases as an architectural statement; barrel-vaulted spaces; principal windows and doors; 2.6.8 There are many layout permutations of special interest. One and sliding partitions and screens. It is equally important that type uses a central core access arrangement to serve paired private open space/ patio/ balcony/ terrace designed to serve entries on each level and flats with south-facing living rooms and the dwelling type of which it is a part is retained in the form north-facing bedrooms (e.g. Speed, Andrews, Thomas More and originally intended. Defoe Houses). A feature of interest in these types is the use of internal glazed screens to denote a separation of the social

Page 97 2.6.5 These features occur in a variety of formulations throughout the areas from the private areas of the plan. residential buildings and the special interest of the Barbican Estate lies in how within the simple typological strategy of 2.6.9 Another layout type uses a corridor access system with entrance towers, slab blocks and terrace units, such a very considerable doorways on either side serving flats facing east or west in a bi- range of flat types is accommodated. This arises in large part lateral block plan (e.g. Gilbert, Seddon, Mountjoy and John from intelligent exploitation of the differing orientation of the Trundle Houses.) In the case of Willoughby House, where it was various blocks and in the way the unit plans were tailored both necessary for living rooms to face into the Estate, the plan to the aims of the brief and to the circumstances of the site and incorporates an ingenious ‘up-and-over’ section allowing its environs. bedrooms to be placed on the other side of the corridor.

Towers 2.6.10 Of particular significance are the units at the top floor levels 2.6.6 The multiple orientation of the towers to suit their differing site which typically incorporate double height and barrel vaulted locations demanded type plans that could work in any of the spaces that are a key element of the building character both three rotated positions in which the blocks were placed. There is internally and externally. special interest in the resulting layouts whereby the service rooms of all flats are placed along the inner ‘blind’ sides of the Sub-Podium terraced flats and Mews units units while the habitable rooms are arranged along the outside 2.6.11 These units employ various type plans to deal with differing with living rooms at the three extremities where they always gain edge conditions around the perimeter of the Estate or the sunlight from one or other direction. The kitchens are located on landscaped courts. In Sub-Podium cases the accommodation is the outer ends of the service room run in such a way as to link typically of single aspect design where it backs onto car parking with and serve out to the dining/living room spaces. One of the areas. In Mews units an independent structure is formed. three flats on each floor is given the distinctive triangular point

Volume II, page 9 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

There is special interest in the variety of layout arrangements, 2.6.15 The design of domestic interiors at the Barbican is thus an including split level and double height spaces and internal integral part of the original architects’ lifestyle vision for the staircases that are developed to suit the various locations. Estate as a whole and as such is part of the character and Except in specialised cases, such as the metal framed glazing special interest that listing seeks to protect. This design quality and panelling employed for such areas as the Exhibition Halls, has ensured that the basic domestic order of the apartments has the common exterior material of brick is used to express the generally remained intact. Not surprisingly however it is some of plinth of the Estate as a whole. the detailed internal arrangements and fittings of individual flats that have been most subject to pressure for change over the 2.6.12 In this way flats, penthouses, duplexes, studios, maisonettes years. This is due partly to the need to replace broken or worn and town houses with a wide diversity of internal layouts were out items, and also to changing patterns of living. evolved to suit the location, aspect and orientation of the various blocks. This has resulted in the creation of a range of dwelling Frobisher Crescent types unique to the Barbican Estate. This degree of care and 2.6.16 The design of this block formed an important part of the inventiveness in the design of dwelling types is rare for the development as a whole. It was curved around the back of the period, which tends to be characterised by the anonymity and Arts Centre, facing inwards onto an open space that was standardisation of public housing. In fact some 140 different flat intended to be used for sculpture or other exhibitions associated types are used throughout the scheme. with the Arts Centre. In the original scheme, Frobisher Crescent

Page 98 was designed as residential units, but towards the end of the 2.6.13 This interest is further enhanced by the character of original development, Phase V (1971-82) it was decided that office detail - whether achieved through the design of customised space for the Arts Centre was required. The design was fittings and components or through the imaginative and careful executed as originally approved, but only up to a point. The use of ordinary materials and specification. The detailing of the residential unit divisions were installed as designed, but no Barbican has been compared to the quality of design found in internal partitions had been inserted and the design for internal luxury cars of the same period, with such incidental items as the fixtures and fittings (kitchens, bathrooms, internal wardrobes, locks and forms around the window apertures all contributing to cupboards) was never implemented. the experience of the Barbican as an ‘architectural gesamtkunstwerk ’. It is important therefore that even where a In June 2008, an application for Listed Building Consent was minor alteration that would not involve Listed Building Consent is granted permission to convert Frobisher Crescent Levels 7,8 undertaken, consideration is nevertheless given to its impact on and 9 to residential units. New partitions were inserted imposing the original character of the building, and the cumulative effect if a new plan form on the units. Kitchens, bathrooms and other repeated more widely fixtures were installed. The corridor running along the outside curve of the block was subdivided with glass partitions to form 2.6.14 Considerable attention and ingenuity was devoted to the private balconies. This new adaptation of the existing shell has development of kitchen and bathroom layouts, finishes and resulted in these levels of Frobisher Crescent coming under the fittings that were progressive for their time. The size of the residential ‘umbrella’ of the Barbican Estate. As such, it will now development meant that there was scope for the production of become subject to the Listed Building Management Guidelines new standard fittings for use across the Estate. Some of these – for the Barbican Estate, Vol II. Following consultation with the Barbican Basin for example – became classics of their type. English Heritage it has been agreed that any alteration to the internal portions of Frobisher Crescent, including alterations to partitions, will not require LBC.

Volume II, page 10 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

2.0 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS

However, works affecting the External Elements, Common Areas, Private Terraces, Balconies, will all now fall under the relevant section of the Management Guidelines and residents and landlord should consult the guidelines before undertaking any works.

2.7 Domestic design - Management Guidelines strategy

2.7.1 These Management Guidelines seek to address the practical issues raised by listing in relation to the above description of character and special interest in the interiors of the flats. The attempt has been made to strike a balance between the statutory obligations imposed by listing on the one hand, and on the other, the reasonable need for the exercise of individual choice within the private domestic domain.

2.7.2 Thus, the detailed guidance included in Section 3 aims to

Page 99 differentiate the key features of special interest (those which will be the subject of Listed Building Consent procedures) from other items of repair or alteration work. Meanwhile, protection of the special interest inherent in the intact survival of original interiors in complete detail is proposed by means of the various conservation strategies, including the ‘heritage flats’ initiative, described in Section 5. These strategies are also intended to assist residents preferring to retain, or reinstate, elements of their apartments in an authentic original manner.

Summary 2.7.3 The range and distinctive quality of flat types and interiors is part of the special interest of the Barbican Estate as a whole. It is important that the essential character and diversity of the flats is retained, with any significant modifications being regulated by the Listed Building Consent procedure. Allowance must also be made for the reasonable alteration, replacement or upgrading of fixtures, components and finishes that may be required to cope with wear and tear or changing lifestyles.

Volume II, page 11 SPECIAL INTEREST OF THE BUILDINGS Draft – March 2012

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 100 3.0 MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE

3.0.1 Introduction 3.0.2.3 Detailed information on the procedures that must be followed by both the City Corporation and an individual applicant in relation 3.0.1.1 This section of the document provides guidance for all to planning and Listed Building Consent is provided in Volume I stakeholders on repairs and alterations being considered to any of these Management Guidelines. part of the residential blocks of the Barbican Estate, in light of its listed status. Such works may arise out of a need for 3.0.2.4 The examples of work quoted in this section seek to cover most maintenance, repair, upgrade and also, in the case of the of the types of repair and alteration that may be considered, but interiors of the flats, the desire to make changes to suit the the lists are not exhaustive and do not override the obligations of individual requirements of the occupant. the Planning (Listed Building and Conservation Areas) Act 1990. In any cases of doubt on the correct procedure to follow, advice 3.0.1.2 The guidance is derived from evaluation of the character and should be sought from the City Corporation’s Department of special interest of the buildings covered in Section 2. the Built Environment. Assessment of how any particular item of work is likely to affect the character of the building in relation to its special architectural 3.0.2.5 It should also be noted that these Guidelines do not cover other interest informs the guidance in this section on whether the procedures or consents that may be required under other Page 101 formal Listed Building Consent application procedure is required obligations arising out of the terms of leaseholds, building or not. Regulations, etc. Guidance on these issues should be sought from the relevant authority – see Volume I, Appendix A: List of 3.0.2 Procedures for proposed works and alterations principal contacts.

3.0.2.1 Various consents may be needed before carrying out any 3.0.3 The pressure for change alterations to any part of the Barbican Estate. The procedure to be followed will vary depending on whether the applicant is an 3.0.3.1 All buildings are subject to pressure for change whether this individual householder or the Corporation of London itself. arises from the need for maintenance, repair of damage, modification and/or upgrading performance because existing 3.0.2.2 This in turn will depend upon the nature and location of the users or incoming residents wish to adapt the building to suit works being contemplated. Works to the exterior and common new functions or lifestyles that were not envisaged at the time of parts of the buildings will be the responsibility of the City of the original design. The Barbican Estate is no exception to these London Corporation. (These are dealt with in Sections 3.1 and pressures. The last residential block was completed in 1976 and 3.2 respectively.) Works to the flat interiors are covered in since then much has happened to the buildings in terms of Section 3.3, and applications for planning permission or Listed management, form of tenure, the lifestyles the buildings are Building Consent, where these are necessary, are the expected to accommodate and changing technical performance responsibility of the residents or their agents. standards relating to buildings themselves.

Volume II, page MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE 12 Draft – March 2012

3.0 MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE

3.0.3.2 The quality of the original construction has generally ensured and develop a new/improved design. In the case of a large the buildings have continued to endure, though inevitably certain estate such as the Barbican, the cumulative effect of small elements wear out and require replacement or particular changes could be considerable if not undertaken materials or components come to the end of their serviceable sympathetically and systematically. life. This process, which may be unexceptionable in most buildings, raises particular issues in the context of a listed 3.0.3.6 The coherence of the original architectural vocabulary of the building. If elements are changed on an ad hoc basis, without an Barbican has been noted in Section 2 as a distinctive aspect of informed understanding of the buildings’ significance, the its character and this has to be considered when planning original architectural character or special interest of the Estate remedial work. Whereas changing two or even two dozen may be steadily lost. elements like front doors or planter boxes may not make a transforming difference, soon the inconsistency becomes 3.0.3.3 Although the examples should be checked in each specific case, conspicuous and the integrity of the Estate is lost. Piecemeal it will be seen from the tables that follow, that a broad distinction departures from the original signage design would be another can be made between works that essentially involve repairing example of progressive loss of authentic character. existing fabric, and works that entail alteration. In the former Page 102 case, provided the work produces a like-for-like architectural 3.0.3.7 Individual alteration of windows could have an even greater result, it is unlikely to require application for Listed Building impact. The Royal Crescent at Bath could be cited as an Consent. historical comparison – here the introduction of different windows in even a few instances would disrupt the integrity of 3.0.3.4 If the materials needed to effect an authentic repair are no the whole ensemble. It would be a mistake therefore to regard longer obtainable or if substitution is called for because the even routine items of maintenance or repair that might not entail original specification would no longer achieve a viable result, Listed Building Consent for themselves as too trivial to require then the case may require particular consideration in relation to informed consideration and effective control, since their the formal consent procedures, depending on the extent and cumulative impact could be highly detrimental. type of repair being undertaken. Even in such situations the work should be done in a way that still respects the key visual 3.0.4 Managing pressure for change intentions of the original design. In general therefore repair work would be expected not to affect the character and special 3.0.4.1 The City Corporation as landlord and as Estate Manager as well interest of the building. as all the residents, have joint and complementary roles to play in looking after the Barbican Estate and dealing with pressures 3.0.3.5 With particular reference to the exterior, where works entail for change in such a way as to preserve its unique character alteration, the question arises as to whether they may impact on and quality. the character and special architectural interest of the building. In cases where original details or material specifications have 3.0.4.2 The key criterion to be applied in the context of the external failed, there may be a need to reconsider the item in question fabric and common internal parts, is that if local alterations Volume II, page MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE 13 Draft – March 2012

3.0 MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE

(even quite minor ones) affect the general character and areas so that the quality and value of the buildings are consistency of the Estate, they are likely to be regarded as maintained. sensitive and therefore subject to Listed Building Consent. Where formal consent procedures are not triggered, it is still 3.0.4.7 The best practice section of these Management Guidelines is essential for reasons indicated above, that the works are intended to assist the Estate Office, in consultation with carefully considered in the light of these guidelines, undertaken residents, to implement such maintenance regimes in a with proper care and control, and systematically recorded for the systematic manner taking into account the special architectural benefit of ensuring consistency of approach and for the importance of the buildings. Single elements of the building purposes of reviewing the effectiveness of these Guidelines. should always be assessed in the context of the whole, and reference should always be made to the character and special 3.0.4.3 As regards the interiors of individual flats -as these are also interest as described in Section 2 when preparing any contract included in the listing- while alterations or maintenance work to of repair and refurbishment. the internal fabric may not affect the communal identity of the Estate, such work must still be assessed for its potential impact 3.0.4.8 Current and future management regimes will need to be familiar on the special interest of the building. These Guidelines seek to with the Guidelines in order to avoid the risk of any uninformed Page 103 ensure that there is reasonable scope for internal alteration interventions and insensitive repair to the external fabric of the provided it is managed within the proposed framework. buildings. The documentation and maintenance of proper work records has a vital part to play in embedding best practice and 3.0.4.4 In all cases it is important that alterations are undertaken facilitating the review process. sensitively so that the specification and installation of new components are compatible with the original architectural design 3.0.5 Cultivating a tradition of care intent of the buildings. Wherever possible, consideration should be given to renewing items on a like-for-like basis. If that is not 3.0.5.1 Whereas those involved in the care and upkeep of an ancient or possible then new elements or appliances should be chosen to historic structure will be predisposed to approach the task with a be compatible with the original intention of the building. ‘conservation mindset’, requiring specialist knowledge or working protocols, such an approach may not be so readily 3.0.4.5 Where renewal is due to technical failure of an original product assumed in the case of modern buildings. or constructional detail and this entails upgrade, the work should still accord with the visual character of the original. The statutory listing of significant post-war architecture is still relatively recent and the widespread acceptance or appreciation 3.0.4.6 The importance of a systematic maintenance programme for a of its special interest cannot yet be taken for granted. Such significant listed Estate such as the Barbican cannot be circumstances can result in either casual or incremental overestimated. There needs to be a programme of regular disfigurement of buildings through improvised or merely monitoring and maintenance of the external fabric and common pragmatic repairs and alterations. The listing of the Barbican Estate creates the opportunity to cultivate a new tradition of care Volume II, page MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE 14 Draft – March 2012

3.0 MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE

informed by these Management Guidelines. Yet this process cannot necessarily be expected to happen of its own accord - it will need to be assisted by active observance of the protocols laid down in this document by all the parties concerned.

Page 104

Volume II, page MANAGEMENT GUIDANCE 15 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

3.1.1 General Notes:

Any maintenance, remedial, upgrade, replacement or repair work to the external fabric, external fittings or externally mounted services and service casings of the residential blocks should be assessed for its potential impact on the special interest of the building. All the elements that contribute to the architectural character of the blocks inclusive of roofscapes and block silhouettes, facades, massing, material appearance, surface texture and colour are to be considered as significant and accordingly as requiring detailed consideration prior to any works in light of the Estate’s listed status.

Similarly, proposals for any additions or alterations to the façades or any of their constituent parts, the roofscapes or the terraces and walkways, for whatever reason, will need to be assessed for their potential impact on the special architectural interest of the building. Refer to Section 2.0 Special Interest of the Buildings.

This Section is intended to provide guidance on proposals for change to the exteriors of the Barbican residential blocks and how their likely impact on the architectural character of the Estate will determine the need to apply for Listed Building Consent (LBC). Examples of potential changes are colour coded in relation to their likely status vis-à-vis planning and listed building requirements. In all cases, the criterion to be considered is whether a proposed item of work will affect the building’s character in relation to its special architectural interest. Permissible works (shown in green) are those where there would be no such effect and where accordingly no application for consent would be required. Works

Page 105 which are difficult to assess without further scrutiny and will need specific guidance as to whether a formal application is required or not, are shown in amber. Then there will be clear cases of work for which a LBC application would be required, although this need not imply that consent will not be given. These are shown in red. And finally there are works which would clearly impact adversely on the special interest or character of the blocks individually and/or the Estate as a whole and accordingly be likely to be refused permission (these examples are shown in black). In every category, additional guidance notes are cross-referenced to examples and depicted in a blue box. The examples given here are not exhaustive and there may be other details and features particular to one or more block types which have not been noted. It is therefore incumbent on the Estate managers and those who undertake or commission works to consider their potential impact in relation to the special architectural interest prior to implementation and seek appropriate advice where necessary.

It is important to note that the requirements in relation to listed building status are separate and additional to any obligations imposed by lease conditions. In every category, additional guidance notes are cross-referenced to examples and depicted in a blue box. The examples given here are not exhaustive and there may be other details and features particular to one or more block types which have not been noted. It is therefore incumbent on the Estate managers and commissioners of works to consider their potential impact in relation to the special architectural interest prior to implementation.

Guidance for works to areas outside of the leaseholder demise lines but inside the blocks’ internal communal areas, are discussed in Section 3.2 of this document.

In cases triggering LBC consent procedures the maintenance of retrievable documentary records covering the proposed work and evidencing their implementation are a formal requirement, but in all other cases where non LBC works are undertaken or where proposals are the subject of enquiries it is a recommendation of these Guidelines that documentary records are kept for review purposes. Documentary evidence of the proper observance of due process will also be desirable for vendors and purchasers of properties.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 16 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

3.1.1 General Notes: Headings Glossary of Terms

3.1.2 Appliance – cooking or heating apparatus Works that will not require a LBC GREEN Approved Palette – a set of materials or colours formally application . adopted for use at the Barbican

Coated – painted or varnished finishes

Fabric – the assembled materials of which the building shell 3.1.3 and interiors are made Works where advice should be Fittings – built-in joinery, sanitary ware or cabinetry AMBER sought to determine whether a LBC application is required Invasive (non-invasive) – an aggressive or potentially disruptive operation damaging to a surface or substrate

‘like-for-like’ – the use of identical material and/or design in Page 106 3.1.4 any replacement work

RED Works that require a LBC application Reinstatement – the return of an original element of design

Refurbishment – the process of returning something to its former state/good condition

Renewal – replacing existing fabric, fittings or installations 3.1.5 Proposals for which a LBC Repair – mending existing fabric, fittings or installations BLACK application is required but where consent is unlikely to be granted Replacement – the removal of existing fabric and introduction of new fabric in its place

Replication – to reproduce exactly; to make a duplicate of an original (to make copies)

Guidance Notes Self-finished – uncoated expressed material BLUE Notes to be read in conjunction with each of the categories Soffit – the underside of a terrace or balcony

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 17 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

3.1.2 Works that will not require a LBC application .

This Section outlines works that are not considered to have an impact on the character or special architectural interest of the building and will GREEN therefore not require Listed Building Consent.

Examples included in this Section address wear and tear and/or accidental or wilful damage to the external fabric which can be repaired locally and that does not require the input of a specialist contractor.

Examples Guidance Notes

General routine maintenance items as outlined in Section 4 1 Best practice including: Methods of cleaning should be tried, tested and approved. However, where • non-invasive surface cleaning of elements where the method is proven a new product or method is employed, local test/trial samples in not to cause any detrimental material change to the surface; inconspicuous locations must be undertaken to ensure the proposed • window cleaning; method achieves an acceptable result before embarking on main works. • works undertaken as part of Approved Self-Finished Concrete Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice for external redecoration Page 107 Maintenance Regime; re-pointing of brickwork, provided that due consideration is given to matching of See also 3.1.3.3 the new and old pointing colour, texture and recess profile.

G R E E N N E R E G

2 Local maintenance, repair or redecoration works to originally decorated elements, Prior to redecoration, the correct colour from the Approved Palette of on a like-for-like basis (or to the approved specification and colour reference). For Colours for externals must be selected. example, renewal of solar reflective coatings to asphalt surfaces. Refer to Section 4.1 Best practice for roof and terraces Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice for external redecoration

3 Removal of graffiti where damage has been caused to a glazed or decorated In case damage is beyond local repair, specialist advice should be sought surface or element. (Please refer to Section 3.1.3.3 for Graffiti removal to self- before any remedial action is taken. finished concrete or brickwork surfaces). Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice for external redecoration

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 18 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

Examples Guidance Notes

4 Repairs and refurbishment (e.g. recoating or local touching up) of the railings to Like-for-like repairs and refurbishment of the railings to terraces and terraces and balconies and escape routes. balconies do not necessitate a LBC application provided that the like-for-like criteria are fulfilled and that no alteration to height, glazing details, section sizes, texture and colour is made (unless in accordance with the Approved Palette). See also Section 3.1.4 if any alteration is proposed.

5 Emergency repair works or stabilization of unsafe details and/or building fabric Temporary works to secure and make safe the external fabric are where the health and safety of the general public or operatives is at risk, including acceptable as long as they cause no further damage to the fabric and that the access arrangements needed for such works. they are also programmed for comprehensive repair. Care must be taken to ensure the full reversibility of any temporary works.

Page 108 6 Emergency changes to ironmongery to solid external doors onto Undertaking emergency work to locking mechanisms, door closers, panic balconies/terraces. bars and other security measures to doors is permitted provided that new fittings match the character and finish of the original or adjacent fittings are procured and programmed for permanent installation. The visual impact of G R E E N N E R E G any change must be kept to a minimum. Please also refer to Section 3.3.4.2 Guidance for flat interiors. No changes to existing fire escape or fire-fighting strategies are permissible unless the strategy is reviewed across a whole block. For any other works see Section 3.1.3.4.

7 Reinstatement, refurbishment or replacement of exposed aggregate freestanding Only the reinstatement, retention and repair or like-for-like replacement of planters to roof terraces. the original planters is permissible in this category.

For guidance on maintenance, repair or replacement of these planters refer to Section 4.2 Best practice for redecoration and self-finish exterior elements/common parts. See also Section 3.1.4.8 regarding replacement of standard planter boxes on balcony edges of terrace blocks.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 19 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

Examples Guidance Notes

8 Reinstatement, refurbishment or replacement of signage. Only the reinstatement, retention and repair or like-for-like replacement of signage existing at the time of listing is permissible in this category.

9 Programmed or cyclical redecoration of a specific element or surface Prior to redecoration, the correct colour from the Approved Palette belonging to a particular block/blocks where undertaken in accordance of colours for externals must be selected. with the Approved Palette of Colours Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice for external redecoration

Page 109

G R E E N N N E E R R E E G G

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 20 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

3.1.3 Works where advice should be sought to determine whether a LBC application is required

AMBER This Section outlines examples of works where it is not possible to determine without further information the potential effect on the special architectural interest of the building. In such cases prior advice should be sought from the conservation authorities before embarking on the work to ascertain if a formal LBC application is necessary.

The requirement or otherwise for a LBC application is likely to include consideration of whether the proposed change will be reversible and the extent of any manifestation on the exterior of the building.

Examples Guidance Notes

See 3.1.2.9 where undertaken in accordance with Approved Palette 1 Programmed or cyclical redecoration of a specific element or surface of Colours. Otherwise refer 3.1.4.22 belonging to a particular block/blocks. Page 110 The white painted soffits of the terraces enhance the light reflection 2 Redecoration of an originally painted Section of soffit to balconies to the adjacent rooms and are an important element of the /terraces. architectural vocabulary of the whole Estate. A single colour A M B E R R R R R E E E E B B B B A A A A M M M M A M B E R R E B A M reference, in this case white (refer to the Approved Palette), is to be used for all soffits throughout the Estate. Isolated cases and ‘one off’ decoration of these soffits is to be seriously discouraged as the result will be conspicuous. When redecoration outside a normal decoration cycle is necessary because of fire or water damage, any recoating should be to logical termination lines such as down stand beams, edges or returns (Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice for external redecoration).

Care must be taken to ensure that localised repair/cleaning does 3 Any local maintenance/cleaning or removal of graffiti from self-finished not create conspicuous changes to texture and colour on surfaces concrete or brickwork surfaces provided there is no damage to the of otherwise consistent (though potentially unevenly patinated) substrate and that the visual unity of the surface is not lost. appearance. If there is any doubt about the success of any cleaning/remedial works, contact a specialist contractor for advice. See Section 4. 2 Best practice-concrete elements. Examples Guidance Notes

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 21 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

4 Changes to ironmongery to solid external doors onto balconies/terraces. It is permissible to change locking mechanisms, door closers, panic bars and other security measures to such doors provided that the new fittings match the character and finish of the original or adjacent fittings and that visual impact is kept to a minimum. It is advised that when carrying out works of this nature, consideration is given to the full complement of ironmongery across a whole block or elevation so that incongruous ‘one offs’ do not manifest themselves on the elevations. No changes to existing fire escape or fire-fighting strategies are permissible unless the strategy is reviewed across a whole block.

Page 111

A M B E R R E B A M

M B E R

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 22 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

3.1.4 Works that require a LBC application . RED These are alterations which will clearly have an effect on the character and special architectural interest of the building and therefore require formal evaluation to establish whether or not the impact will be detrimental. In certain cases it may also be necessary to obtain planning permission.

Examples Guidance Notes

Other than like-for-like repair by specialist contractors, any invasive 1 Any alterations to the existing exposed concrete structures or surface or permanent change to the exposed concrete structures will require treatments in terms of colour and/or texture for both self-finished and a LBC application. coated concrete. Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice guidance for concrete repair.

Other than like-for-like repair by specialist contractors, any invasive

Page 112 2 Any alterations to the existing facing brickwork, including brick type, or permanent change to facing brickwork will need a LBC bonding pattern and pointing characteristics. application. Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice guidance for brick work repair.

R E D D D D D E E E E R R R R Any alterations to windows and/or glazed balcony doors will require 3 Any alteration, replacement or repair to frames, opening sashes, a LBC application. ironmongery, glazing or mastic to windows or glazed balcony doors or any change to the fenestration pattern. In the case of repairs or replacement the City Corporation’s Department of the Built Environment will need to approve and verify that the intended work fulfils ‘like-for-like’ criteria prior to implementation of the works.

Any alterations to ventilation grille patterns, frames opening sizes, 4 Alteration, replacement or repair to ventilation grilles. finish and colour will require a LBC application.

In the case of repairs or replacement the Department of the Built Environment will need to verify and approve that the intended work fulfils ‘like-for-like’ criteria prior to implementation of the works.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 23 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

Examples might include enlargement of lobbies or entrance porches 5 Any amendment to building plans or footprints that have an external at podium level. These would be highly sensitive and definitely manifestation, including new local refuse holds and enclosures. require formal consent. Examples Guidance Notes

6 Removal or replacement of paving slabs to private balconies and terraces. Concrete paviors are a special part of the building character and any alterations will require a LBC application. When the proposed works are like-for-like the Department of the Built Environment would need to verify and approve both the works and the samples of replacement paviors prior to implementation. See Section 4.1 Best practice for roofing and terraces.

7 Removal of non-original conservatory, or roofed addition to roof terrace. Any work to remove additions to roof terraces should be carried out

Page 113 in a way that respects the original massing and the articulation of the roofscape design of the block. Re-exposed surfaces must be

R E D D E R treated so that any scars are remedied and that the textures and colours are re-established to match original intentions.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 24 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

8 Replacement of the standard planter boxes forming part of the These planters along the semi private terraces to the terrace blocks composition with the glass and steel balustrade to terrace walkways. are integral to the elevational composition. Together with the steel and glass railings they create a level of finer detail which counterbalances the monochrome monolithic nature of the exposed concrete structure. Any departure from the original intended pattern must be avoided. It is advised that any replacement or upgrade proposal is coordinated across the whole Estate and that planter boxes that match the original dimensions and pale grey matt finish are chosen. Larger or taller boxes would affect the original sight lines from interiors towards the communal landscaped areas and detract from the architectural character of the residential units and should therefore be avoided. Refer to Section 2.0 Special interest. Also refer to Section 3.3.5.5 Guidance for flat interiors and private terraces and balconies. Also refer to the Introduction and Executive Summary Section item 1.2.2.

Page 114

Examples Guidance Notes R E D D E R

Roofscapes and silhouettes to all residential blocks in the Barbican 9 Changes to heights, configurations or surface finishes of ventilation grilles are a highly visible aspect of the identity of the Estate and and access hatches; lift shafts and lift overruns; services shafts and roof architectural composition. As a general rule the massing at roof top enclosures, including roof lights and plant housings, wiring and level should not be altered. Where alterations are required to services. comply with current regulations or to improve operational performance, close attention must be paid to detailing, locating installations and making good etc. The maintenance and cyclical repairs to roof membranes etc are discussed in detail under Section 4: Best practice guide for roofs.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 25 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

10 Replacement, alteration, removal and redecoration of vertical service Other than like-for-like repairs and redecoration in colours from the down pipes, their casings, termination details and all associated fixings Approved Palette all other proposals will necessitate a LBC and brackets to include: application. - Rain water down pipes and drainage gulleys - Garchey down pipes - Service risers

11 Waterproofing details on all vertical and horizontal surfaces Water proofing details and re-roofing systems must be considered Any waterproofing detail adjoining other elevational components. for their potential architectural impact and their suitability for the These include: intended application. The roofscape, referred to by the original - Fascias to vaulted roofs architects as ‘the fifth façade’, is a key element of the buildings’ - Windows and doorframes character. - Exposed aggregate in-situ concrete walls - Re-roofing generally

Page 115

R E D D E R 12 Alteration or replacement of frameless glass hinged privacy screens (and Any replacement must be on a like-for-like basis and any required associated ironmongery) along terrace fire escape routes. changes should be considered on a block-by-block basis to maintain consistency across facades.

Examples Guidance Notes

The location and style of any new signage must be consistent with 13 New signage generally (including any sign which is not a like-for-like an Estate-wide strategy and should be located in such a way as to replacement.). relate to the original design.

Safety and escape route signage must be consistent with an Estate- wide strategy and should be located as discreetly as possible. Current regulations with regard to style, size and location of such signs must be reconciled with heritage aspects of the Estate through discussions with the appropriate authorities . (PS to advise)

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 26 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

The original design for these elements should be considered when 14 Removal, replacement or any alteration to entrance canopies. conceiving any alternative design. Additionally the original configuration of entrance points should be maintained. Generally the profile, height, junction and abutment details together with materials, texture and colour must considered when developing new proposals.

Any repair work or replacement other than on a like-for-like basis is 15 New services, access guardings, access ladders and steps. subject to a LBC application. Generally the new installations should be located as discreetly as possible, with due consideration of key sightlines and angles of visibility of the roofscape. Colour and locations of fixings and associated apparatus should be carefully considered to ensure the visual continuity and silhouette of the blocks is not disrupted.

Page 116 Any installation should be located as discreetly as possible, with due 16 Replacement or upgrade of existing safe access and fall arrest systems. consideration of key sightlines and angles of visibility of the roofscape. See also item 3.1.4.14 above. R E D D E R

Any installation should be located as discreetly as possible, with due 17 Replacement or upgrade of existing lightning protection scheme. consideration of key sightlines and angles of visibility of the roofscape. See also item 3.1.4.14 above. Examples Guidance Notes

18 Removal or alteration of original steel angle door stops at each access The original design for these elements should be considered when door to the entrance lobbies of the terrace blocks (at podium level). conceiving any alternative design. Additionally the original configuration of entrance points should be maintained. Generally the profile, height, junction and abutment details must be considered when developing new proposals. Floor mounted stops are not advisable as they constitute a significant departure from original design intentions and create trip hazards on the walkways.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 27 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

19 Alteration, replacement and reconfiguration of elements constituting Any proposals other than like-for-like repairs are subject to a LBC External Deck Access to intermediate floors and to top floor of Bryer Court application. Where replacement of glass planks is required, to include: consideration should be given to replicating these highly - Floor finishes characteristic elements. - Profilit glass planks - Light fittings - Canopy at top floor

20 Any alteration, replacement and/or reconfiguration of steel profile framed Any proposals other than like-for-like repairs are subject to a LBC glazed entry doors and lobby enclosures to include: application. - Frames - Doors (For doors/ door ironmongery to individual flats refer 3.3.4.2) - Ironmongery (including door furniture and numbering) - Glazing

Page 117

R E D D E R 21 Alteration, replacement and reconfiguration of: Any proposals other than like-for-like repairs are subject to a LBC - In-situ concrete window boxes to below podium flats application. The retention or like-for-like replacement of the original planters is encouraged.

22 Programmed or cyclical redecoration of a specific element or surface Any proposals other than like-for-like redecoration, or where belonging to a particular block/blocks where NOT undertaken in undertaken in accordance with Approved Palette of Colours, are acoordance with Approved Palette of Colours subject to a LBC application.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 28 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

3.1.5 Proposals for which a LBC application would be required but where consent is unlikely to be granted

These constitute works which would almost certainly have a detrimental effect on the character and special architectural interest of the

BLACK residential blocks and therefore will require a LBC application.

Any application to change or alter the mass, foot print, height and silhouette or the original architectural character of the elevations of any listed block is likely to be refused. Examples below are the principal elements which may be subject to a proposal for alteration or change. As stated in 3.1.1 above, the examples are not exhaustive and there may be other elements that are subject to proposals for change. In every case it is incumbent on the originator of the proposal to check with the conservation authorities before implementing any course of action.

Examples Guidance Notes

The exposed aggregate concrete is one of the defining elements of Page 118 1 Decoration of any originally self-finished materials or surfaces, including the Barbican and any work to the concrete should be considered in cleaning of any self-finished surfaces now characterised by weathering terms of the potential impact on the buildings’ special architectural patina. interest.

B L A C K K K C C A A B B L L Decoration of originally undecorated concrete would not normally be permitted under any circumstances. Redecoration of any surface already decorated at the time of listing may be permitted subject to detailed consideration.

Over-cladding of concrete is most unlikely to be permitted, as it is 2 Over-cladding of any self-finished concrete elements. inconsistent with the character and structural expression of the original architectural design.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 29 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

Applications for extensions, glazed or otherwise, onto the balconies 3 Any change to original glazing lines or enclosure of existing balconies/roof or terraces are likely to be refused. terraces. Where original glazing lines have been moved, proposals for reinstatement to their original location will be encouraged. Any proposals to alter these works would be subject to a LBC application. Details and contextual proposals for alterations must be discussed with the conservation authorities prior to submission of LBC application. Examples Guidance Notes

Examples might include the construction of new refuse depositories 4 Any permanent or temporary new enclosures at podium or ground level. to compensate for the decommissioning of the Garchey System.

Applications to alter fenestration patterns, frame, sash, glazing,

Page 119 5 Any change to the original windows, French windows, i.e. fenestration colours and texture are likely to be refused. pattern, frame, opening sash and door leaf materials, finishes, dimensions profiles and mastic colour, and/or the addition of new ironmongery. Where the original windows have been replaced, proposals for reinstatement of replacements which replicate the originals as For remedial works or like-for-like replacements see 3.1.4.3 closely as possible will be encouraged. B L A C K K C A B L The consistency of appearance of external doors is part of each building’s character, and would be an important consideration in evaluating any proposals for change. Any changes with an external manifestation would not normally be allowed unless part of a comprehensive Estate-wide renewal/replacement programme, which would require approval of LBC application.

Also refer to Section 3.2 Guidelines for internal common areas.

Applications for extensions, glazed or otherwise onto the roofs 6 Addition of any new rooftop extension or roof over an existing roof terrace. would affect the architectural integrity of the elevations, roofline and/or the silhouette of the blocks and are likely to be refused.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 30 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

The roof top structures and installations on lower blocks are highly 7 Changes to footprint, height and profile of lift motor rooms, ventilation visible from their taller neighbours and form an integral part of the shafts and other roof top services installations. overall character of the Estate. It is therefore likely that an application to materially alter any of these elements will be subject to close scrutiny.

Similarly any proposals to change or alter these elements on the tower blocks should consider the potential effect on the highly distinctive silhouette of the block.

Any proposal to alter heights, change the generic design or 8 Removal, alteration or change of height or material to glass and steel configuration of railings, glazed railings with or without planter railings and parapet walls. boxes, concrete parapets and guardings with or without planter box details is very likely to be refused. Examples Guidance Notes

Page 120 9 Installation of satellite dishes, aerials, antennae or any other surface- Applications for such installations made on an individual basis are mounted service installations including plant housings or air-conditioning most likely to be refused, as external proliferation of these elements units. would be highly detrimental.

B L A C K K C A B L An application to install communal aerials or satellite dishes may be considered provided their siting and potential visual impact on the roofscape and the general character of the Estate is fully explored to avoid the risk of adverse effect.

10 Alteration, replacement and reconfiguration of pre-cast exposed aggregate Applications to alter the frame, shape, size and texture of these very duct covers. characteristic duct covers are likely to be refused.

Applications for repairs and reconditioning of these duct covers would be considered provided that specialist advice is sought and that the Department of the Built Environment is consulted prior to submission of an application.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 31 Draft – March 2012

3.1 GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS

11 Alteration and/or reconfiguration to external stairs leading to entrance An application to alter or reconfigure these stairs is likely to be lobbies of John Trundle Court and Bretton House. refused.

Proposals to overhaul and recondition these stairs would be subject to an LBC application and a like-for-like approach would be encouraged.

Localised like-for-like repairs would not trigger a LBC application provided that the repair is carried out professionally and to a comprehensive extent as per Section 4 Best practice.

Page 121

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR EXTERNAL ELEMENTS 32 Draft – March 2012

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 122 3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.1 General Notes:

This Section includes interior parts of the buildings that are in the public or semi public domain – i.e. shared by residents within individual blocks. The interiors of private dwellings are discussed in Section 3.3 of the Guidelines.

Maintenance work to common areas - in this case the interiors – must take account of the original design intentions and should be carried out on a like-for-like basis. Generally where maintenance is required to common areas it should be carried out within the framework of the maintenance cycle or a quinquennial review (see Management Guidance and Conservation Strategy sections).

When wear and tear or modern requirements necessitate replacements, overhaul, alterations or installation of new services then close attention must be paid to design and detail to ensure optimum integration into the existing design and character of these interiors.

Generally works should be carried out within an Estate-wide strategy so that a consistency of design and detailing principles is maintained.

The primary interior common areas discussed here are: Interior common areas to Cromwell, Lauderdale and Interior and exterior common areas to deck access block; Shakespeare towers: Bryer Court

Page 123 Reception areas and communal landings and lift lobbies This is the only block to have a dedicated external deck access. It has Meeting rooms to Cromwell and Lauderdale Towers half the plan depth of the typical blocks – the flats are arranged only to Escape stairs the west side of the access decks because of the proximity of the adjacent building

Interior common areas to corridor access north –south Blocks with no dedicated common areas; The Postern, blocks; Willoughby House, Gilbert House, Mountjoy House, Wallside, Lambert Jones Mews, Brandon Mews: Seddon House, and the east-west block - Ben Johnson The units in these blocks have direct access via the podium or at House: street/car park level, or both, and so have no dedicated common areas Entrance and lift lobbies Stairs Corridors

Interior common areas to vertical access blocks; Speed House, Andrewes House, Thomas More House, Defoe House, Bunyan Court, John Trundle Court, Breton House: In these blocks pairs or clusters of flats are served by staircases and lifts enclosed in fully glazed lightwells

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 33 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.1 General Notes:

This Section is intended to provide guidance on proposals for change to the common interior parts of the Barbican residential blocks and how their likely impact on the architectural character of the Estate will determine the need to apply for Listed Building Consent (LBC). Examples of potential changes are colour coded in relation to their likely status vis-à-vis planning and listed building requirements. In all cases, the criterion to be considered is whether a proposed item of work will affect the building’s character in relation to its special architectural interest. Permissible works (shown in green) are those where there would be no such effect and where accordingly no application for consent would be required. Works which are difficult to assess without further scrutiny and will need specific guidance as to whether a formal application is required or not, are shown in amber. Then there will be clear cases of work for which a LBC application would be required, although this need not imply that consent will not be given. These are shown in red. And finally there are works which would clearly impact adversely on the special interest or character of the blocks individually and/or the Estate as a whole and accordingly be likely to be refused permission (these examples are shown in black).

It is important to note that the requirements in relation to listed building status are separate and additional to any obligations imposed by lease conditions. In every category, additional guidance notes are cross-referenced to examples and depicted in a blue box. The examples given here are not exhaustive and there may be other details and features particular to one or more block types which have not been noted. It is therefore

Page 124 incumbent on the Estate managers and commissioners of works to consider their potential impact in relation to the special architectural interest prior to implementation.

Guidelines for works to areas outside of the leaseholder demise lines but inside the blocks, internal communal areas, are discussed in Section 3.2 of this document.

NB. This guidance does not take precedence over the formal application required by Listed Building Consent regulations. While this Section of the document cannot directly prohibit any works, anyone wishing to undertake such works has an obligation to supply sufficiently detailed information to demonstrate that the proposed works are not detrimental to the special interest and character of the Estate.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 34 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.1 General Notes: Headings Glossary of Terms

3.2.2 Alteration – changing the existing state of design Works that will not require a LBC GREEN Appliance – cooking or heating apparatus application . Approved Palette – a set of materials or colours formally adopted for use in specified locations at the Barbican

Coated – painted or varnished finishes 3.2.3 Works where advice should be Fabric – the assembled materials of which the building shell and AMBER sought to determine whether a LBC interiors are made application is required Fittings – built-in joinery, sanitary ware or cabinetry

Page 125 Invasive – an aggressive or potentially disruptive operation / 3.2.4 damaging to a surface or substrate

RED Works that require a LBC application ‘like-for-like’ – the use of identical material or equivalent material and/or design in any replacement work such that no alteration occurs

Refurbishment – the process of returning something to its former state/good condition

3.2.5 Proposals for which a LBC Reinstatement – the return of an original element of design BLACK application is required but where Renewal/ Replacement – the removal of existing fabric, fittings or consent is unlikely to be granted installations and introduction of new in its place

Repair – mending existing fabric, fittings or installations

Guidance Notes Replication – to reproduce exactly; to make a duplicate of an original BLUE Notes to be read in conjunction with each of the Self-finished – uncoated expressed material

categories Substrate – The underlying material to which a finish is applied

Quinquennial – five yearly intervals

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 35 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.2 Works that will not require a LBC application . GREEN This Section outlines works that are considered to have no impact on the special architectural interest of the building and will therefore not require Listed Building Consent.

Generally the works included in this Section address wear and tear, accidental or wilful damage to the interior surfaces, fabric, fittings, and fixtures which can be repaired locally and do not require the input of a specialist contractor.

Examples Guidance Notes

Like-for-like repairs or identical replacement of any fixture or fabric Localised like-for-like repairs or replacements can be carried out 1 Examples of fixtures and fittings: without submission of a LBC application. If the extent of repairs Light fittings covers a whole corridor, lobby or stair enclosure the proposals Switches should be submitted to the City Corporation’s Department of the

Page 126 Socket outlets Built Environment to establish compliance with ‘like-for-like’ criteria Door ironmongery prior to commencement of the works. In all other cases a LBC Signage application must be submitted. Heating elements Examples of fabric: The retention of original fittings and fixtures is encouraged where it G R E E N N E R E G Plastered and decorated surfaces is practical or like-for-like replacement is not possible. Self finish surfaces such as decorative concrete Quarry tiles with profiled edge to circulation stairs

Generally any redecoration must be carried out in accordance with 2 Redecoration and repair of decorated elements, with the exception of the the Approved Palette, paint specification and methods of inside of timber framed external windows and screens, unless the latter is application. like-for-like redecoration. Removal of non-original coatings to restore The inside faces of the external timber framed windows, doors and original finish and colour. screens are generally finished in the same colour and texture as the outside face. This consistency is significant as the character of the Estate will be affected by any finishes which depart from overall design consistency. The removal of non-original coatings to restore original finishes and textures must be carried out with care and by specialist contractors to minimise the risk of permanent damage to the existing fabric and substrate.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 36 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

Examples Guidance Notes

Generally these should be replaced on a ‘like-for-like’ basis and to 3 Renewal of any applied floor finishes e.g. carpet and linoleum. the original extent. Junctions, finished levels and abutments must be formed to reproduce the original detailing. When upgrades are considered to address Disability Discrimination Act (DDA) requirements, the matter should be referred to the Department of the Built Environment.

Changes, upgrade and general replacement of electrical services 4 Renewal of the existing electrical services installations provided that and wiring not requiring new or additional service routes is original service routes are re-used. permissible. Please note that in the interest of safety, all electrical works must be carried out by suitably qualified personnel and be in compliance with the relevant regulations.

Page 127 Temporary works to secure and make safe the fabric or components 5 Emergency repair works or stabilisation of unsafe details where the health are acceptable as long as they cause no further damage to the and safety of the general public or operatives is at risk. fabric and that they are programmed for comprehensive repairs. Care must be taken to ensure full reversibility of any temporary works. G R E E N N E R E G It is permissible to carry out emergency work to locking 6 Emergency changes to ironmongery to the public face of dwelling entrance mechanisms, door closers, panic bars and other security measures doors, and the internal and external faces of escape/access doors, hinged to doors provided that new fittings to match the character and finish duct covers, and services cupboard doors onto balconies/terraces. of the original or adjacent fittings are procured and programmed for permanent installation. The visual impact of any change must be kept to a minimum. Please also refer to Section 3.3.4.2 Guidance for flat interiors. No changes to existing fire escape or fire-fighting strategies are permissible unless the strategy is reviewed across a whole block.

7 Removal of graffiti where damage has been caused to a glazed or In case damage is beyond local repair, specialist advice should be decorated surface or element. (Please refer to Section 3.2.3.2 for graffiti sought before any remedial action is taken. removal to self-finished concrete or brickwork surfaces).

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 37 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.3 Works where advice should be sought to determine whether a LBC application is required

AMBER This Section outlines examples of works where it is not possible to determine in advance and without considering further detailed information, the potential effect on the special architectural interest of the building. In such cases prior advice should be sought before embarking on the work to ascertain if a formal LBC application is necessary.

Examples Guidance Notes

Vertical and horizontal duct and services casings within the common 1 Removal and replacement of duct and service riser casings. parts may be replaced or upgraded provided they do not affect internal layouts and/or the sectional line of corridors. Neither should they introduce materials or surfaces which are incongruous vis-à-vis other existing and original materials and finishes. Any opening up

Page 128 work, changes or over-cladding should be approached with caution as service ducts may contain hazardous materials and/or interventions may breach fire lining or fire stopping. These ducts may also contain services to other units or parts of the block.

A M B E R R E B A M

Every effort must be made to ensure that any localised 2 Any local maintenance/cleaning or removal of graffiti from self-finished concrete or brickwork surfaces provided there is no damage to the repair/cleaning does not create conspicuous changes of colour or substrate and that the visual unity of the surface is not lost. texture on surfaces of otherwise consistent appearance. If there is any doubt about the success of any cleaning/remedial works, contact a specialist contractor for advice and conduct trial samples. See Section 4. 2 Best practice-concrete elements.

3 Works needed to provide enhanced access in compliance with DDA Such work is unlikely to require a LBC application provided it is requirements. sympathetically conceived and professionally executed. However, details of proposals should be discussed with the Department of the Built Environment prior to implementation.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 38 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

Examples Guidance Notes

4 Changes to ironmongery to the public face of doors to common parts, It is permissible to change locking mechanisms, door closers, panic dwelling entrance doors and the internal and external faces of bars and other security devices to doors provided that the new escape/access, hinged duct covers, and services cupboard doors onto fittings are generally of the same character and finish as the original balconies/terraces. or adjacent fittings and that the visual impact is kept to a minimum. It is advised that when carrying out works of this nature, attention is paid to the full complement of ironmongery to avoid incongruous ‘one-off’ fittings. This applies to both a door leaf and the full extent of the elevation or corridor within which it is located. No changes to existing fire escape or fire-fighting strategies are permissible unless the strategy is reviewed across a whole block.

Changes to the elevations to front entrance doors to dwellings and the removal and replacement of visible door furniture such as numbers, door-bells and letter plates will be subject to a LBC Page 129 application. Any change of this nature is discouraged unless it forms part of an application covering a whole floor or groupings of dwellings around a common stairwell.

A M B E R R E B A M Refer also 3.2.4.15 and 3.3.4.2

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 39 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.4 Works that require a LBC application . RED These are alterations which will clearly have an effect on the character and special architectural interest of the building and therefore require formal evaluation to establish whether or not the impact will be detrimental.

Examples Guidance Notes

Any alterations to the existing exposed concrete structures and their Other than like-for-like repair by specialist contractors, any other 1 surface treatment in terms of colour and texture for both self-finished and invasive or permanent change to the exposed concrete structures or coated concrete. Particular areas include: surfaces will require LBC application submissions. Stair wells Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice guidance for concrete repair. Stair stringers and raked soffits to stairs Soffits

Page 130 Other than like-for-like repair by specialist contractors any other 2 Any alterations to the existing facing brickwork, including bonding, pointing invasive or permanent change to facing brickwork will need a LBC and brick type. application. R E D D E R Refer to Section 4.2 Best practice guidance for brick work repair.

Any alterations to fenestration pattern, frames opening sashes and 3 Alteration to window and doors and frames to common parts including, glazing to the windows and glazed doors will require a LBC localised or piecemeal redecoration (in a different colour) changes to application. ironmongery and glazing specification (including double glazing and solar In the case of repairs or replacement the Department of the Built control glass. Environment will need to approve and verify that the intended work fulfils ‘like-for-like’ criteria prior to implementation of the works.

Any alterations to ventilation grille patterns, frame opening sizes and 4 Alteration, replacement, redecoration in a different colour to ventilation colour will require a LBC application. grilles. In the case of repairs or replacement the Department of the Built Environment will need to approve and verify that the intended work fulfils ‘like-for-like’ criteria prior to implementation of the works.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 40 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

Examples Guidance Notes

5 Removal or replacement of quarry tiling with integral special edge upstand Any extensive work, other than localised like-for-like repairs, will be detail to communal stairs and landings. subject to a LBC application.

6 Any extensive work, other than localised like-for-like repairs, will be Removal, replacement or alteration to hand rails and guardings to stairs, subject to a LBC application. balconies and internal circulation areas.

Any extensive work, other than localised like-for-like repairs, will be 7 Removal, replacement or alteration to glazed screens or doors to stair subject to a LBC application. lobbies, stair wells, entrance halls, corridors and lobbies. These screens have significant architectural importance in terms of Page 131 lighting and visibility. The frame Section sizes and the fenestration patterns are integral to both internal and external elevational character of the common areas.

R E D D E R

Any extensive work, other than localised ‘like-for-like’ repairs, on 8 Glazed screens common to dwellings and communal areas (internal either side, will be subject to a LBC application. windows) e.g. fixed glazed panels adjacent to front entrance doors along These screens have significant architectural importance in terms of corridors in Willoughby House. lighting and visual connection. The frame Section sizes and the fenestration patterns are significant to both the internal and external elevations of the common areas.

Replacement, alteration, removal and redecoration of visible vertical 9 service down pipes their casings, termination details and all associated Other than like-for-like repairs and redecoration in appropriate fixings and brackets including: colours selected from Approved Palette for redecoration, all other - Rain water down pipes proposals will necessitate a LBC application. - Garchey down pipes - Service risers

E D E D Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 41 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

Examples Guidance Notes

The location and style of any new building signage, whether fixed or 10 New signage generally (including any sign which is not a like-for-like free-standing, must be considered within an Estate-wide strategy replacement). and be carefully integrated with the architectural and locational context. Safety and escape route signage must also be consistent with an Estate-wide strategy and be sensitively located. Current regulations regarding style, size and location of such signs must be reconciled with the original design intent through discussions with the appropriate authorities.

Any extensive work (including replacement), other than localised 11 Fittings and fixtures to entrance and lift lobbies to tower blocks: like-for-like repairs, will be subject to a LBC application. - Reception desk - Call control panel to flats The interior design and detailing of the entrance lobbies and - Post boxes communal areas of the tower blocks are integral to the architectural Page 132 - Fixed furniture character of the blocks. Retention and restoration of the originally - Light fittings designed fixtures and fittings are encouraged. Where the proposal is - Lift call consoles to update technology for electronic and electrical controls then - R E D D E R Lift doors consideration should be given to whether original housings can be - Lift cars adapted or replicated to accommodate the new electrical specifications so that the image remains as originally intended.

12 Call control to lifts and intercom panels and name plates to all other Any extensive work, other than localised like-for-like repairs, will be blocks. subject to a LBC application.

Any additions of visible services within communal interior areas will 13 Installation of additional services within the communal internal areas. be subject to a LBC application. Proposed work should be architecturally controlled to respect the original visual order of the interiors. Refer to the best practice Section 4.3 on Services.

Any extensive work, other than localised like-for-like repairs or 14 Alterations and replacement of existing services that would have a visible replacements, will be subject to a LBC application. Proposals should aspect. be considerate and take into account architecturally important issues such as location and routing.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 42 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

Examples Guidance Notes

15 Alteration, replacement and reconfiguration of steel profile framed glazed Any proposals other than like-for-like repairs will be subject to a LBC entry doors and lobby and lift lobby enclosures to include: application. The proposals must be considered, illustrated and be - Frames designed in the character of the original design. - Doors - Ironmongery (including any residential units with front doors directly visible to the exterior.) - Glazing

Page 133

R E D D E R

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 43 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

3.2.5 Proposals for which a LBC application is required but where consent is unlikely to be granted

These constitute works which would almost certainly have a detrimental effect on the character and special architectural interest of the residential blocks and therefore require a LBC application . BLACK Any application to change the original architectural character of the interior design of the common parts specific to each block is likely to be rejected. Examples below are the principal elements which may be subject to a proposal for alteration or change. As stated in 3.2 above, the examples are not exhaustive and there may be other elements that may be subject to a proposal for change. In every case it is incumbent on the originator of the proposal to check with the Department of the Built Environment before implementing any action.

Examples Guidance Notes

The exposed aggregate concrete is one of the defining elements of Page 134 1 Decoration of any originally self-finished materials or surfaces. the Barbican interiors and any proposed work to the concrete should be considered in terms of the potential impact on the buildings’ special architectural interest.

B L A C K K C A B L Decoration of originally undecorated concrete would not be normally permitted under any circumstances. Redecoration of any surface decorated at the time of listing may be permitted subject to detailed consideration.

2 Applied decorative linings to any self-finish concrete or any other self– Lining of self-finished concrete or any other self-finished surface is finish elements and surfaces. most unlikely to be permitted as it would constitute a significant departure from the original design intentions and interior aesthetics.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 44 Draft – March 2012

3.2 GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS

Examples Guidance Notes

An application for extensions, glazed or otherwise, of the existing 3 Any change to original glazing lines or enclosure of entrance and lift lines of these lobbies, thus affecting the internal layouts or external lobbies. envelope is most likely to be refused. Where original glazing lines have been moved, proposals for reinstatement to their original location will be encouraged. Any proposals to alter these works would be subject to a LBC application. Details and contextual proposals for alterations must be discussed with the Department of the Built Environment prior to submission of LBC application.

Applications to alter any aspect of the original glazing elements are 4 Any change to the internal elevations of original windows, French likely to be refused. windows, i.e. fenestration pattern, frame, sash and door leaf materials, Where the original windows have been replaced, proposals for Page 135 finishes, dimensions and profiles and mastic. reinstatement with new components which replicate the originals as closely as possible will be encouraged. For remedial works or like-for-like replacements see Section 3.1.4.3. The consistency of appearance of the internal elevation of the external doors is part of the building’s character and would be considered in evaluating any proposed changes. Any alteration that B L A C K K C A B L would detract from a coordinated and homogenous internal appearance would not normally be allowed unless part of a comprehensive Estate-wide renewal/replacement programme, which would be subject to a LBC application.

Also refer to the entry under Section 3.1 Guidelines for external areas.

An application to alter the frame, shape, size and characteristic 5 Alteration, replacement and reconfiguration of pre-cast exposed aggregate texture of these duct doors or covers is likely to be refused. duct covers i.e. those found in the lift lobbies to tower blocks. An application for repairs and re-conditioning of these duct covers would be considered provided that specialist advice is sought and that the Department of the Built Environment is consulted prior to submission of an application.

Volume II, PAGE GUIDANCE FOR COMMON AREAS 45 Draft – March 2012

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 136 3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

3.3.1 General Notes:

This Section is intended to provide guidance on proposals for change within the interiors of dwellings and how their likely impact on the architectural character of the building will determine the need to apply for Listed Building Consent (LBC). Examples of potential changes are colour coded in relation to their likely status vis-à-vis planning and listed building requirements. In all cases, the criterion to be considered is whether a proposed item of work will affect the building’s character in relation to its special architectural interest. Permissible works (shown in green) are those where there would be no such effect and where accordingly no application for consent would be required. Works which are difficult to assess without consideration of specific details and will need guidance as to whether or not a formal application is required are shown in amber. Then there will be clear cases of work for which a LBC application would be required, although this need not imply that consent will not be given. These are shown in red. And finally there are works which would clearly impact adversely on the special interest or character of the interiors and accordingly be likely to be refused permission (these examples are shown in black). It is important to note that the requirements in relation to listed building status are separate and additional to any obligations imposed by lease or any other conditions. In every category, additional guidance notes are cross-referenced to examples and depicted in a blue box.

Failure to obtain LBC for any works which affect the character of a listed building may carry a legal penalty (see Volume I, Section 6). If changes have been made to a flat which do not have due documentary proof that either a) LBC has been granted or was agreed in advance - or b) that it is clear from these guidelines (i.e. green category works or amber with confirmation) that such works would not require consent, this may delay

Page 137 the sale of the property in the future.

3.3.1.2 Guidance for adaptation of existing dwellings to facilitate use by people with special needs

From time to time it may be necessary to adapt units in certain ways to cater for people with special needs. Examples might include widening doorways, introduction of a stairlift, or changing bathroom or kitchen configurations to allow for wheelchair accessibility or the introduction of tactile flooring for occupants with impaired sight. Whilst most changes are likely to fall within one of the categories covered in the Guidelines, it is recommended that in all such cases advice is sought from the City Corporation’s Department of the Built Environment at the earliest opportunity in order to clarify where works may proceed unencumbered and identify cases where formal consent procedures are required.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 46 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

3.3.1.3 General Notes: Headings Glossary of Terms

Alteration – changing the existing state of design 3.3.2 Works that will not require a LBC application . Appliance – cooking or heating apparatus GREEN Approved Palette – a set of materials or colours formally adopted for use in specified locations at the Barbican

Coated – painted or varnished finishes

3.3.3 Works where advice should be Fabric – the assembled materials of which the building and sought to determine whether a interiors are made AMBER LBC application is required Fittings – built-in joinery, sanitary ware or cabinetry

Page 138 Invasive (non-invasive) – aggressive or potentially disruptive / damaging to a surface or substrate

3.3.4 Works that require a LBC ‘ like-for-like’ – the use of identical or equivalent material RED application and/or design in any replacement work such that no alteration occurs

Refurbishment – the process of returning something to its former state/good condition

3.3.5 Proposals for which a LBC Renewal / replacement – the removal of existing fabric, application is required but where fittings or installations and introduction of new in its place BLACK consent is unlikely to be granted Repair – mending existing fabric, fittings or installations

Replication – to reproduce exactly; to make a duplicate of an original (to make copies) Guidance Notes Self-finished – uncoated expressed material

Notes to be read in conjunction with each of the categories

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 47 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

3.3.2 Works that will not require a LBC application . GREEN This section outlines works that are considered to have no impact on the special architectural interest of the building and will therefore not require Listed Building Consent.

Examples Guidance Notes

Examples of fixtures and fittings: 1 Like-for-like repairs or matching replacement of any fixture or fabric kitchen appliances, cabinets, sink & worktops door ironmongery and fittings light fittings, switches, sockets etc. Examples of fabric: Plastering and repairs to wall and ceiling Structural repairs to elements such as screed or suffits Slabs and walls The retention of original fixtures and fittings is encouraged where it is practical or a like-for-like replacement is possible. Additionally Page 139 residents are invited to donate any discarded original item to an Estate depository of salvaged items for potential use by other Barbican residents. For details contact Estate Management.

G R E E N N E R E G Inside face of the external timber framed windows, screens and 2 Internal redecoration with the exception of the inside of timber framed patio doors are generally finished in the same coating (originally external windows and screens, unless the latter is like-for-like varnished) as the outside face. This co-ordination is significant as redecoration. Removal of non-original coatings to restore original finish the character of the Estate will be affected by any finishes which and colour detract from overall design consistency, especially when it concerns the pivoted and reversible window sashes. Retention of the original Painting the exterior surface of window frames and screens is excluded finish specification is therefore encouraged. Application of non from this category. Refer 3.3.5.1 penetrating coatings such as paint systems is generally acceptable provided that the system does not permanently discolour or damage the timber frame (i.e. is reversible, allowing reinstatement of original finish). Penetrative coatings (staining systems) are not acceptable in this category.

3 Removal and renewal of floor finishes Please refer to the conditions of lease.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 48 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

Examples Guidance Notes

Changes, upgrade and general replacement of electrical services 4 Addition of new electrical services installations within dwellings and and wiring not affecting the internal layout of the flats is acceptable. replacement and renewal of the existing ones Please note that in the interest of safety, all electrical works must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations. Please also note that where landlord’s supplies and fittings, such as under floor heating, intercom etc., are concerned all alterations and changes would need to be agreed and the method of implementation approved by the Barbican Estate Office.

5 Changes to original electrical fittings (e.g. light fittings, switch cover plates See guidance note 3.3.2.4 regarding safety precautions. etc.) within dwellings

Page 140 It is permissible to overlay or cover the treads and other parts of the 6 Overlaying finishes to the existing timber treads and risers to internal internal stairs with carpet or other material provided that the work is staircase reversible and that no permanent damage is suffered by the existing material and finishes. G R E E N N E R E G It is permissible to overlay or cover the original skirting details with 7 Adding or removal of cladding over the original skirting detail other material and details provided that the application is reversible and that no permanent damage is caused to the original.

It is permissible to change or add locking mechanisms and other 8 Fixing of new or additional locks or security devices to front doors and fire security measures (e.g. door chains and door viewers) to front escape doors subject to guidance notes entrance doors and fire escape doors provided that the external manifestations are kept to a minimum (i.e. escutcheons, but not protective plates and their fixings and only as long as there are no changes to existing fire escape or fire fighting strategies. Also refer to guidance notes 3.1.2.6, 3.1.3.4, 3.2.2.6, 3.2.3.4 and 3.3.4.2.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 49 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

Examples Guidance Notes

The permissible work to bathroom/WC is limited to changes to 9 Replacement of bathroom/ WC fittings and finishes finishes, sanitary ware, vanity tops and bathroom accessories and the necessary enabling works. This does not apply to proposals to alter room shape, size or location. The latter will necessitate a LBC application-see Section 3.3.4.1.

The permissible work to kitchens is limited to changes to cabinetry, 10 Replacement of kitchen cabinetry, worktops and appliances appliances and finishes. This does not apply to proposals to alter room shape, size or location. The latter will necessitate a LBC application-see Section 3.3.4.1.

Changes to doors, frames and ironmongery to internal doors and 11 Removal or replacement of internal doors and frames and ironmongery to cupboards would need to be checked for suitability for fire rooms, cupboards and wardrobes compartmentation and escape route clearances. Page 141

Replacement or removal of internal carcases, shelves, hanging 12 Alterations to the wardrobes and cupboards that do not result in any rails, subdivisions, hooks, drawers etc; together with associated alteration to plan layout of dwellings fixing details is permissible. G R E E N N E R E G See also Section 3.3.2.11 above and Section 3.3.3.3 in amber section.

Application of film or a coating to glazed sections of doors and screens in Where works to the glazed sections of internal screens and doors is 13 the dwellings limited to the application of a film or a coating a LBC application would not be required.

Removal of an individual Garchey terminal and associated plumbing 14 Removal of Garchey system inside dwellings work does not require an LBC application. It is, however, a requirement that the removal is carried out by professionals strictly in accordance with a method statement which must be obtained from the Barbican Estate Office, who must also be notified prior to the commencement of any works.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 50 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

3.3.3 Works where advice should be sought to determine whether a LBC application is required This Section outlines examples of works where it is not possible to predict in advance the potential effect on the special architectural interest of the building. In such cases prior advice should be sought before embarking on the work to ascertain if a formal LBC application is

AMBER necessary. Consideration of the requirement or otherwise for a LBC application includes whether the proposed change will be reversible and whether it will have any manifestation on the exterior of the building.

Examples Guidance Notes

1 Removal and replacement of duct and service riser casings Vertical and horizontal duct and service casings within the dwellings may be replaced and altered provided they do not affect internal layouts. Any changes or over cladding, including opening up, should be approached with caution and with Estate Office’s knowledge and

Page 142 approval as these may contain hazardous materials and/or interventions may breach fire lining or fire stopping. These ducts may also contain services to other units or parts of the block.

A M B E R R R R R E E E E B B B B A A A A M M M M 2 Application of additional guarding panels to the railings and removable When it is desired to add removable and temporary in-fills to open inserts to block up open risers to internal staircase guardings and stairs to prevent falls where small children are concerned, these cases may be treated as not requiring LBC provided the details, methods and fixings are submitted to the Estate Office for their consideration. Any fixing which may cause permanent damage to fabric and detail of the staircase will require a formal LBC application.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 51 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

Examples Guidance Notes

3 Removal of, or alterations to, built-in cupboards and wardrobes where Removal of the built-in cupboards and wardrobes would need to be such works would result in alteration of the dwelling plan layout. evaluated for the potential impact on the internal layout – and Creation of new full height partitioned alcoves for fitted wardrobes or therefore character – of the dwelling. In circumstances where such shelving units would require LBC if it resulted in change to the plan layout changes do not affect the dwelling layout LBC application would not be required. If, however, the removal of these built-in cupboards includes removal of part or whole partitions thus changing the internal layout then a LBC application may be applicable. See also 3.3.2.11 and 12.

Similarly creation of new full height partitions to create alcoves to fit in wardrobes or shelves will also need to be assessed on case by case basis to establish whether a LBC application is necessary. Changes to the internal layouts are dealt with under Section 3.3.4.

Page 143

An application would be necessary if the ceiling or bulkhead line 4 Insertion of new suspended ceilings or bulkheads were to interfere with the window heads or be visible from outside.

A M B E R R R R R E E E E B B B B A A A A M M M M

LBC may be required if the works involve relocating or removing 5 Works to internal glazed screen sets including fan lights whole or part of the glazing and alteration, relocation or removal of the whole or part of the door and screen set. See 3.3.2.11 and 13 and 3.3.4.1.

Early consultation is recommended to establish if LBC is required 6 Works in connection with adaptation for people with special needs and to facilitate the process. See 3.3.1.2.

As discussed within the Green Section (guidance note 3.3.2.7) over 7 Removal of original skirting details cladding (fixing skirting boards on top of existing detail) or removal of the retrofitted skirting details are not subject to LBC. The permanent removal of the original detail may however be subject to a LBC application .

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 52 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

3.3.4 Works that require a LBC application RED These are alterations which will clearly have an effect on the character and special architectural interest of the building and therefore require formal evaluation and determination to establish whether or not the impact will be detrimental .

Examples Guidance Notes

When applying for LBC, please note that the following issues would 1 Changes to internal layout of the flats. This includes: also need to be considered:

a. Changes to size, shape and location of kitchens • Fire compartmentation and escape routes b. Changes to size, shape and location of bathrooms • Stacking of services and accommodation c. Partial or wholesale removal of walls e.g. partitions and structural • Effects of such alteration with regard to walls - Neighbouring properties d. Removal of internal glazed screens. Also see guidance note - External manifestation Page 144 3.3.3.5 in amber section • Effects on landlord supplies such as under floor heating e. Removal of internal sliding doors and screens f. Permanent alteration of details to internal staircases and guardings. Certain alterations and remodelling of the dwellings will necessitate R E D D D D D E E E E R R R R g. Insertion of mezzanine level to double height spaces compliance with current Building Regulations such as sound . h. Addition of new full height partitions proofing and Means of Escape requirements i. Subdivision in plan or section of barrel vaulted spaces j. Introduction of double glazing or solar control glass The following examples of application may be granted LBC subject to detailed application:

• Creating an open plan kitchen including reduction/removal of the kitchen counter to the living space • Removing partitions to combine rooms such as kitchen and living space/ two bedrooms/ living space and bedroom • Removal of a partition wall between the living room and bedroom to create a larger living space • Removal of sliding partitions • Widening door openings to improve access for people with special needs • Creating an en-suite bathroom, if next to the service core

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 53 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

Examples Guidance Notes

The consistency of appearance of the dwelling front doors in the 2 Changes and/or additions to ironmongery and door furniture such as letter common parts is part of the building’s character and would be a boxes, numbers, door bell and lights, on the outside of the front entrance consideration in evaluating any proposals for change. door other than installation of new or additional security locks as discussed in guidance note 3.3.2.8 in green section Also refer to notes 3.1.2.6, 3.1.3.4, 3.2.2.6 and 3.2.3.4 for more guidance.

A number of Wallside townhouses have already glazed or enclosed 3 Enclosure of private roof terraces to Wallside townhouses the whole or parts of their roof terraces. This has resulted in changes to the original profile of the block and its roofscape.

Glazing or enclosure of the remainder of these particular roof terraces may be permissible subject to a LBC application supported by detailed plans and specifications. Any alterations to existing

Page 145 extensions will also be subject to LBC application.

Any proposed enclosure, however, must be set back and contained behind and below the existing exposed aggregate roof fascia and R ED ED ED ED ED R R R R the party walls between adjacent dwellings. The height must not be any higher than the roof over the stair well.

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 54 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

3.3.5 Proposals for which a LBC application is required but where consent is unlikely to be granted These constitute works which would almost certainly have a detrimental effect on the character and special architectural interest of the residential blocks and therefore require a LBC application .

BLACK These works may also be covered by the Leasehold Conditions and include those elements of the building fabric which fall outside leaseholders agreements such as windows, public and private balconies, walkways and escape routes and any other area or element which is on the external elevation of the blocks and terraces. Changes to elements which have the dual character of being part-private part-public, such as the borrowed light glazing to certain unit types, are also unlikely to be permissible .

Examples Guidance Notes

Also refer to Section 3.1 Guidance for external elements. 1 Any changes to structure or appearance of windows

Page 146 The external image and elevation to the front entrance doors and 2 Any changes to external face of entrance and external fire escape doors. external fire escape doors form part of the character of the common (For internal decoration and changes to ironmongery - see Section 3.3.2 parts. Any changes with an external manifestation would not guidance note 8) normally be allowed unless part of an overall Estate-wide strategy, in which case the freeholder would need to submit a LBC B L A C K K K K K C C CC A A A A B B B B L L L L application.

Also refer to Section 3.1 Guidance for external elements.

Also refer to Section 3.1 Guidance for external elements. 3 Changes to railing design and guardings to private balconies

Also refer to Section 3.1 Guidance for external elements. 4 Changes to glass escape doors across the balconies

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 55 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

Examples Guidance Notes

5 Changes to the typical planter boxes on the outside edge of the balconies The typical planter boxes on the outside edge of the balconies and and terraces terraces, provided by the Barbican Estate Office, are integral to the overall public character of the Barbican Estate. They should not be replaced, except as part of a fully designed Estate-wide renewal /replacement programme, which would be subject to the freeholder obtaining LBC.

Additionally locating any planter or plant pots, which hinder escape routes and/or the operation of the hinged privacy screen on the balconies, is not permissible.

Also refer to Section 3.1.4.8 Guidance for external elements.

Page 147 6 Vertical or lateral connections through legal demise lines and through structure between adjacent residential units

B L A C K K K K K C C C C A A A A B B B B L L L L In the case of the floor slabs, the screed, build-up must remain 7 Changes, alteration and intervention to structural and load bearing intact. elements of the residential units In cases of essential repairs, refer the matter to freeholders’ management.

Where changes have already been made to the original design, 8 Changes to the configuration or location of internal staircases reversion to the original design will be favoured.

9 Vertical or horizontal extensions outside of the original line of the walls, Also refer to Section 3.1.4.8 Guidance for external elements. windows, doors, roofs and screens

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 56 Draft – March 2012

3.3 GUIDANCE FOR FLAT INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES AND BALCONIES

Examples Guidance Notes

Examples include installation of conservatories, gazebos, wall 10 Items, fixed permanently or otherwise, which will affect the character and mounted parasols, awnings, trellises, external blinds, satellite public appearance of the buildings dishes, aerials, air-conditioning pods and any other service plant on the balconies and public and semi-private walkways and roof Also refer to Section 3.1.4.8 Guidance for external elements terraces.

Page 148

B L A C K K K K K C C C C A A A A B B B B L L L L

Volume II, page GUIDANCE FOR INTERIORS AND PRIVATE TERRACES 57 Draft – March 2012

4.1 BEST PRAC TICE FOR ROOFS AND TERRACES

4.1.1 General notes

4.1.1.1 This best practice guide is designed to be used when preparations are made for restoration, maintenance, 4.1.1.6 It is also important to recognise that roofs and terraces are seen replacement and upgrade of the roofs and terraces to the in close contact with elevational elements and to ensure that the residential blocks of the Barbican Estate. materials and details at these junctions and proximities are also surveyed and taken into account in the preparation of any 4.1.1.2 The description of the Estate’s special interest has noted the proposals whether repair, replacement or upgrade. importance of the roof and terrace profiles and sculptural character, their visibility from many vantage points around the 4.1.1.7 The following checklist should therefore be used as a guide to Estate and their strong material identity. Their characterisation ensure that future interventions are only implemented after full as ‘the fifth façade’ by the original architects is indicative of the understanding of the larger framework of requirements. architectural significance and sensitivity attached to these elements and underscores the care and understanding that is 4.1.1.8 It will be appreciated that due to the size of the Estate the needed in undertaking any works of maintenance, upgrade or prescriptions included in this guide are generic in nature and alteration. should be used only as pointers and examples. Any actual schemes should be developed within the context of each

Page 149 4.1.1.3 The adoption of best practice is equally applicable in specific situation and take full account of any local architectural circumstances of major works contracts as in minor or ‘routine’ significance. repairs, the cumulative effect of which may have a considerable impact on the architectural character of the Estate, whether or 4.1.1.9 In all cases, diagnostic survey work, method statements and not these are subject to Listed Building Consent (LBC). photographic records should be prepared for approval in advance of implementation. 4.1.1.4 There have been a number of problems with the original detail design of the roofs. It is important, however, that in dealing with these failures, repair or replacement works do not detract from 4.1.1.10 The Guidelines review carried out in 2011 has indicated that the architectural composition of the roofs. Changes to original more formal procedures would be beneficial in ensuring detailing vary from the wholesale redesign of the roofscape of a that an understanding of the listed status and significance complete block (e.g. Brandon Mews) to piecemeal repairs, and of the Barbican is transmitted to those carrying out works to the redesign of original waterproofing details and water (however seemingly minor) on the estate. The cumulative dispersal strategy for terraces (e.g. Willoughby, Andrewes, effect of small interventions progressively erodes its Gilbert and Speed Houses). character and special interest, even where individual items may seem too insignificant to have a detrimental impact in 4.1.1.5 It is vital that future works are undertaken within an overall themselves. It is recommended therefore that reference to design framework that preserves the visual consistency of the these guidelines by means of a summary advice note is Estate as a whole and that any proposed work to roofs and included in all contract Purchase Orders with a requirement terraces - whether restoration, replacement or local repair - take for inspection, confirmation of compliance with their into consideration the vocabulary of details and finishes across recommendations, and recording of works executed before the Estate. final payment is sanctioned on completion.

BEST PRACTICE-ROOFS & TERRACES 58 Draft – March 2012

4.1 BEST PRAC TICE FOR ROOFS AND TERRACES

Elements considered

4.1.1.10 The guidance that follows is considered to be applicable to all the elements listed. Proposals for repairs, replacement and upgrade in connection with any of these elements should follow the principles and procedures set out in this section of the document.

Note: This list is not exhaustive. A list should be established for each roof and terrace to ensure it is comprehensive.

Finishes & decking Movement joints Reflective paint Movement joint covers Build up Fall arrest systems Insulation type Guardings

Page 150 Fall arrest systems Guardings Edge trims Access ladders Valleys Lightning protection Ridges Electrical services Gullies Light fittings Gutters Roof lights Rainwater Goods Access hatches & doors Vents & extract grilles Aerials and dishes Glazed screens on escape routes

BEST PRACTICE-ROOFS & TERRACES 59 Draft – March 2012

BEST PRACTICE FOR ROOFS AND TERRACES

ITEM PROCEDURE COMMENTARY

4.1.2 Identify active or potential problems (list not exhaustive)

Water ingress - establish if leak is occurring • Through movement joints or day joints • Through broken gutters or down pipes Manifestation of leak internally may not relate • As a result of structural movement or cracking directly to location of defect in building fabric. • At services penetration points Investigation of possible tracking through • Via roof membrane laps or fissures construction zone may be required. • As a result of water bridging flashings, bypassing gullies, etc. • Following accidental damage, fire etc. • Defective sealants

Page 151 Design and workmanship faults Correct identification and diagnosis of faults • Insufficient provision for movement should always precede any prescription of • Inadequate falls remedy. If uncertain of cause of defect, carry out • Defective covering detail(s) tests to eliminate alternatives. • Divorced flashings

Drains Blockage Before any intervention in building fabric, • Obstruction within pipework ascertain whether failure results from defective

• Occlusion of outlet through previous recladding works details or gaps in management/maintenance • Inadequate cleaning regime.

Wear and Tear • Degraded roofing membrane • Damaged substrate Record documentation and survey information • Defective upstands, trims or accessories (including sealants) should be checked to establish service life of • Damaged rainwater goods existing material specifications. • Damaged paving slabs or spacers • Delays in essential maintenance work

BEST PRACTICE-ROOFS & TERRACES 60 Draft – March 2012

BEST PRACTICE FOR ROOFS AND TERRACES

Cold Bridging It may be necessary to check if interstitial • Unsuitable insulation specification condensation is occurring unseen within the • Deterioration of insulation over time construction zone. • Inadequate fixings/ thermal break details

4.1.3 Identify works boundaries

The scope of works may need to be extended to • Define area of works to logical and natural joints and levels. satisfy architectural or visual demands of the • Avoid piecemeal repairs where new and existing works are contiguous. • context and avoid awkward jointing or Check whether extent of eventual work is such as to trigger requirement for LBC conspicuous abutment with adjacent work.

4.1.4 Investigate authenticity of details to receive work

Page 152 • Are details original or are they later generation repairs? Check whether the need to source new detail or • Should/can the detail be repaired? material will trigger requirement for LBC. • Should/can the detail or material / component be replaced like-for-like?

4.1.5 Establish and justify the required levels of repair and replacement

Proposals should be prepared as structured • Justify the need for localised or wholesale replacement of components documents, including condition survey findings, and finishes photographic records, fault diagnosis, test details • Justify the need to employ alternative roofing systems. and conclusions, and be supported by ‘as Architectural criteria must be included together with economic considerations in original’, ‘as existing’ and ‘as proposed’ drawings. choosing a new system.

BEST PRACTICE-ROOFS & TERRACES 61 Draft – March 2012

BEST PRACTICE FOR ROOFS AND TERRACES

4.1.6 When proposing new details

Consider suitability of new details with regard to future maintenance and levels of traffic and New details and design must take the following into consideration: usage.

• Original architectural character and technical design intentions Proposals must be submitted in sufficient detail to be assessed for any potential impact on the • Affect on adjoining material and finishes architectural character or special interest of the buildings and the possible requirement for LBC. • Compatibility with visual and technical aspects of the original and existing fabric Works drawings and specifications should avoid • Adequacy of the proposed details in terms of the volume of rainwater to be contractor design clauses that could result in loss dispersed of detail control and impact adversely on

Page 153 architectural character or special interest. • Ensure continuity in joints between ‘new to original’ and ‘new to non-original’ Ensure that a record is prepared of all works • Workability and suitability of new details with regard to general maintenance and undertaken noting dates, locations, drawings and accepted levels of traffic and usage specifications together with relevant product literature and warranties being kept on file for future reference.

4.1.7 Site supervision and quality control

BEST PRACTICE-ROOFS & TERRACES 62 Draft – March 2012

BEST PRACTICE FOR ROOFS AND TERRACES

• Ensure installation of proposed material and details conforms to specified design Instruct sample work, materials or components to for finishes, colour, texture, heights and sizes be provided for consideration and approval before

relevant and related trade operations are begun. • Ensure falls within the waterproofing, location of drain heads, and leaf and gravel Significant items of ‘like-for-like’ matching such as guards are in accordance with the design specification paving slabs or visible finishes must always be

offered as samples before works proceed. • Ensure that all visible trims and accessories are procured from the same

manufacturer with matching colours, patterns and finish The design of any temporary works should be

reversible and take account of the design of • Ensure that grates, decking and paving slabs are set out correctly and logically eventual permanent works. maintaining paving formats and avoid unsightly cuts in modular slabs etc.

Page 154

BEST PRACTICE-ROOFS & TERRACES 63 Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

4.2.1.1 General notes

4.2.1.1 This best practice guide is intended to be used when 4.2.1.6 The following checklist should therefore be used as a guide to preparations are made for restoration, maintenance and ensure that future works are only implemented after full redecoration, including any specification upgrade, and also for understanding of the larger framework of requirements. works in connection with the self-finished exterior elements of the residential blocks at the Barbican Estate. 4.2.1.7 It should, however, be noted that the details included in this guide are generic in nature and should be used only as pointers 4.2.1.2 The description of the Estate’s special interest has noted the and examples. Any actual schemes should be developed within importance both of decorated and self-finished elements of the the context of each specific situation and take full account of any exterior fabric in establishing the architectural vocabulary of the local architectural significance. Estate. The sensitivity attached to these elements (facades and soffits) underscores the care and understanding that is needed 4.2.1.8 Signage in undertaking any works of maintenance, upgrade, alteration or It is pertinent to include a note on signage here and emphasise cleaning. the importance of maintaining a coherent and systematic approach to this aspect of the exterior identity of the Estate. 4.2.1.3 Any proposed redecoration, repair or cleaning of any of the Clear guidance is given elsewhere in this document in relation to

Page 155 external elements must take into consideration the vocabulary of works which may be undertaken as part of routine maintenance details and finishes across the residential blocks. The adoption and repair, and works that will be subject to LBC procedure. of best practice is equally applicable in circumstances of major Reference should be made to Sections 3.1.2.8 and 3.1.4.13 works contracts, whether or not these are subject to Listed before any works are initiated. Building Consent (LBC) as in minor or ‘routine’ repairs the cumulative effect of which may have a considerable impact on the architectural character of the Estate.

4.2.1.4 There have been a number of changes to original coatings and finishes since completion. These vary from wholesale redecorations to piecemeal repainting of localised areas. The listed status of the Estate means that particular care must now be given to the control and coordination of such works.

4.2.1.5 The architectural character of Barbican residential blocks derives to a significant degree from the applied and self-finish colours, tones and textures as part of the overall composition and the manner in which two, three or more elements with a variety of finishes come together. It is therefore imperative that choices of material specification and colour and texture are coordinated when proposals are drawn up for renewal or cyclical maintenance works.

Volume II, page 64 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

Decorative and protective coatings and self-finish elements considered

4.2.1.9 Any redecoration work should follow a systematic procedure of 4.2.1.10 Approved Palette of colours for redecoration works to originally investigation of existing coatings, establishment of authenticity, painted elements. diagnosis of any failure, and detailed specification for new works – always having regard to the special interest inherent in the A sample board of the range of colours selected for the listed building fabric. This guidance is intended to lay out a ‘Approved Palette for external redecoration and internal series of typical procedures. common areas’ will be available for reference at the Barbican Estate Office. The list is not exhaustive. A specific project plan will need to be compiled for every works project. The consistent adoption of colours from this range is an important part of maintaining the coherent identity of the Type of application Estate. Please refer to Approved Palette before specifying and implementing any such works • Coating to timber elements

Page 156 • Coating to ferrous metal elements

• Coating to non-ferrous metal elements

• Sealants in soft joints

• Self-finish concrete elements

• Coated concrete elements

• Brickwork walling

Volume II, page 65 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

ITEM PROCEDURE COMMENTARY

4.2.2 Identify active or potential problems

Wear & Tear • Life expectancy of coating exceeded • Erosion or mechanical damage Ensure that a record is filed noting all • Chemical damage investigations with date, photographic evidence, locations, and findings. • Preparation or application inadequacies • Unsuitability of coating specification

Page 157 Environmental Factors • Water or frost damage In the case of pattern staining of the main concrete • Fire damage façade elements, any large scale cleaning work is • Rapid or persistent temperature fluctuations likely to have such an impact on the current

architectural character of the buildings as to • UV light damage require consideration for LBC – see also below • Pollution or graffiti damage 4.2.8. • Pattern staining

4.2.3 Identify works boundaries

Define area of works to logical and natural joints. For example: Defining of boundaries is important to ensure that 1. Complete window/door frames; avoid piecemeal treatment unless damage is very proposed new treatments do not arbitrarily abut localised. those existing and adjacent and thus create visual or technical problems. 2. Complete decorated surfaces between returns or downstand beams for walls, ceilings, exposed soffits, frames, railings etc. Volume II, page 66 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

3. Elements with architectural importance such as wall treatments, railings, escape It is generally unsatisfactory to consider individual doors, gallery soffits, etc. The boundary of works should be regarded as the horizontal layers of elevation in isolation. whole façade element in question. When dealing with facing brick or blockwork logical vertical and horizontal joints must be considered. Adopt industry standard good practice in relation to protection and masking of adjacent areas before Any re-pointing and repair work should cover whole panels. Avoid localised works. repairs, unless these can be fully blended with adjacent areas.

4. Self-finished concrete elements; nearest vertical and horizontal joints or returns will probably define the boundaries.

4.2.4 Establish origins and specification of coating or finish

Page 158 1. Is it original, or Prepare illustrated survey including condition 2. later generation of original, or analysis and conclusions as well as results of any tests or paint scrapes carried out. 3. later alternative solution intended to overcome an earlier failure?

4.2.5 Investigate existing coating or finish

1. Is the existing coating or finish visually appropriate?

2. Does its specification fulfil current standards, health and safety and environmental criteria? Is it practicable to use the same specification for If existing coating is not original, or a good match recoating/refinishing? to original, it may be appropriate to amend to a

more authentic appearance. This needs careful 3. Should specification and coatings/finishes system be replaced? consideration and may require LBC.

Volume II, page 67 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

Read in conjunction with Sections 3.1 External 4.2.6 Develop details of the proposed redecoration elements & 3.2 and common parts

1 Establish the need for redecoration

2 Establish original design intentions and required contextual character

3 Check the suitability of the original specification in terms of fitness for purpose and environmental safety

4 Investigate the availability of the original specification if still valid

5 If new products will need to be specified they should conform with the original Matching colour(s) should always be validated design intentions and required contextual character through trial samples, which should be retained for quality control during works and for later reference.

Page 159 6 Ensure the compatibility of the proposed specification with the material of the element or component to be redecorated Refer also to Approved Palette of colours

7 Ensure that the proposed specification is compatible with accessories, soft Where a composite panel is self-finished or self- jointing and any other materials used in, or adjacent to, the works coloured ‘like-for-like’ repairs will normally apply.

8 Establish the serviceability and soundness of substrate prior to application of any Ensure a record of all works is produced noting new primers and subsequent coatings and specify requisite preparation date, investigations, locations, specifications measures together with relevant product literature and maintenance requirements, and that any 9 Protect adjacent accessories, glazing and all other exposed architectural warranties are kept on file for future reference . elements of the components adjacent to the work areas

10 Use all products in strict compliance with manufacturers’ instructions and Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) guidelines

Volume II, page 68 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

4.2.7 Sealants in soft joints

Criteria for specification for re-application of soft joints to external junctions and movement joints:

1. Establish the need for re-application

2. Establish the nature of any failure

3. Establish original design intentions and required contextual character

4. Establish the suitability of the original specification in terms of fitness for purpose

Page 160 and environmental safety Matching colour(s) should always be validated 5. Establish the availability of the original specification if still valid through trial samples, which should be retained for quality control during works and for future 6. If new products will need to be specified they should conform with the original reference Ensure that a record of all works design intentions and required contextual character undertaken – noting date, investigations, locations, specifications together with relevant product 7. Ensure the compatibility of the proposed specification with the material of the literature and warranties – and is kept on file for component to be redecorated future reference.

8. Ensure that the proposed new specification is compatible with accessories, soft jointing and other materials used in, or adjacent to, the construction of the element

9. Establish the serviceability and soundness of substrate prior to application of any fillers and final jointing

10. Protect accessories, glazing and all other exposed architectural elements adjacent to the work areas

11. Use all products in strict compliance with manufacturers’ instructions and COSHH (Control of Substances Hazardous to Health) guidelines

Volume II, page 69 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

4.2.8 Concrete elements - self-finished elements

The management regime for self-finish concrete must be informed by specialist concrete repair and maintenance expertise.

The testing and repair of concrete (coated or The considerable architectural importance and special interest of the various self-finish uncoated) is not normally within the competence of concrete elements has been discussed in Section 2 of this document. Section 3 of the general building contractors and must be undertaken by an appropriately qualified and accredited contractor. document details their types and locations. In the case of ‘clear coatings’ it is recommended It is vital that these surfaces are maintained in good condition. that the protocols advised for coated concrete are

Page 161 followed, since certain clear concrete coating This section lists assessment criteria and procedures for action in connection with self- products even though they do not involve finished concrete elements. pigmentation, can alter the surface appearance of the concrete as a result of their reflective characteristics.

Volume II, page 70 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

Types of damage

This may take a variety of forms including but not limited to; • cosmetic discolouration (e.g. weathering, pollution, graffiti, etc.)

Except where the type of damage is very minor or • mechanical damage resulting from an incident (e.g. impact damage, vandalism, of a cosmetic nature only and clearly not damage or scar resulting from removal of fixings, etc.) attributable to any other factors, the process of

diagnosing problems of disrepair in the concrete • fault in the concrete itself (e.g. carbonation and spalling, chlorides or salt attack, fabric should always be undertaken by a specialist frost damage, cracking, etc.) in the field.

• structural movement in building resulting in damage to concrete

Page 162 Except in cases of minor and localised damage where the appropriate response may be limited to Cosmetic damage careful cleaning with an approved technique, the

remedial strategy must be informed by specialist It is currently proposed that no action is taken to clean the self-finish concrete surfaces to knowledge of concrete repair. Small sample test(s) I remove the areas of large-scale pattern staining due to ageing and weathering. If and of any cleaning process must always precede main when such a scheme is considered the impact on the current architectural character of works. The results of cleaning must re-establish the residential buildings is likely to be considerable and would accordingly need to be the identical long-term matching of repaired, to subject of a full and formally approved scheme of works. adjacent concrete, avoiding ghosting and ensuring that no potentially harmful residues are left.

Volume II, page 71 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

Investigate cause. Establish extent of damage and need for repair. Ensure no unstable fragments remain while repair strategy is formulated. Prepare remedial works specification with appropriate specialist advice. In-fill repairs, if required, must II Mechanical damage achieve chemical, material and visual compatibility with local context. If there is any exposed reinforcement, consult specialist structural engineer to establish necessary repair procedure. Record all works undertaken.

Page 163 The testing and diagnosis of defects within concrete should always be undertaken by an appropriately qualified specialist in concrete repair. Design of remedial strategies must take due Fault(s) within the concrete account of both technical and aesthetic requirements. Consideration should be given to the These may manifest in a variety of ways and may be due to a range of factors. Inherent full range of proven repair techniques available. (latent) damage may be more extensive than indicated by surface manifestation and may The repair strategy should be tailored to the III require invasive testing procedures. A defect within the concrete fabric may also be particular situation. Samples of each stage of the symptomatic of damage resulting from a related construction failure (e.g. water remedial process should be approved before penetration into the building fabric) or structural movement – see below. proceeding. Conspicuous concrete repairs are not acceptable. Any necessary related remedial works to the building construction should be undertaken in conjunction with the concrete repair work. A full record of all works should be compiled and filed with the Department of the Built Environment.

Damage resulting from structural movement Such damage should always be investigated by an IV This may manifest in cracking, undue enlargement of movement joints, seepage through appropriately qualified structural engineer. A file construction fabric, delamination, etc. Consequential damage in related areas of should be established to record all testing and construction may also require coordinated remedial works. diagnostic works and the remedial actions taken.

Volume II, page 72 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

The Department of the Built Environment should be consulted if tell-tale markers are to remain following the works. Remedial strategies should take due account of both technical and architectural requirements. Structural repairs that leave conspicuous architectural inconsistencies are not acceptable.

4.2.9 Concrete elements - coated concrete

The considerable architectural importance of coated concrete elements has been The guidance noted for self-finished concrete is discussed within Section 2 of this document, while Section 3 of the document details generally applicable to all areas of coated types and locations. It is vital that these surfaces are maintained in good, stabilized and concrete. The above noted guidance should,

Page 164 managed condition. The maintenance regime for coated concrete (including clear accordingly, always be consulted when dealing coatings) must be informed by specialist concrete repair and maintenance expertise. with damage to coated concrete.

Any proposed works other than like-for-like redecoration to the original colour, surface Where the remedial works require the re- finish character and with the technically appropriate coating specification will require a application of coatings as the final process to LBC. complete the concrete repair procedure, it is important that the coating specification is Coating failure may result from a variety of causes either inherent in the coating itself or determined in full understanding of the the circumstances of its application, or as a symptom of defects within the substrate (see performance characteristics and requirements of

above for self-finish concrete). The cause(s) of damage should be carefully diagnosed the concrete substrate. Particular care should be before setting specifications for any new work. Overcoating of existing coatings should taken not to apply incompatible coatings, or non- only occur following positive validation of the integrity and viability of the latter as vapour permeable coatings that may result in substrates. moisture retention within the concrete fabric. Anti- carbonation coatings should generally be specified Any remedial work should take into consideration the texture and quality of the repaired as an integral part of the concrete remedial works surfaces. Redecoration should not be carried out in isolated patches. As in the case of all products specification. other items listed in this best practice guide, redecorations should be carried out within visually coherent and definable areas with logical boundaries and limits. In case of larger All other guidance noted above in relation to the and significant façade areas or soffits the whole of that element of the block may need to use of materials in accordance with manufacturer’s be considered. instructions, compilation of full job records with product literature details is equally applicable for coated concrete.

Volume II, page 73 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

4.2.10 Brickwork walling

The considerable architectural importance of facing brickwork in the Barbican residential buildings has been discussed within Section 2 of this document, while Section 3 of the document details types and location of these elements. It is important that these surfaces Manifestation of defects in brickwork may be are maintained in good, stabilized and managed condition. The maintenance regime for symptomatic of related damage within the brickwork must be informed by specialist expertise in repair and maintenance. This construction. This will need to be incorporated into section lists out criteria for assessing the need for any action with regard to the an appropriate remedial works strategy. appearance and soundness of brickwork elements.

Investigate the cause, assess impact on integrity, Discolouration and staining due to weathering, seepage through walkways and roofs, place markers to establish if the I pointing failure, etc. Page 165 discolouration/scarring is progressive in terms of

time and area.

Investigate the location to check for water ingress. Also check for: a) Chemical attack (pollution) II Deformity due to corrosion and failure of brick ties b) Frost attack c) Impact damage d) Inherent fault in construction

Investigate the cause of salt deposits. Check for III Discolouration and/or disfigurement due to salt attack prolonged water penetration through building construction.

Investigate cause. Establish the extent of the IV Disfigurement due to impact, vandalism or retro fixed services, fittings etc. damage.

Volume II, page 74 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

Investigate cause, assess impact on integrity, place tell-tale markers to establish if cracking is V Cracking progressive. A structural engineer should be consulted if there is any indication of structural defect.

Investigate cause and check for: a) Chemical or frost attack b) Impact damage VI Mortar failure c) Fault in pointing work d) Failure due to structural movement (see above)

Page 166 Investigate the location for: a) Chemical or frost attack b) Impact damage VII Damp Proof Course (DPC), cavity tray and weephole failure c) Dirt blockage d) Failure due to structural movement (see above)

Generic course of action to tackle the problems listed above

Generally all brickwork remedial works must be 1. It is generally proposed that no action is taken to clean brickwork or mortar pointing architecturally controlled in addition to the technical where these are affected with uniform discolouration due to ageing process and and structural requirements of a consultant weathering. engineer. Repair work that is not closely matched

in to adjacent areas is not acceptable. 2. For other factors, establish the cause and prepare diagnostic report and remedial

works specifications, consulting a brick repair specialist as required. Any remedial Ensure that a record of all works undertaken - work should take into consideration the brick type texture and its bond and the tonal noting date, investigations, locations, specifications quality and colour and texture of mature mortar pointing, reusing original bricks together with relevant product literature – and are wherever possible to produce fully blended finished repairs. kept on file for future reference. Volume II, page 75 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

4.2 BEST PRACTICE FOR REDECORATION AND SELF -FINISH EXTERIOR ELEMENTS/COMMON PARTS

Page 167

Volume II, page 76 BEST PRACTICE-External Finishes Draft – March 2012

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 168 4.3 BEST PRACTICE FOR SERVICES AND WIRING

4.3.1 General notes

4.3.1.1 This best practice guide is intended to be used when preparations 4.3.1.5 There have been a number of changes to original installations are made for restoration, maintenance and renewal of services since completion. These vary from wholesale rewiring to within the curtilage of the residential blocks at the Barbican changes of plant specifications to piecemeal repairs at localized Estate. and isolated areas. The cumulative impact of uncoordinated additional services installations can have a highly detrimental 4.3.1.2 Any proposed renewal, repair or upgrade of services must take impact on the orderly architectural character of the Estate, into consideration the architectural integrity and overall aesthetic especially when surface mounted on publicly visible areas. character of the residential blocks both individually and as an ensemble. 4.3.1.6 The architectural control of services was a vital aspect of the original design of the Barbican residential Estate, and this 4.3.1.3 It is therefore vital that the works are carried out with care and discipline needs to be understood and perpetuated in managing through detailed examination to ensure that original service any future changes. zones, containments (ducts/ trunking/conduits) and routes are used. When, and only when, such investigations indicate 4.3.1.7 Cyclical maintenance, repairs or upgrade works should be

Page 169 inadequacies within the existing services provisions should carried out with due care and attention to eliminate the potential consideration be given to any new design. Extreme care should of any adverse impact on the architectural character and be exercised and detailed consideration must be given to ensure consistency of the Estate. that the visual impact of the new proposals on the architecture is kept to an absolute minimum. 4.3.1.8 In general, new surface mounted services should be avoided, and any opportunity should be taken to remove non-original 4.3.1.4 This will require accurate survey of the existing provisions and redundant services installations, ad-hoc additions and fixings. checks for serviceability.

77 BEST PRACTICE-Services Draft – March 2012

4.3 BEST PRACTICE FOR SERVICES AND WIRING

4.3.1 General notes : cont’d

4.3.1.9 The services fall into two broad but significant categories: 4.3.1.11 Proposals must be developed in sufficient detail to be assessed for any potential impact on the architectural 1. Visible services; including plant distribution systems and fittings, character of the building prior to submission for LBC on the external elevations and the roofscape and terraces, and on procedures. the inside of the communal internal areas. Being manifested visibly any such services, or new additions, are likely to affect 4.3.1.12 Ensure that a record of all works undertaken – noting date, architectural character and heritage significance and accordingly investigations, locations and specifications together with be subject to listed building consent. relevant product literature – and is kept on file by the DeptDepartment of the Built Environment for future reference. 2. Non-visible services; i.e. services which are fitted within containments, hidden from view, and with no manifestations on the public areas or on the internal and external elevations.

Page 170 4.3.1.10 Any changes or proposals for new elements within category one would need to be carefully scrutinised in accordance with the criteria listed above. Proposals for work to non-visible services (new work or upgrade) would need to be assessed to ensure that any connected venting, routing or builder’s work would not impact on the architectural character of the buildings.

78 BEST PRACTICE-Services Draft – March 2012

4.4 BEST PRACTICE - THE GARCHEY SYSTEM

4.4.1 History and brief description of the system installed within the Barbican residential blocks . 4.4.1.4 It is, however, important that the system is comprehensively 4.4.1.1 The waste disposal strategy for the Barbican Estate is designed assessed to ascertain its viability and sustainability both in around the Garchey system. This system, designed in 1927, environmental and technical terms. The Report of the Managing was an innovative method of waste disposal for use in mass Director of the Barbican Estate [to the Barbican Residential housing and commercial applications. The system solved the Committee - 15 January 1998] recommended that the system be problem of refuse collection on large estates where typically a retained and serviced accordingly and called for a further dry chute method was relied upon. The dry chute method of assessment after a 5-year period. A further assessment is due in waste disposal was associated with unhygienic and foul smelling 2011/ 2012 and will require consideration in the light of these hoppers with equally undesirable communal hopper rooms and guidelines refuse collection areas. The Garchey system in contrast relied on a sealed system thus reducing the smell and vermin 4.4.1.5 The report noted that the system had been unpopular with some problems, and its ability to transport waste material further away of the residents but estimated that the majority of the from the source helped with separating the refuse collection households still retained the system (1600 households -1998). points from the immediate vicinity of residential blocks. There In October 2011, it was estimated that 1070, or 54%, of the flats were variations within the generic Garchey system and still retained the Garchey waste disposal units (Garchey

Page 171 adaptations were made to suit specific needs of the various Condition Report, October 2011). building types. 4.4.1.6 There are various reasons why the system is considered 4.4.1.2 The system installed for the Barbican residential blocks relies on unpopular with some households. One of the key reasons is that the refuse being directly flushed from kitchen sinks through to the Garchey evacuation tank housed below the kitchen sink refuse stations from where it is vacuum pumped to retention effectively takes up a whole kitchen cabinet thereby reducing the vessels ready for collection and disposal off site via specialist storage capacity of the compact kitchens. Other reasons cited containers. The system relies on a totally enclosed and water are; difficulty of operation, instances of blockage of the system sealed system of pipes allowing for a minimum of manual and back flowing - especially in the tower blocks, and lack of intervention. It provides a clean and efficient method of information and guidelines for correct use of the system disposing of kitchen waste as well as tins and bottles of a certain discouraging new residents from using it. Changes in lifestyle size. The infrastructure pipework also serves for the disposal of and food preparation together with new food packaging waste water and surface run-off. techniques and separation of refuse types for recycling purposes have also contributed to perceived difficulties in using 4.4.1.3 In 2005 when the Guidelines were first adopted, it was reported the Garchey. that the system was in good working order and reportedly had many more serviceable years before a complete service and 4.4.1.7 In the last five years there has been a significant diminution of system overhaul is programmed. The standard of hygiene in waste disposal using this system. Whereas in 2006, 30.70 terms of vermin control has reportedly been significantly higher tonnes of Garchey waste was removed; in the latest 12 months, than other estates of comparable size that rely on conventional to the end of September 2011, this has fallen to 13.49 tonnes, a open chute systems of refuse disposal. fall of 56% from the 2006 figure(Garchey Weights Calender Year, Barbican Estate Office, October 2011).

BEST PRACTICE – The Garchey system 79 Draft – March 2012

4.4 BEST PRACTICE - THE GARCHEY SYSTEM

Such works must always be notified to the Estate Office 4.4.1.8 An assessment of the implications of the decommissioning and prior to commencement and upon completion. abandonment of the system would need to consider the impact that this would have on waste management and the • Removal of Garchey terminals does not necessitate the conservation management of the Estate as a whole. removal of the typical original kitchen sink. This sink can The benefits in retaining the current method of waste disposal remain and its waste adapted to suit normal waste may outweigh its decommissioning. It is integral to the design of connection to the main system. The replacement or the residential blocks, eliminating the need for chutes and retention of the kitchen sink is the resident’s prerogative. hoppers, disposal holds, and labour intensive door step collections. The undesirability of introducing refuse holds or bin enclosures within the hard landscaped communal walkways and Alterations, remedial works or removal of whole or parts of the Garchey external spaces is self-evident and is the subject of restrictive disposal system outside of the dwellings guidance elsewhere in this document (Section 3.1 – especially 3.1.5.4). • Any works with an external manifestation in the external or internal areas will need to be checked against 4.4.2 Best practice guidelines. potential impact on the architectural character and special interest of the residential blocks. Guidance

Page 172 4.4. 2.1 Pending the current review of the system by the Garchey should be sought in each and every case from the Working Party and its anticipated findings, it is recommended Planning Authorities prior to implementation of any that the system is maintained in a good working order for the works. time being. All aspects of maintenance, renewal or alterations would however need to be assessed within a listed building See Sections 3.1 and 3.2 of the Guidelines. context. No strategic decisions on the future of the system should be taken without full consideration of the architectural • Any alteration, remedial works or removal of whole or consequences and impact on the character of the Estate that part of the Garchey waste disposal system should only would result from its abandonment. be carried out by appropriately qualified and accredited professional contractors with full knowledge of the 4.4.2.2 The following check list is intended for guidance before carrying system. out any works to the system whether at the point of use within residential units or to the infrastructure and disposal apparatus 4.4.2.3 Should it become advisable to decommission the Garchey managed by the landlord. system, the following should be carefully considered: • The possible retention of the Garchey Waste Disposal Removal of Garchey waste disposal bowls from the dwellings: Units in the Heritage flats, • The retention and storage (for a possible museum) of at • Removal of Garchey terminals from the kitchens should least three selected Garchey Waste Disposal Units, only be undertaken by qualified plumbers who have • The disconnection and isolation but retention in good knowledge of the system and who carry out the works viewing order of any compressors, vacuum pumps, according to approved Barbican Estate Office protocols. other minor pumps, motor sets, chemical dosing plants, air receivers, scrubber units and control panels; as well

BEST PRACTICE – The Garchey system 80 Draft – March 2012

4.4 BEST PRACTICE - THE GARCHEY SYSTEM

as any distinctive hoses, brackets and appurtenances in the Garchey truck bays, and • The retention of at least one set of paper documentation for the system (for a possible museum).

Page 173

BEST PRACTICE – The Garchey system 81 Draft – March 2012

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 174 5.0 CONSERVATION STRATEGY

5.0 Conservation Strategy • Compilation of systematic documentation of the history and design of the Estate 5.0.1 The Listed Building Management Guidelines for the Barbican residential blocks provide a framework for works to be The response to consultation has indicated strong support for undertaken without detriment to the architectural character and these initiatives. special interest of the buildings. Their consistent implementation helps to ensure that any changes to the building fabric can be 5.1 Heritage flats managed in a positive way. 5.1.1 Although listed building designation can establish procedures to 5.0.2 The guidance detailed in Section 3 forms only one part of a ensure that proposed changes to significant elements can be larger conservation strategy for the residential blocks. Equally positively managed, it is also recognised that certain pressures important is the adoption of the other recommendations of this for change relating to domestic lifestyle are unavoidable. document to inform the day-to-day management and maintenance ‘culture’ of the Estate. To achieve this, systematic 5.1.2 For example, upgrading of kitchens and bathrooms, adaptation and coordinated programmes for cyclical repairs and of room layouts, and use of new materials and appliances are all maintenance, along with periodic reviews and the a reflection of changing trends and requirements. implementation of the best practice guidelines is required.

Page 175 5.1.3 The examination of the architectural character of the Barbican 5.0.3 In conjunction with these above recommendations and as part of (Section 2) has identified the special interest inherent in the a more holistic conservation strategy, there are several other detailed domestic design of the apartment interiors. The measures which could further protect, as well as make more pressures for change and cumulative processes of individual accessible, the architectural character and special interest of the modification described above could eventually lead to the loss of Barbican Estate. original detail such that no fully intact authentic interior remained. 5.0.4 These strategies include: 5.1.4 To avoid this possibility the selection and ongoing management • the designation of certain flats within the residential of a small number of heritage flats across the Estate would help blocks safeguard an accurate historical record of the key characteristics, spatial qualities and design details of the • (referred to as heritage flats ) to retain their original domestic interiors as conceived by the original architects. authentic condition 5.1.5 Such authentically conserved flats could potentially be used for • the establishment of a Barbican ‘salvage store’ for the education and public information purposes through managed recycling of original fixtures and fittings within the Estate access; for example during the annual London Open House Weekend when many, otherwise inaccessible, significant • The establishment of a Visitor/ Information Centre on buildings are opened to the public. the Estate

82 CONSERVATION STRATEGY Draft – March 2012

5.0 CONSERVATION STRATEGY

5.2 Strategy for heritage flat designation 5.2.4 The criteria for the selection of specific dwellings include the 5.2.1 Implementing the ‘Heritage Flat’ initiative involves the following considerations: identification of heritage flats across the Estate to form a representative cross-section of the key flat types - ranging in - Architectural concept or degree of design/spatial interest of flat scale from studio flats, to larger maisonettes, to penthouses and type (i.e. incorporation of particular architectural features or five storey dwellings - configured in a variety of different building planning ideas), types - towers, terrace blocks and Mews houses. - Degree of intactness of original features and fittings (with 5.2.2 Flats in their original condition which have remained consideration of reversibility of any changes already predominantly unaltered and those which have undergone only implemented), minor, reversible changes since they were originally completed, would be preferred candidates for designation. These - Degree of repetition of the flat type throughout the Estate (i.e. is considerations together with the identification of representative it representative of a typical application?), ‘generic flat types’ inform the criteria for selection. - Distribution of designated flats throughout the Estate and 5.2.3 A desktop study of flat type plans, field visits across the Estate specific location both vertically and horizontally within the blocks

Page 176 and discussion with one of the original Barbican project (i.e. corner, middle of the block, rooftop (incorporating a st architects, has led to an initial identification of the key significant penthouse level), 1 level above podium, sub-podium, north or flat types. south of Beech Street etc.),

Tower block: flat type B (with triangular balconies) - Patterns of arrangement: relation to adjacent flat types or the significance of plan form in generating the elevational language 1 Single aspect flat type which characterises the various blocks/towers at different levels. (typically terrace blocks with north-south orientation) 5.2.5 Using the list of Flat-types identified in 5.2.3, two heritage flats 2 Dual aspect flat type (typically terrace blocks with east-west have been identified and designated since the adoption of the orientation) Guidelines in 2005. These flats remain in the ownership of the City of London Corporation, and are let. Tenants are not Up-and-over flat type (typical of Willoughby House) permitted to undertake any works to the flats, and are required in their lease to allow access for Tours by prior arrangement. 3 Mews house type Information regarding the Heritage Flats may be obtained from the Barbican Estate Office. Further heritage flats will be 4 Sub-podium flat type designated as they become available.

5 Penthouse studio (incorporating a barrel vaulted roof form) 5.3 Salvage of original fabric and fittings

6 Penthouse maisonette 5.3.1 The provision of a ‘salvage store’ on the Estate would facilitate ‘recycling’ of original fabric and fittings, which we understand

83 CONSERVATION STRATEGY Draft – March 2012

5.0 CONSERVATION STRATEGY

occurs in some unofficial capacity already. This initiative would enable Barbican residents who had received any necessary 5.4.3 The Museum of London was initially explored as a possible Listed Building Consent to remove original fabric from their flats location for an information centre. Limited information could be and to donate any unwanted items to a central storage facility displayed, and would only be accessible to those actually for purchase by other residents. The charge for these items visiting the Museum. The final preferred option is a Web-based would be directed towards covering the cost of setting up and information resource. This would be accessible for all, whether managing the salvage store operation. they are visiting the Estate or are looking for information from a remote location. Material from the other aspects of the 5.3.2 It is envisaged that original fabric capable of being salvaged Conservation Strategy would provide the content. Funding has would include items such as: kitchen furniture - including joinery been difficult to access for this project, but efforts continue to be units/cupboard doors/stainless steel worktops; sanitary ware made. and taps; ironmongery; sliding partitions; light fittings from bathrooms/WCs and ceiling roses from other living areas; 5.5 Documentation of original fabric interior doors/frames; cupboard doors from front entry/bedrooms; staircase components; and Garchey parts. All 5.5.1 Another important part of the conservation strategy for the items would require assessment of their suitability for restoration Estate is the compilation of a systematic, representative, and reuse and viable items would then be made available for comprehensive record set of drawings of the residential

Page 177 purchase by other residents who wish to reinstate such items in buildings individually and as a whole. their Barbican flats. 5.5.2 It is also a recommendation of these Guidelines that an accurate 5.3.3 A Salvage Store was set up by Volunteers following the recording of historic fabric identified in selected authentically adoption of the guidelines in 2005. It has been an extremely intact flats be undertaken. successful initiative – wholly thanks to the organisation and dedication of the volunteers involved. This element of the 5.5.3 A measured drawing and photographic survey of original fabric Conservation Strategies is therefore encouraged and should would not only increase owner/occupier understanding of the continue. architectural significance of the Barbican Estate but it would also have benefits for reference, management and maintenance. 5.4 Barbican visitor information centre/exhibition This resource could be coordinated with the visitor information 5.4.1 This proposal envisages a permanent and purpose-built centre. exhibition/display visitor information centre about the Barbican Estate, incorporating historical and illustrative material and 5.5.4 Volunteers have expressed an interest in carrying perhaps installations of a typical unit or kitchen. Such a facility out recording work within flats, however, management of could also serve as an educational resource for the wider the project has not been possible due to limited resources community. being available. When funding allows this aspect of the conservation strategy will proceed. Volunteers have made 5.4.2 It is intended that this facility, if implemented, would be situated in a publicly accessible location to avoid any possible progress in the sorting of Archive material stored on the compromise to the security of the residential blocks. estate, in the form of plans. Further work is required.

84 CONSERVATION STRATEGY Draft – March 2012

5.0 CONSERVATION STRATEGY

5.6 Barbican Heritage

5.6.1 Following the adoption of the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines in 2005, further work was carried out to investigate the feasibility of the different aspects of the Barbican Conservation Strategy.

5.6.2 Residents were consulted on the preferred options, and this project led, in 2008 to the formation of Barbican Heritage, an independent organisation. The aim was that Barbican heritage would carry out aspects of the Conservation Strategy (not including Heritage Flats or the Salvage Store).

5.6.3 Work on the Archiving of Barbican Plans has progressed, however it has been difficult to access funding streams to

Page 178 support the work. The Department of the Built Environment continues to seek avenues for completing the proposed Conservation Strategy.

85 CONSERVATION STRATEGY Draft – March 2012

Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Volume II

6.0 INDEX OF DOCUMENTS

Publication/ Author/Organisation Title or Material Date pp Notes Architect & Builder The Barbican Jul-76 2-19 Elain Harwood The Barbican, City of London Mar-01 6pp typescript Elain Harwood The Barbican and Golden Lane Estates Jul-90 typescript nd The Architect’s Journal [The Guildhall School of Music and Drama] 2 Nov 1977 835-837 th The Architect’s Journal [The Arts Centre] 18 Aug 1982 33-44 th Building Design [The Arts Centre] 19 June 1981 32-33 th Downtown Delights. Barbican Progress Report 28 Jan 1970 196-199 Listed Building Consent Information Barbican and the Elephant Oct-59 416-419 Page 179 th High Density Housing for the Barbican Area of the City of London 7 June 1956 th th [The Architect’s Journal] 8 ,15 March 1956 256 Not seen th Architectural Design 12 April 1956 354 Not seen The Architect’s Journal 8th Sept 1967 109 The Architect's Journal 15th Jan 1953 th Building The Final Stage 16 June 1978 th The Builder Barbican Redevelopment 1959 29 May 1959 949- th The Architect’s Journal Barbican. Detailed Proposals Presented 28 May 1959 795796 st The Builder Barbican Development: A Residential Scheme for the City of London 1 June 1956 623 The Architect’s Journal Barbican Arts Centre 29th May 1968 1237-1244 Information Library Exhibition Leaflet Barbican This was Tomorrow Gallery Guide 14th Feb - 14th April 2002 2002 Corporation of London The Barbican Redevelopment in the City of London undated

87 INDEX OF DOCUMENTS AND SOURCES Draft – march 2012

Publication/ Author/Organisation Title or Material Date pp Notes APA Journal The City of London Walkway Experiment Autumn 1993 433-450 Barbican Estate Office City of London Barbican undated typescript pamphlet City of London Barbican undated 8pp ref. P.R-J The Breathtaking Barbican pamphlet

Barbican Redevelopment - Report to the Court of the Common Council of the City of London on residential development within the Barbican area 20576 prepared on the instructions of the special committee.

Cement & Concrete Association Barbican 1971 35pp Booklet The Corporation of London Planning files “Standard Conditions Relating to Proposed Works and Alterations on the The Corporation of London Barbican Estate”

Page 180 The Corporation of London Tenant's Handbook English Heritage Photocopies of articles Barbican Estate Office Various Corporation of London Photocopies of articles, Corporation of London Microfiche consulted for drawings and planning applications Corporation of London Files containing post-listing enquiries for status of proposed building works National Monuments Record Copies of Listing Citations RIBA Library Index of material www.barbicanliving.co.uk Flat type plans, general background information www.english-heritage.org.uk Listed Building Consent Information John Honer: Executive Architect for the Barbican Arts Centre for Chamberlin Various articles, reports, drawings. Summary briefing. Powell and Bon nd Charles Mynors Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas - 2 Edition 1995

88 INDEX OF DOCUMENTS AND SOURCES Draft – march 2012

Publication/ Author/Organisation Title or Material Date pp Notes

David Heathcote Barbican- Penthouse over the City John Wiley, 2004 232

Page 181

89 INDEX OF DOCUMENTS AND SOURCES Draft – march 2012

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 182 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.1 Approved Palette for External and Internal Redecoration of Common Areas on the Barbican Estate.

Contents

1. Summary 2. Introduction 3. The Importance of Colour on the Barbican Estate 4. The Exterior Colour Palette and Traffic Light system 5.. The Interior Colour Palette and Traffic Light system 6.. FAQs

Page 183 7..1.1 Summary

This document outlines the Barbican Estate Approved Palette for External and Internal Redecoration of Common Areas. It does not relate to the redecoration of individual flats. Sections 3 and 4 outline the separate Palettes for the Exterior and Interior common parts respectively. In both cases, residents can choose to have their block redecorated in the same colour without the need for Listed Building Consent, ie it will come under the Green Category of the Listed Building Management Guidelines. Changes in colour will require different levels of consent depending on the whether the colour has been chosen from the Approved Palette or not. The process of asking residents to choose colours for their block, of making the necessary applications and then carrying out the work, will be undertaken by representatives of the Barbican Estate Office.

7..1.2 Introduction

This document is the Barbican Estate Approved Palette for External and Internal Redecoration of Common Areas. It forms part of the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines Volume II – Residential Buildings. It is part of section 4.2, Volume II.

Volume II page 90 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

In the future, this guidance will be extended to other areas of the Barbican Estate, including Commercial Areas and Landscaping. This will ensure that a consistency of colour is achieved, and that all aspects of the Estate (including railings, seating, fences and gates) are treated equally in this respect.

This document is available to view online, including a sample of the colours. A sample board of the actual colours on the ‘Approved Palette for External and Internal Redecoration of Common Areas’ will be available for reference at the Barbican Estate Office.

The Approved Palette will be subject to the same review procedures as the Barbican Listed Building Management Guidelines. It should be seen as a working document that will be regularly reviewed. It will be possible and appropriate that colours may be added or removed from the Approved Palette, if it should prove necessary.

7.1.3 The Importance of Colour on the Barbican Estate Page 184

Externally

The Management Guidelines state in 4.2.1.5 vol. II. “The architectural character of the residential blocks derives to a significant degree from the applied and self-finish colours, tones and textures as part of the overall composition and the manner in which two, three or more elements with a variety of finishes come together. It is therefore imperative that choices of material specification and colour and texture are co-ordinated when proposals are drawn up for renewal or cyclical maintenance works.” This applies to the exterior of the blocks and to those internal common parts that have an external visual impact.

Any original colour palette created by the architects that may have existed for the Barbican Estate at the time of construction has been lost. Paint scrapes from the Barbican Arts Centre indicate an original colour (in that location), of Olive Brown (see The Exterior Palette, below) but there can be no certainty that this was applied across the entire estate. Since the completion of the Estate, there has been widespread application of varied colours across the residential blocks, which has resulted in the diminution of the coherence of the estate as a whole.

An important aspect of the Barbican Estate is the manner is which Residential blocks adjoin one another. This feature provides the robust structure of the Volume II page 91 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

estate, and so it is vital that these ‘joints’ are dealt with in an appropriate way. The colours selected for the Palette all have a similar muted tone, that are intended to blend with the existing material prominent on the estate, but also to complement one another where the blocks join. In addition to the colour, it is also important that the separation and division from block to block is correct, and the change in colour occurs at the correct place.

The importance of colour to the architectural significance of the estate has led to the classification of proposals to repaint exterior elements of the estate in the “Amber Category” of the Management Guidelines (section 3.1.4 vol. II) – works where advice should be sought to determine whether a Listed Building Application is required. A change of colour clearly affects the special architectural interest of the building and may require formal evaluation to establish its impact.

7..1.4Selection of Colours

Page 185 The selection of the Palette of Colours is based on a variety of factors.

• Whilst colour is important, it was never intended to be a principal feature of the Barbican Estate. A variety of materials are used on the Estate including tile and brick although the main material is bush-hammered concrete. The Brutalist design and materials as specified in the original scheme should remain the predominant element. This balance should be preserved and not threatened by the use of inappropriate colours. The colours selected for the Palette must, therefore, complement the design of the residential blocks and sit comfortably alongside the other materials. • There are many places on the Estate where blocks adjoin one another. As a result, the relationship of colour between one block and another becomes an important consideration. Selected colours should, therefore be from a similar tonal range so that they will sit well alongside one another. • Light and shade are important elements on the Estate as blocks were aligned specifically to ensure they received sufficient sunlight. The public walkways under the blocks also receive varying amounts of lights at different times of the day and year. The selected colours must therefore be appropriate in a variety of different conditions as they will be used in light and dark areas across the Estate. • Overall scale – the height and length of blocks will be perceived differently, and the colours should work in different situations. Volume II page 92 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.1.5 Paint Finish

As well as the factors affecting the selection of the colours, the paint finish is also an important consideration. There are a variety of finishes provided by the prevalent materials on the estate such as brick and concrete which have a matt finish, and tile which has some light reflective qualities. In order to complement these different finishes and considering the varied and often quite dark locations where colour is applied around the estate, a matt-gloss (satin) finish will achieve the best overall visual effect.

7.1.6 Internally

The external impact of colours applied to internal surfaces (common parts only), varies depending on the visibility of the internal common parts from an external standpoint. However there should be consistency in the use of colour throughout the common parts of each block. Page 186

The interior redecoration of common parts lies within the “Green Category” of the Management Guidelines – works that will not require Listed Building Consent. The guidance note states that it is within the Green Category, provided the colours for redecoration are chosen from the Approved Palette. Any choice not from the Approved Palette will fall within the red category.

Sufficient time should be allowed for applications for Listed Building Consent to be submitted and approved prior to any repainting work commencing. These timescales must be built into the programmes of work and should also include pre-application advice.

7.1.7 Selection of Colours

The selection of the Palette of Colours is based on a variety of factors.

• Whilst colour is important, it was never intended to be a principal feature of the Barbican Estate. The design features of the interior elements such as lift lobbies, stairwells, and corridors as specified in the original scheme should remain predominant. These should be preserved and not Volume II page 93 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

diminished by the choice of colour. The colours selected for the Palette must therefore, complement the design of the residential blocks and sit comfortably alongside these features. • As there are many places where internal portions of blocks are visible externally, it is important that the internal colour palette complements the external colour palette. Selected colours should, therefore, be from a similar tonal range as the external palette, so that they will sit well alongside one another. • Light and shade are important elements on the Estate as blocks were aligned specifically to ensure they received sufficient sunlight. Entrances, stairways and corridors receive varying amounts of natural and artificial light. The selected colours must therefore be appropriate in a variety of different conditions as they will be used in light and dark areas across the Estate.

7.1.8 Paint Finish

Page 187 As well as the factors affecting the selection of the colours, the paint finish is also an important consideration. A Gloss finish is preferable to be used on all metal work, doors and skirting. The only exception is on the Tower fire doors which are timber, and will therefore be painted in a Matt finish. A Matt finish should be used for general wall coverings.

Volume II page 94 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.2. The External Approved Palette and Traffic Light System

This section applies to all Residential Blocks on the Barbican Estate. Residents/Applicants should review the General Notes at the beginning of Section 3.1.1, Volume II, Guidance for External Elements.

7.2.1 GREEN - Works that will not require a LBC application

Like for Like redecoration of the external metalwork, fire doors and other elements – Where exactly the same colours are being re-applied in the same locations (See section 3.1.2 of the Listed Building Management Guidelines, Vol II).

Guidance Notes - The separate Colour Schedule in Appendix A – Identifies the existing paint colours and their locations. Page 188 The colours and the locations on this Schedule do not form part of the Approved Palette.

7.2.2 AMBER - Works where advice should be sought to determine whether a LBC application is required.

Redecoration of external metal work, fire doors and other decorated elements – where the choice of colour will be from the Approved Palette (See Section 3.1.3 of the Listed Building Management Guidelines, Vol II).

Guidance Notes – Provided the colour selection is made from the Approved Palette, LBC is unlikely to be required. Advice should be sought in order to determine whether the chosen colour will work in that particular location, and alongside colours already applied to adjacent and adjoining blocks. See the Approved Palette below for colour choices.

7.2.3 RED – Works that require a LBC Application

Redecoration of external metal work, fire doors and other decorated elements – where the choice of colour will NOT be from the approved Volume II page 95 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.2.4 Palette.

Guidance Notes - The approval of such an application cannot be guaranteed. It is strongly recommend that you contact the Department of Planning and Transportation for pre-application advice. In discussion you should provide a short-list of colours that have been chosen. Advice on the selected colours and the likelihood of the approval of such applications will be given. By seeking pre-application advice, any issues can be resolved in advance of the application which can help to shorten the decision-making process. The application process usually takes 8 weeks from receipt of a valid application to the issuing of a decision notice. However due to the necessity to consult the National Planning Casework Unit* on these applications, it may take longer to receive a decision. Please refer to section 10 vol.1 of the Management Guidelines for guidance on submitting an application for Listed Building Consent.

Page 189

Volume II page 96 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.2.5 The Exterior Palette

# Name BS /RAL Locations to be Used Notes Colour Code

1 Saxe BS 18 C 39 Exterior metalwork Blue (ACC R4.81.24) and fire doors

2 Oxford BS 20 C 40 Exterior metalwork As on Lauderdale & Shakespeare Towers Blue (ACC T7.22.14) and fire doors and others. Page 190

3 Laurel BS 12 D 45 Exterior metalwork As on Gilbert House Green and fire doors

4 Forest BS 14 C 40 Exterior metalwork As used on Postern Green and fire doors

5 Grey RAL 7009 Exterior metalwork and fire doors 6 Brown/ BS 10 B 29 Exterior metalwork An original colour from Paint Scrapes at Olive and fire doors the Art Centre

7 Cherry BS 04 D 45 Fire Doors Only (ACC C1.48.24) Volume II page 97 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

8 Red BS 04 D 44 Fire Doors Only Defoe balcony fire doors Page 191

Volume II page 98 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.3 The Internal Approved Palette and Traffic Light System

This section applies to all Residential Blocks on the Barbican Estate

7.3.1 GREEN - Works that will not require a LBC application

Like for Like redecoration of the any internal surface – Like-for-like redecoration would necessitate exactly the same colours being re- applied in the same locations.

Guidance Notes - The Separate Colour Schedule – Identifies the existing paint colours and their locations. The colours and the locations on the Schedule in Appendix A do not form part of the Palette. Page 192

7.3.1 GREEN - Works that will not require a LBC application

Redecoration of the following blocks – The Postern, Wallside, Lambert Jones Mews, Brandon Mews –

Guidance Notes - These blocks have no common parts .

7.3.3 GREEN Works that will not require a LBC application

Redecoration of the common areas of the following blocks provided the colours are selected from the Approved Palette - Gilbert House, Mountjoy House, Seddon House, John Trundle Court, Bunyan Court, Breton House, Ben Jonson.

Guidance Notes - These blocks have entrances with a low external visibility and so the choice of colour has minimal impact on the architectural significance of the Barbican Estate. Volume II page 99 Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.3.4 AMBER - Works where advice should be sought to determine whether a LBC application is required.

Redecoration of Common Parts where the choice of colours are from the Approved Palette. This includes the following blocks: Shakespeare Tower, Lauderdale Tower, Cromwell Tower, Willoughby House, Andrewes House, Defoe House, Thomas More House, Speed House, Bryer Court. All residential blocks where there are podium level lobbies.

Guidance Notes – These blocks have entrances with greater external visibility and so the choice of colour has an impact on the architectural significance of the exterior of the Barbican Estate. For that reason some assessment of the colour choice is necessary, to ensure an appropriate choice for a particular location. In these locations, internal and external colours must relate well to one another. Provided the choices of colours are Page 193 from the Approved Palette and the location choices are agreed, LBC will not be required. Colours must be used consistently throughout the block.

7.3.5 RED – Works that require a LBC Application

Internal Redecoration of common parts – where the choice of colour is NOT from the approved Palette.

Guidance Notes - The approval of such an application cannot be guaranteed. We strongly recommend that you contact the Department of Planning and Transportation for pre-application advice. In discussion you should provide a short-list of colours that have been chosen. Planning Officers will give feedback on the selected colours, and advise on the likelihood of the approval of such applications. By seeking pre-application advice, any issues can be resolved in advance of the application which can help to shorten the decision-making process. The application process usually takes 8 weeks from receipt of a valid application to the issuing of a decision notice. However due to the necessity to consult the National Planning Casework Unit* on these applications, it may take longer to receive a decision. Please refer to section 10 vol.1 of the Management Guidelines for guidance on submitting an application for Listed Building Consent. Volume II page 100

Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.3.6 The Interior Palette

# Name BS/RAL Code Location to be used Notes 1 White Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 1 Plum 02 C 39 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 2 Cherry 04 D 45 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 3 Flame orange-red 04 E 53 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 4 Gorse yellow 08 E 51 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 5 Jasmin yellow 10 E 50 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 6 Apple 12 D 43 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss Page 194 7 Laurel green 12 D 45 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 8 Neptune green 14 E 53 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 9 Dolphin blue 20 C 37 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 10 Delphinium blue 20 E 51 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 11 Mariner blue 20 D 45 Internal Metal Work and Doors Gloss 12 Champagne 10 C 31 Flat Doors Gloss 13 Flaxen 08 C 35 Flat Doors Gloss 14 Periwinkle 20 C 33 Flat Doors Gloss 15 Greystone 10 B 17 Flat Doors Gloss 16 Peppermint 14 C 31 Flat Doors Gloss 17 White/Cream based N/A Wall Colour Matt – this can be any colour shade of white or cream that the residents wish. Volume II page 101

Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

7.4. Frequently Asked Questions

i) Some of the existing colours do not appear on the approved palette – Why? • Colours that are currently present on the estate, but that do not appear on the palette have been deemed to be inappropriate in terms of the Listed Building Status and special architectural and historic interest of the Barbican Estate.

ii) Why can’t there be more colours on the palette? • One of the aims of the palette is to reduce the number of different colours being used on the estate. This will in turn improve the coherent use of colour across the estate. • However, should residents wish to choose a colour that is not on the palette they may ask the Barbican Estate Office to submit an application Page 195 for Listed Building Consent for that particular colour. There can be no guarantee that such a colour choice would receive approval.

iii) Why don’t we need Listed Building Consent to redecorate in the same colour? • Like-for-like redecoration does not require Listed Building Consent as it is not seen as a material change to the building affecting its architectural character. As such, the re-decoration of a location, using the same colour as before, will not require Listed Building Consent. This is the case even where the colour does not appear on the palette.

iv) There are too few colours on the external palette, why can’t we choose colours from the internal palette to be applied externally? • The colours on the palette have been chosen to suit the exterior or interior locations. External colours are more muted in tone. The Internal colours which tend to be several shades brighter, would not be appropriate in external locations.

v) How long does a Listed Building Consent Application take to be processed? • The application process usually takes 8 weeks from receipt of a valid application to the issuing of a decision notice. However due to the Volume II page 102

Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 7.0 PALETTE OF COLOURS

necessity to consult the National Planning Casework Unit* on these applications, it may take longer to receive a decision.

vi) Who should submit an application for Listed Building Consent to redecorate my block? • Staff from the Barbican Estate Office will submit the application for Listed Building Consent to the Department of Planning and Transportation, once they have received the choice of colours from the House Group Chairman.

Page 196

Volume II page 103

Palette of Colours - Draft – March 2012 Agenda Item 12a

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no. Planning & Transportation 24 th April 2012 Port Health & Environmental Services 1st May 2012 Subject: Public Departmental Business Plan 2012-15 Report of: For Decision Director of the Built Environment

Summary

This report details the Business Plan for 2011-15 for the Department of the Built Environment.

The business plan sets out what we do, the standards we will attain, how we will operate as a department, where we fit into the Corporate plans, and what we are planning to do to keep on improving.

Recommendations • That the Department of the Built Environment’s Business Plan 2012- 2015 and associated appendices are approved. • Agreement, that progress in achieving the Business Plan’s key objectives and KPIs be reported quarterly to committee.

Main Report

Background 1. This is the first Business Plan of the Department of the Built Environment. 2. Departmental Business Plans are an integral element of the performance management system and are part of a more clearly defined annual planning cycle, which has been devised to improve the links between service and financial planning and drive service improvement. 3. The purpose of this Business Plan is to show how the Department will be improving performance and how activities support the City’s strategic aims and policy priorities. Current Position 4. The new Business Plan for 2012-15 has been compiled in line with corporate guidelines, and incorporates comments from the Town Clerk’s Performance and Development Team. Strategic Implications 5. This Business Plan details how the Open Spaces Department’s activities and key projects for the next three years support and link to the themes in the City Together Strategy and the City’s Corporate Plan.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\6\5\ai00007560\$c3juz5on.docPage 197 Consultation 6. The managers and staff of the department were consulted during the planning process. Business Partners, (HR & Finance) staff also contributed to the preparation of the plan. 7. Further consultation was undertaken with the Deputy Town Clerk on 3 rd April 2012. Conclusion 8. Formal monitoring arrangements are in place to ensure that performance is reviewed regularly and during the year progress will be monitored at the monthly departmental management team meetings. Members will be kept informed of progress on the KPIs, key objectives and the budget position in quarterly reports which will be presented to Committee.

Contact: [email protected] | telephone number: 0207 332 1725

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\0\6\5\ai00007560\$c3juz5on.docPage 198 Department of the Built Environment Appendix A

Summary Business Plan Our Strategic Aims are: A selection of our Cross Department Key Objectives are to:

(i.) Improve our internal processes, so that major planning applications and • To provide an integrated service to City their related activities are programmed across DBE from inception through to building occupation. developers and occupiers from pre-construction to demolition; (ii.) Map our expected income from all sources (including S106, CIL, TfL and elsewhere) so this can be better matched to expected schemes.

• To manage all activities and services that relate (iii.) Further develop the programming of our schemes via the new corporate to the City’s streets, especially utility works; and software (Project Vision) to improve the management data relating to these schemes.

• To renew the City’s streets and streetscene to (iv.) Bring together our Core Strategy and the planning of highway uses to suit changing demand. start to develop a vision for the City’s streets for the next five to ten years.

Page 199 (v.) Improve and develop mapping services and the use of GIS to integrate fully our new highway management software, and the information on our website regarding highway activities.

A selection of our Key Performance Indicators are: Description: Previous Year Target: Performance (to end Q3) Reduction by 5% on road casualties 350 (official figures 2010) 5% reduction Decide 80% building control applications within 8 week timescale 86% >90% Process 65% of minor planning applications within 8 weeks 53% >65% Process 80% of other planning applications within 8 weeks 53% >80% Approve 95% of all planning applications 97% >95% Ensure 80% of valid PCN debts recovered 80% >80% Increase volume of household waste recycled 36% >40% Ensure 90% streetworks in compliance with the 5 point communication plan n/a >90% Ensure GIS services are available 98% of the working day n/a >98%

Department of the Built Environment Appendix A

Our Financial Information: Our Staffing is made up of:

2011/12 2011/12 2011/12 2012/13 • 2011/12 Revised N.B. Headcount: 197 Original Actual Original • Female: 69 (35%) Actual Budget Budget Outturn Budget • Male: 128 (65%) (latest) • Over 50: 75(38%) £000 £000 £000 £000 % £000 Employees 12,810 13,015 11,574 11,616 100.4% 11,157 Premises 7,555 6,641 7,396 7,409 100.2% 6,359 Notes on Staffing Information: Transport 119 131 131 146 111.5% 106 1. Turnover is not possible to Supplies & Services 3,086 2,971 3,415 3,330 97.5% 2,598 state as the Built Environment Third Party Payments is a new department.

Page 200 13,761 14,283 11,588 11,580 99.9% 9,420 Transfer to Reserve 5 5 5 5 100.0% 5 2. More detailed information is Contingencies 2 15 15 13 86.7% 15 provided at appendix A1 3. The ratio of male to female Unidentified Savings 0 -34 -34 -34 100.0% -354 staff can be attributable to Total Expenditure 37,338 37,027 34,090 34,065 99.9% 29,306 the department having 37,338 37,027 34,090 34,065 99.9% 29,306 Total Income (15,867) (16,012) (14,028) (14,126) 100.7% (11,188) many roles that have Total Local Risk 21,471 21,015 20,062 19,939 99.4% 18,118 1 traditionally been Central Risk (5,418) (4,647) (4,769) (4,769) 100.0% (4,565) considered to be ‘male’ roles, eg. engineers, Total Local and Central 16,048 16363 15288 15165 99.5% 13582 surveyors, waste managers.

Recharges 11,737 8,659 9,897 9,897 100.0% 10,373 This is largely out of the Total Net Expenditure 27,790 25,027 25,190 25,067 99.5% 23,926 2 control of the department but consideration will be given to what initiatives the department can undertake Notes on Financial Information: to encourage change. 1. Excludes Local Risk amounts spent by the City Surveyor 2. Projected outturn 2011/12 based on monitoring at period 9 (31/12/2011)

Department of the Built Environment

Page 201 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 202 Depart ment of the Built Environment Appendix A1

Staff Profiles:

A total of 75 employees are older than 50 which represent 38% of the total workforce of the department. 11% of these are older than 60. (As of 6 th December 2011)

Page 203 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 204 Department of the Built Environment Appendix B

City Surveyor Director of the City Planning Built Environment Officer Peter Bennett

Peter Rees Philip Everett

Page 205 CPAT Team Manager

Director of District Surveyor Director of Policy and Director of Planning Transportation & Public Performance Services & Development David Clements Realm Paul Beckett Annie Hampson Building Control Steve Presland Dangerous Structures Planning Policy Review – Development Management – Emergency Planning Monitoring & Information – Enforecement – Land Charges – Cleansing – Highways – Street Fire Safety Risk Assessments Corporate Gazetteers – Street S106 & CIL Negotiations – Historic Enhancement – Strategic Demolition Notices Naming & Building Numbering – Environment – Buildings at Risk – Transportation- Local Corporate GIS Trees - Archaeology – Graphic Transportation – Transportation Design – Planning Administration – Policy – Road Safety Business Planning – FOI management – Access support and advice

06/08/2012 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 206

Department of the Built Environment “Creating a better built environment”

Business Plan 2012-15

$cd12p0x0.doc 1 Page 207

Introduction 3

Our Services 3

Transportation and Public Realm 3 District Surveyor 5 Policy & Performance 5 Planning Services & Development 6 CPAT 6

Business Transformation 7

Performance Reporting 9

Corporate Cross Cutting Themes 10

2012 Special Events 10 Engagement, Consultation and External Communication 10 Internal Communications 11 Sustainability 11 Procurement and Procure to Pay (PP2P) 12 Equalities 12 Business Risk Management 13 Emergency Planning & Business Continuity 13 Health & Safety 13 Information Systems 14 Property 14 Service Response Standard 14

Finance 14

Learning and Development 15

Training and Staff Development 15 Workforce Planning 16 Investors in People 17

Development of the Business Plan 18

Appendices 19

Supporting Documents 19

$cd12p0x0.doc 2 Page 208

Introduction 1. This Business Plan is the first for the new Department of the Built Environment, and is our statement of intent for the next three years.

2. This plan deals with how we will go about improving what we do (our Business Transformation), our main services (Key Objectives) and how we will measure our performance throughout the year and beyond.

3. It will provide a basis for setting the objectives of individual staff at their annual appraisals as well as for Members and our management teams to see how well we are doing against our objectives and our key performance indicators, and for those objectives and indicators to be realistic, achievable with effort, and meaningful.

4. As this is a new department we have included additional detail throughout the plan. More background reading can be found in the appendices and supporting documents.

5. The departmental summary business plan, with financial and staffing details, can be found in Appendix A.

Our Services 6. The Director of the Department of the Built Environment is supported by four Directors and the City Planning Officer.

7. The key services of the four divisions of the department are set out in the organisation chart in Appendix B. Additionally, Appendix C gives contact details for areas of each division.

Transportation and Public Realm 8. The Transportation and Public Realm division covers a wide remit, including local and pan-London strategic transportation, cleansing services, road safety, streetscene design and build, traffic management, special event planning and coordination, highway management, and parking enforcement. Transport related responsibilities include advising the Corporation on strategic transport issues affecting the City, monitoring the use of the transport infrastructure.

$cd12p0x0.doc 3 Page 209

9. Cleansing Services cover Waste Management, Street Cleansing, the provision of public conveniences and the provision of corporate vehicle fleet management services. These duties are supported by a team of Street Environment Officers, responsible for monitoring the streets and taking enforcement action where necessary. These services are overseen by the Port Health and Environmental Services Committee.

10. Streetscene responsibilities extend to working with the City's various communities to develop and deliver environmental enhancement schemes which aim to improve accessibility and enhance the environmental quality of the City’s streets and improve the open spaces in the square mile.

11. Complementing our street enhancement strategy work our Transportation services work closely with Transport for London in our developing traffic management strategy. We not only improve safety and improve the effectiveness of the road networks we also support sustainable transport options by encouraging increased walking, use of public transport and cycling.

12. The delivery of the extensive programme of street enhancement and traffic management schemes and road safety projects is delivered through the division's Highways Management Group. This team finalises the detailed technical design of schemes and manages delivery through the City's contractors. This same team is responsible for coordinating utility works in the City balancing these requirements with their management of planned events (such as preparation for the Lord Mayor's Show), and the issuing of Hoardings and Scaffolding licences as well as dealing with temporary road closures. This team is responsible for the repair, maintenance and reconstruction of streets, signage, street furniture and provision of street lighting.

13. The road safety team complement the work set out above and promote safer streets through the identification and delivery of traffic management schemes combined with an education programme directed to both road users and pedestrians. They work closely with the and City schools on a number of innovative and educational schemes.

$cd12p0x0.doc 4 Page 210

14. The division also manages the City’s car parks and the enforcement of on street parking controls, the related Parking Ticket Office and the processing of appeals against penalty charge notices.

District Surveyor 15. The District Surveyor’s division is responsible for carrying out the Building Control responsibilities of the City under the Building Act and Building Regulations. This it does in direct competition with a wide range of private practices known as Approved Inspectors. In the light of this fierce competition the division functions as a business unit fully covering the costs of its Building Regulations service by means of charges made to its applicants.

16. Amongst its other responsibilities the division also deals with reports of Dangerous Structures, on a 24/7 basis, as a matter of public safety. Accordingly the District Surveyor represents the Department in terms of Emergency Planning.

Policy & Performance 17. The Policy & Performance Division produces the spatial planning strategy and policies for the City of London, and liaises with other parties to influence the national and London- wide planning policy context. The City’s Core Strategy adopted in 2011 is being complemented by a more-detailed Development Management document (DPD) that will also be in general conformity with the London Plan 2011 and the new National Planning Policy Framework. It is also preparing the policy context for the introduction of the City’s Community Infrastructure Levy.

18. The division plays a key role in collecting, analysing and providing planning information throughout the City Corporation to inform policy formulation and decision making. It publishes bi-annual development monitoring reports supplemented by topic reports on subjects such as employment, retailing and the Census 2011. It maintains corporate referencing systems including the City’s component of the national Land & Property Gazetteer, and carries out the City Corporation’s street naming & building numbering duties.

$cd12p0x0.doc 5 Page 211

19. The Corporate GIS Team promote greater corporate use of GIS, integration with new corporate software and sharing of spatial data. It provides Corporate GIS input into projects such as the new City website.

Planning Services & Development 20. The division is responsible for all development proposals, within the City, enforcement and the conservation and enhancement of the City’s heritage assets. It provides general and pre-application advice and encourages accommodation for high quality offices to help maintain the City’s role as the world’s leading international business centre and the provision of housing, retailing, leisure, tourism and other uses. It has responsibility for trees, archaeology, conservation areas, listed buildings, buildings at risk and the preparation of guidance on planning policy, and listed building management guidelines.

21. It is also responsible for negotiating, administering and monitoring Section 106 planning obligations and the CIL (Community Infrastructure Levy) on behalf of the City and the Mayor of London.

22. The Access Team promote access to the City’s Built Environment, services and facilities. The team ensures that action is taken to meet the needs of disabled people in relation to building design and the external environment and work closely with colleagues across the department.

23. The division maintains and administers the Local Land Charges Register.

24. Within this division is business administration which includes Business Planning, co-ordinating Freedom of Information requests and other corporate initiatives.

CPAT 25. The City Property Advisory Team (CPAT) is based in the City Surveyor’s Department and is responsible for providing support, guidance and advice on matters relating to the built environment. CPAT provides support to City businesses, utility network providers and the property industry through running direct contact programmes, providing advisory/handholding services and running focussed events on key issues for developers and other City occupiers.

$cd12p0x0.doc 6 Page 212

Business Transformation 26. Following committee approval in July 2011, the new Department of the Built Environment was established to unify the transportation, streets and highways functions with development management and policy development for the built environment to provide a focus for all development-related activities.

27. The department has three externally focused aims:

To provide an integrated service to City developers and occupiers from pre-construction to demolition;

To manage all activities and services that relate to the City’s streets, especially utility works; and

To renew the City’s streets and streetscene to suit changing demand.

28. To achieve these aims, what we will do in the next 12 months will be to develop processes and procedures which will bring our services together, supporting our corporate and departmental aims, (in particular the need for increasingly efficient services), and establishing a department which is flexible enough to deliver high-quality services in a changing organisation. This will be achieved across the department through the following cross cutting objectives:

(i.) We will measure the key elements of our services so that managers can see how the department is performing and take early action if needed. That is the purpose of the KPIs in this Plan. (Appendix D)

(ii.) We will set out objectives across the divisions for the year and beyond, with clear milestones for each. These too are set out later in this Plan. (Appendix E)

(iii.) We will improve our internal processes, so that major planning applications and their related activities are

$cd12p0x0.doc 7 Page 213

programmed across DBE from inception through to building occupation.

(iv.) We will map our expected income from all sources (including S106, CIL, TfL and elsewhere) so this can be better matched to expected schemes.

(v.) We will further develop the programming of our schemes via the new corporate software (Project Vision) to improve the management data relating to these schemes.

(vi.) We will bring together our Core Strategy and the planning of highway uses to start to develop a vision for the City’s streets for the next five to ten years.

(vii.) We will improve and develop mapping services and the use of GIS to integrate fully our new highway management software, and the information on our website regarding highway activities.

(viii.) We will pilot the Chamberlains “Service Protocols” to improve financial information for managers.

(ix.) We will build on the succession planning work started in the District Surveyors’ by developing our staff and employing juniors and trainees wherever possible.

(x.) We will continue to support and develop existing staff, encouraging each person to achieve their potential.

29. With regard to objectives (ix) and (x), we are aware of the high proportions of experienced staff in the department (see the age profile at Appendix A and Appendix A1), and we will be addressing these objectives in accordance with the Workforce Plan in Appendix H.

$cd12p0x0.doc 8 Page 214

Performance Reporting 30. In order to monitor our performance thoroughly we have used a combination of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and objectives. Each will be monitored by the divisional and departmental management teams. KPIs will be used to measure regular performance of routine operations, whereas the objectives will be used to measure defined work streams and ongoing projects.

31. All the KPIs will be reported to Members quarterly. These can be found in Appendix D.

32. With regard to the divisional objectives, we have set out below those that are most relevant to the operation of the department, and progress on these will be reported to Members quarterly. A full list of divisional objectives (with milestones) can be found in Appendix E.

Transportation and Public Realm TP1 Increase household recycling rate to 40% TP2 Delivering agreed area enhancement strategies to at least three new areas within the square mile (Aldgate, Liverpool Street and Fenchurch Street). TP3 Improving the effective delivery and monitoring of streetworks within the square mile. TP4 Improving the road safety outcomes entailing a review of past performance and agreeing a new Road Danger Reduction Plan. TP5 To deliver the effective implementation of a time banding scheme for bagged waste. TP6 Improving project management practise entailing a review of the processes, functionality and resources used to manage projects, completing a comprehensive 2-year delivery programme and effective implementation of Project Vision.

District Surveyor DS1 Maximise workload in the challenging competitive market place through more direct contact with development intelligence from sections of the new department. DS2 Reduce departmental overheads through increased use of flexible/mobile working

$cd12p0x0.doc 9 Page 215

Planning Policy and Performance PP1 To update the statutory Development Plan (LDF) for the City of London to provide a context for sustainable growth to 2026, including development of the Community Infrastructure Levy PP2 To develop the Corporate Geographical Information System (GIS) and support its wider use, and to increase corporate data sharing to boost corporate efficiency, effectiveness and service delivery

Development Management DM1 Deliver and administer an effective town planning service ensuring an efficient service to developers and occupiers; encouraging the development of high quality, sustainable buildings. DM2 To secure, manage and monitor S106/CIL and other legal arrangements in relation to development management.

Corporate Cross Cutting Themes 33. Below we’ve listed the various cross cutting themes of the organisation and how the department is complying with them, (words which are underlined refer to documents than can be viewed on the website).

2012 Special Events 34. The department will have a key role in the Diamond Jubilee, and the Olympic and Paralympic games this summer, and staff are actively involved in preparations for the these events, which will affect in particular our staff in the street related services. Experience already shows that in the lead up to events like these, we will be increasingly involved in the planning of events, and the intensity of these will only increase during the lead up to the Games.

Engagement, Consultation and External Communication 35. Consultations carried out by the department are undertaken in accordance with the Corporation’s consultation standards.

36. The department is also exploring innovative and effective ways of engaging with our stakeholders. The recent consultation carried out for the Bank Area review, used a number of different avenues of communication to generate a record

$cd12p0x0.doc 10 Page 216

number of responses, including a dedicated website, onsite ‘letterboxes’ and postcards.

37. We are committed to exploring social media networks and alternative effective and cost-efficient ways of communication to develop our connections with residents, visitors and workers.

38. The Statement of Community Involvement outlines the department’s aims in achieving its planning duties, and provides a clear explanation that allows the community to know how and when they will be involved in the preparation of the Local Development Framework and in the determination of planning applications.

Internal Communications 39. The department is incorporating communication best practice from the old Departments of Environment Services and Planning & Transportation by establishing a regular departmental communications group. Each division is represented on the group and minutes feed through to the corporate internal communications group.

40. An electronic staff newsletter is published to staff every three months, with articles and contributions from all divisions. This complements other forms of communication such as the cascade system, departmental working groups and corporate initiatives supporting the sharing of information across locations.

Sustainability 41. The department requires all major developments to achieve a BREEAM rating of excellent or above. More details can be found in the Core Strategy.

42. The waste management policy aims to reduce the impact of waste on the environment. Examples of the reduction in environmental impact include:

• electric waste management vehicles, • zero waste to landfill • the transportation of waste by river-barge

$cd12p0x0.doc 11 Page 217

43. Printing costs as well as paper usage should reduce as more policies, publications and maps become available principally on line.

44. Walbrook Wharf’s Green Team continues to lead the way throughout the Corporation through the sharing of best practice.

45. The annual Clean City Awards support city businesses reduce waste, by encouraging reuse and recycling.

Procurement and Procure to Pay (PP2P) 46. The Department has been in the forefront of the PP2P Programme, and have so far retendered our highways contract as part of the programme. This year we will continue specifically with our parking services contracts and corporately with the setting up of the new procurement unit.

Equalities 47. The City previously achieved Level 3 of the Existing Equalities Standard. The department has an Equalities Working Group, at which each division is represented by equalities champions.

48. The City is committed to reach the “Excellent” standard as defined by the Equality Framework for Local Government (EFLG). To ensure this target is met, the department will develop, with guidance from the Equality, Diversity and Human Rights Manager a ‘traffic light’ action plan which will be reviewed regularly by the management team.

49. The department is committed to supporting Equalities in Service Delivery and Employment policies and ensures these principles are embedded in our operations and policies.

50. A central register of Equality Impact Assessments is held, and new EQIAs are reviewed at each Equalities group meeting. This ensures that EQIAs are reflected upon by peers and that all new policies and practices within the department are scrutinized to ensure that the net effect has a neutral or positive impact.

$cd12p0x0.doc 12 Page 218

51. The new department will continue to support the surrounding community by offering work experience to school pupils across all divisions.

Business Risk Management 52. The department is reviewing Business Risks in accordance with the City’s Risk Management Handbook adopted in October 2011. Once the initial review under this new guidance is complete it will be the subject of a separate report to the Planning & Transportation Committee and the Port Health and Environmental Services Committee.

53. Where significant new risks are identified or there are significant increases in the overall level of risk these will be reported to Service Committees as part of the quarterly Business Plan Progress Report.

Emergency Planning & Business Continuity 54. The plans inherited from the former departments were previously maintained at divisional level. With the production of the corporate Major Incident Plan these plans are under review and being amended to take account of the new procedures and responsibilities. Front line actions required of the department, to respond to any incident are ensured by the adequacy of existing arrangements and training updates to staff.

55. The department participates fully in corporate exercises and is extensively involved with preparations for the Olympics through the City Olympic Coordination Centre (BOCC) and City Emergency Coordination Centre (BECC).

56. In support of Corporate Emergency Planning the Department provides Local Authority Liaison Officers (LALOs) to co- ordinate the City's response in multi departmental incidents.

Health & Safety 57. The department is committed to developing and encouraging health and safety awareness amongst staff through the implementation of H&S Management Systems. The departmental H&S working group meet quarterly and meetings are chaired by the Director of the Built Environment.

$cd12p0x0.doc 13 Page 219

58. The ‘Top X’ as found in Appendix F, identifies the significant H&S risks and action plan for effectively managing these risks. All identified risks are being actively managed.

Information Systems 59. The department will be reviewing its information sources and information management needs and processes during the coming year.

60. The Director of the Built Environment is Chairman of the Information Management Governance Board and other officers from the department represent departmental needs and consider corporate opportunities on corporate groups such as the IS Review Reference Group and the IS Liaison Officers' Group.

Property 61. The department is subject to the current Guildhall Accommodation Plan, which will see the Transportation & Public Realm division relocate to the North Wing 1st floor. In addition to the Guildhall moves, there are proposed changes at Walbrook Wharf to ensure efficiency.

62. The department has responsibility for the Cleansing depot at Walbrook Wharf, as well as six off-street car parks (one is managed on behalf of Smithfield Market) and seven public conveniences throughout the City.

Service Response Standard 63. The department continues to support and adhere to the revised corporate service response standards. However, the nature of the department’s work means that a higher volume of callers prefer to leave voicemail rather than leave a message with a colleague.

64. The contact centre manages over 3,000 calls per month on behalf of the new department, delivering excellent customer care and support for the department.

Finance 65. Strong financial management is critical to the delivery of high quality services at a reduced cost. Our strategy is to continually

$cd12p0x0.doc 14 Page 220

review our ways of working to generate further efficiencies whilst maximising our income streams.

66. The department is committed to producing budget estimates projected for two full years ahead and proactively monitoring our key cost drivers and any external factors that could impact on our ability to remain within budget. This will be supported by budget manager’s active monthly review of management accounts and quarterly budget monitoring review meetings by the Departmental Management Team to review the budgetary position in detail and sign off the forecast.

67. The Building Control Service has been affected by the economic down turn placing an increased pressure on the services overall budget position. This is recognised in the District Surveyors objective to maximise workload in a challenging and competitive market place.

Learning and Development

Training and Staff Development 68. Staff development remains a high priority for the Department, and therefore the budget for L&D has been set at £87,000 for 2012/13.

69. The department’s L&D plan, Appendix G, is a way of allocating training resources for the current year, in support of both corporate and departmental L&D priorities. Individual training needs are highlighted through the annual performance and development reviews.

70. L&D priorities for the Department are as follows: • Continuing professional development (CPD) including support in obtaining professional qualifications • Management development and succession planning • IT and technical training • Project Management • Managing Change

71. As a new department we are looking to establish a positive evaluation process that supports our needs and the requirements of IIP.

$cd12p0x0.doc 15 Page 221

72. The Corporate L&D theme of leadership and management is a priority for the department, and we will continue supporting staff through the Ashridge training on offer from corporate L&D. The new department has a number of Ashridge alumni, which builds on the commitment of the department and organisation to develop its leaders.

73. The department CPD working group ensures that bite size training opportunities are provided to all department staff, not only dealing with professional skills and legal updates, but also on wider interest topics such as the Olympics and Transport for London. These will be evaluated in 2012/13 through SNAP surveys ensuring staff feel the CPD programme provides a relevant range of topics and good value for money.

74. Managers encourage staff to take full advantage of the on-line training, insight lunches and short courses on offer by the central L&D team. Staff are also encouraged to pursue alternative learning opportunities such as peer reviews, visits to other boroughs and training offered by professional organisations.

75. Since December 2011, management require that all staff complete the corporate on-line training on Data Protection and Information Management, to reduce the business risk to the City. This online training is carried out online and is a new method of learning for many of the staff. It is proving successful as it has allowed staff to work at their own speed to ensure understanding of the subject.

76. The department is committed to the development of its professional staff, encouraging membership of The Royal Town Planning Institute, The Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, Institute of Highways & Transportation, Chartered Institution of Wastes Management and other recognised professional bodies.

Workforce Planning 77. Workforce Planning is important to ensure as much as possible that the right people with the right knowledge, skills and behaviours are deployed across the department to achieve its business plans. It also provides the opportunity for longer term

$cd12p0x0.doc 16 Page 222

thinking about service pressures and needs and what we need to be doing now to ensure that the department has the knowledge, skills and behaviours for the future.

78. The HR Business Partner has completed a workforce planning report, which concentrates on the management capabilities of the new department. This plan can be found in Appendix H.

Investors in People 79. In 2011 the required 3 year Investors in People assessment took place for the City of London Corporation. The assessors agreed that we still continue to meet the Standard but identified that they key area for improvement should focus on evaluation of Learning and Development activities.

80. The assessor is due to revisit annually, in June 2012 and June 2013 to ensure that progress is being maintained on the action plan. To support the corporate assessment, the department will support the City’s action plan.

$cd12p0x0.doc 17 Page 223

Development of the Business Plan 81. The department adhered to the Corporate Business Planning Framework in developing this plan. Senior Management meetings have contributed to the vision of this new department and its first Business Plan. Directors and Managers held divisional discussions with staff to discuss the main objectives and forward looking divisional plans. The plan is also circulated to other corporate managers to ensure corporate considerations are being met.

$cd12p0x0.doc 18 Page 224

Appendices A - Summary Business Plan B - Organisational Chart C - Responsibilities and main contacts D - Divisional Top Objectives E - Divisional Key Performance Indicators F - Health & Safety Top X G - Learning & Development Plan H - Workforce Planning

Supporting Documents (These can be provide on request, or by following hyperlinks) Statement of Community Involvement City’s Local Implementation Plan Core Strategy Street Scene Enhancement Projects Proposed Departmental Reorganisation Committee report, 27 th July 2011 Divisional Summary Plans Divisional Objectives Equalities Impact Assessment

$cd12p0x0.doc 19 Page 225 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 226 Department of the Built Environment Appendix C

Main contacts and Responsibilities:

Responsibility Name Ext Access Group Rob Oakley 3795 Archaeology Kathryn Stubbs 1447 Barbican and Golden Lane Management Kathryn Stubbs 1447 Plans Building Control David Clements 1949 Buildings at Risk register and proposals Kathryn Stubbs 1447 for listing Business Planning Elisabeth Hannah 1725 City Development Plan review Peter Shadbolt 1038 City’s Local Land & Property Gazetteer & Peter Shadbolt 1038 City’s Local Street Gazetteer Complaints manager Elisabeth Hannah 1725 Conservation Area Advisory Committee Ted Rayment/David 1705/1238 Stothard Conservation Area documents, Kathryn Stubbs 1447 Supplementary Planning Documents Corporation Car Parks Kay English 1572 Demolition Notices Andrew Kendrick 3900 Business Continuity Richard Steele 3150 Business Risk Register Richard Steele 3150 Information Asset Owner Richard Steele 3150 Development Management (East) David Stothard 1238 Development Management (West) Ted Rayment 1705 Development monitoring & London Peter Shadbolt 1038 Development Database submissions Corporate Geographical Information Richard Steele 3150 System (GIS) District Surveyors David Clements 1949 Emergency Planning Bill Welch 1939 Events in the City Kay English 1572 Fire Risk Assessments Chris Shiel 1925 Freedom of Information manager Elisabeth Hannah 1725 Graphics Team Kathryn Stubbs 1447 Health & Safety Elisabeth Hannah 1725 Highways Repairs, Maintenance and Ian Hughes 1977 resurfacing Land Charges Elisabeth Hannah 1725 Local Transportation Iain Simmons 1151 Marriage Licence Advice David Withington 1977 Hazardous Waste service (Pan-London) Jim Graham 4972 Parking Enforcement Kay English 1572 Parking Ticket Office Stuart McGregor 1035 Planning Obligations (S106/CIL) Katy Phillips 1711 Chhaya Patel Planning Policy Peter Shadbolt 1038 Policy liaison with Government, Mayor, Peter Shadbolt 1038 and 06/08/2012 Page 227 Department of the Built Environment Appendix C

Public Art Proposals and commissioning Victor Callister 3468 Public Conveniences Doug Wilkinson 4998 Recycling Policy Doug Wilkinson 4998 Strategic Transportation Andy Phipps 3229 Street Cleansing Jim Graham 4972 Street Enforcement Doug Wilkinson 4998 Street Enhancement and design Victor Callister 3468 Street Naming and Building Numbering Peter Shadbolt 1038 Street works and Highways Enforcement Ian Hughes 1977 Trees Kathryn Stubbs 1447 Waste Collection and Disposal Jim Graham 4972 Waste Strategy Doug Wilkinson 4998

06/08/2012 Page 228 Department of the Built Environment Appendix D

Departmental Key Performance Indicators (NI = National Indicators)

Ref: Division Actual 2011 -12 Target 2012 - 13 Q1 Q2 Q3 Transportation & Public Realm NI 191 To reduce the residual annual household waste per 116.8kg 118.45k 127.99kg <565 kgs household. g NI 192 Percentage of household waste recycled. 39.34% 37.68% 33.09% 40% NI 195 Percentage of relevant land and highways from which 2.29% 2.29% 1.5% 2% unacceptable levels of litter, detritus, graffiti and fly-posting are visible. Page 229 LTR2 Percentage of valid PCN debts recovered. 81% 81% 80% 80% LTR3a Respond to percentage of PCN correspondence within 15 100% 100% 100% 90% days. TPR1 No more than 3 failing KPIs, per month on new Refuse and n/a n/a n/a <9 per quarter Street Cleansing contract TPR2 No more than 3 failing KPIs, per month on new Highway n/a n/a n/a <9 per quarter Repairs and Maintenance contract. TPR3a Reduction by 10% of number of persons killed and seriously n/a n/a n/a Quarterly injured compared to 2010 baseline (45 persons). TPR3b Reduction by 5% of number of total road traffic casualties n/a n/a n/a Quarterly compared to 2010 baseline (350 persons). TPR4 No more than 10 unresolved ‘time banding’ queries. n/a n/a n/a <10 TPR5 90% street works in full compliance with the services 5 point n/a n/a n/a 90% communication plan.

Department of the Built Environment Appendix D

District Surveyor’s (Building Control) LBC1 To decide 90% of standard 5 week applications within the 100% 80% 100% 90% timescale compared with the number of applications received under these terms. LBC2 To decide 90% of 8 week applications within the timescale 88% 80% 90% 90% where this has been agreed compared with the number of application received under these terms. LBC3 To issue a completion certificate within 10 days of the final 87% 89% 96% 85% inspection of completed building work in 85% of eligible cases. (was 14 days in 2011/12)

Page 230 Planning Policy PP1 Consult the public on the City’s preliminary draft Community n/a n/a n/a Infrastructure Levy (CIL) by October 2012 and the draft CIL by March 2013. PP2 Consult the public on the draft LDF Development n/a n/a n/a Management Development Plan Document by January 2013 PP3 Publish development pipeline information bi-annually (June & May 2011 n/a Nov 2011 Dec) and publish initial analysis of the 2011 Census for the City by December 2012 PP4 Improve the match of gazetteer to Non-Domestic Rate n/a 85% records from 80% to 85% during 2012/13. PP5 Ensure internal and public-facing GIS services are availability n/a 98% 98% of the working day (excluding IS service disruptions). Department of the Built Environment Appendix D

Actual 2011 -12Q2 Target 2012 - 13 Development Management Q1 Q2 Q3 DM1a Process 65% of minor planning applications within 8 weeks 72.5% 59.18% 30% 65% DM1b Process 75% of other planning applications within 8 weeks 57.89% 62.20% 48.15% 75 % DM1c To negotiate schemes such that 95% are eligible for approval 99% 99%% 95% 95% on initial application. DM3 Process 100% of standard land charge searches within 8 100% 100% 100% 100% working days (11-12 target 100% in 10 days) DM4 To publish 6 conservation area appraisals and management n/a n/a n/a 6 proposals by 31 st March 2013 DM5 Ensure 90% of valid planning applications are viewable n/a n/a n/a 90% Page 231 online within 3 working days of validation DM6 Provide access team observations to 100% planning 96% 96% 98% 100% applications within 14 days of receipt of information DM7 To provide responses to requests under the Freedom of n/a n/a n/a 85% Information Act within 20 working days. (Statutory target of 85%)

Service Response Standards SRS C Emails to all published (external-facing) email addresses to 67% 75% 100% 100% be responded to within 1 day. SRS D A full response to requests for specific information or services 100% 100% 80% 100% requested via email within 10 days. SRS E Telephone calls to be picked up and answered within 5 94.14% 94.60% 93.99% 90% rings/20 seconds SRS F Where possible calls to be answered by a human voice 7.04% 15.85% 11.59% 10% [Voicemail element only target = less than 10%]

This page is intentionally left blank

Page 232 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

Divisional Key Objectives:

TP1 Increase household recycling rate to 40%

Supporting TCT TCT3 Priority and It has been identified that recycling rates have fallen to around 34% following Strategy themes: rationale (why detailed analysis as part of the new refuse and recycling contract. The Mayor of Aligns to Corporate KPP1 are you doing London has recently published a revised waste strategy that has stretching Plan: KPP2 it?): recycling targets and also DEFRA has also recently revised its waste strategy KPP3 document reinforcing the waste hierarchy, focussing on re use and recycle. Departm ental SA2 The significant cost of sending waste to landfill makes any improvements in this Strategic Aims: SA3 objective financially beneficial to the City as well as the environmental benefits. Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources 1. Review all estate based Assistant Director recycling facilities and 1. Carry out a survey of (Cleansing Services) Page 233 deliver improved and current facilities. Staff and possible End April 2012 Clean City Awards & modernised facilities to 2. Design and Introduce Financial resources Recycling Manager encourage recycling new facilities Recycling Team

2. Carry out recycling participation rate survey Clean City Awards & Staff and possible End April 2012 Collate data across all estates Recycling Manager Financial resources

Assistant Director 3. Recruit additional (Cleansing Services) recycling assistant Appoint recycling support Staff and possible April/May 2012 Clean City Awards & resource on two year assistance. Financial resources Recycling Manager contract

4. Complete review of bulky waste and Open Collate data, analyse and Assistant Director Spaces green waste July 2012 produce a report with (Cleansing Services) Staff disposal services to recommendations. Open Spaces establish opportunities to increase recycling rate 5. Agree sites for location Assistant Director July 2012 sites agreed and installed Staff of 100 Renew recycling (Cleansing Services) 1 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

units across the City Highways Planning Assistant Director 6. Agree Renew bin Agree and Produce an (Cleansing Services) emptying protocol with adequate schedule for Clean City Awards & Staff and possible End July 2012 Enterprise and formally emptying the bins at an Recycling Manager Financial resources vary contract acceptable cost Enterprise Managed Services 7. Analyse survey and Assistant Director research findings and draft Produce a report with (Cleansing Services) Staff delivery strategy to attain recommendations. Clean City Awards & 40% recycling rate Recycling Manager 8. Formally report Assistant Director Produce a report for ‘Recycling Improvement’ Sept 2012 (Cleansing Services) Staff committee delivery plan to PHES Develop a template to Assistant Director Page 234 9. Monitor recycling produce a regular report (Cleansing Services) capture rates and delivery Sept 2012 tracking progress and Clean City Awards & Staff of agreed strategy identifying trends, issues Recycling Manager and projections. Recycling Team Money People Environment Managing Business Local risk budgets for literature Additional 2 year post as recycling Increased recycling will improve Partnership with local and new estate bin sheds etc support officer carbon footprint of operation residents associations, Enterprise and Renew bins Increased recycling will reduce will support value for money disposal costs

2 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP2 Deliver agreed area enhancement strategies to at least 3 new areas within the square mile (Aldgate, Liverpool Street and Fenchurch Street).

Supporting TCT To provide modern Priority and rationale (why are Strategy themes: services you doing it?): To deliver key departmental objectives and aims. Aligns to KKP1, KKP2, KKP4 Corporate Plan: Departmental To manage all activities Strategic Aims: and services that relate to the City’s streets To continue to renew and update the City’s streets and streetscene.

Page 235 Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Responsibility Resources Success 1. Submit Report Committee Approval Asst Directors Recruitment for additional Project Requesting approval of (Transportation & Management resource Public Consultation: Public Realm) May 2012 Aldgate June 2012 External Funding in Place Liverpool Street July 2012 Fenchurch Street June 2012 2. Source funding for Funding sources Asst Directors Staff Time High Priority Projects identified and (Transportation & External Funding Aldgate Nov 2012 approved by Public Realm) Liverpool Street April 2012 Committee and Fenchurch Street June 2012 relevant applications/ legal agreements made 3. Strategy Approved Court of Common Director of the Built Staff Time and Adopted as SPD by Council Approval Environment External Funding Court of Common Council October 2012 Aldgate March 2013 Liverpool Street November 2012

3 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

Fenchurch Street 4. Options Appraisal of Project Sub Project Manager Staff Time First High Priority Committee Approval External Funding Project April 2013 Aldgate September 2012 Liverpool Street February 2013 Fenchurch Street Money People Environment Managing Business Will clarify budgets needed and Improved accountability and Programme focuses upon Partnerships with local stakeholders monitoring protocols allocation of resources. Environmental Enhancement. including businesses, Members, Focus also on greening the residents associations and police City, encouraging walking and safe cycling

Page 236

4 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP3 Improve the effective delivery and monitoring of street works within the square mile. Supporting TCT * Supports our communities Priority and To improve the quality of streetworks in the Square Mile. Strategy themes: rationale (why Aligns to Corporate KKP1, KKP2 are you doing Plan: it?): Departmental Service delivery Strategic Aims: Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure o f Success Responsibility Resources 1. Introduce ‘non activity’ April 2012 Signage introduced and Assistant Highways Staff time signage (dependent on TfL being effectively used Director agreement in place) 2. Effectively mobilise new April 2012 – July 2012 Contract mobilised Assistant Highways Staff time, contractor Highways Maintenance effectively, with minimum Director

Page 237 Contract and terminate FM of disruption Conway contract. 3. Agree protocols for June 2012 Plan agreed & being Assistant Highways Staff time, contractor, delivery of 5 point utilised Director utilities communication plan with utilities / JB Riney 4. Commence extended May 2012 Works taking place in Assistant Highways Staff time, contractor, day working in traffic accordance with Director utilities sensitive but non-noise agreement sensitive locations 5. Plot all known projects / September 2012 City works scheduled to Transportation and Public Staff time, I.T. maintenance / utility works reduce traffic disruption Realm Director and strategic transportation works. Strategic Transportation Introduce enhanced Team Leader project management planning to minimise traffic congestion 6. Conduct monthly ‘Street April 2012/Ongoing Meeting diarised & held PA to Transportation and Staff time Works’ meeting Public Realm Director

5 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

7. Trial rapid curing By end May 2012 Trials underway Assistant Highways Staff time, utilities concrete Director ‘Core and Vac’ By end May 2012 8. Olympic moratorium in July-Sept 2012 Works planned in Assistant Highways Staff time, utilities place for streetworks accordance with Director moratorium 9. Agree protocol for TfL July 2012 Closer working with TfL Assistant Director (Local Staff time support re traffic lights in Transportation) relation to new schemes Strategic Transportation Team Leader 10. Agree objective July 2012 Performance Assistant Highways Staff time, IT measures to assess management framework Director effectiveness of ‘Street agreed and being utilised Strategic Transportation Works’ management Team Leader processes Page 238 11. Explore local July 2012 Agree actions necessary Assistant Director (Local Staff time, TfL transportation issues that to resolve and implement Transportation) are hindering effective data Strategic Transportation traffic management Team Leader 12. Compile monthly street April 2012/Ongoing Monthly data produced Assistant Highways Staff time works statistics Director Money People Environment Managing Business Additional costs anticipated: Team work needed, with possible Deliver improved traffic Partnership working with JB - Staff overtime training need. management and reduce traffic Riney, utilities and TfL - Data acquisition from TfL idling therefore improved air essential. - Possible IT development costs quality. Improved access for public and motorists.

6 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP4 Improve road safety outcomes entailing a review of past performance and agreeing a new Road Danger Reduction Plan

Supporting TCT Is Safer and Stronger. Priority and This objective is included in the Local Implementation Plan Strategy themes: Supports communities rationale (why at LIP 2011.3 (4f To reduce road traffic dangers and Aligns to Corporate SA2 are you doing casualties in the City, particularly fatal and serious Plan: it?): casualties) and ((4g) casualties among vulnerable road Departmental To provide modern services users ). It is linked to the Mayor of London’s Transport Strategic Aims: Strategy (Quality of Life and Safety & Security)

It is clearly not ‘healthy’ for people to be injured on streets within the City.

Exceeding the targets of the LIP to reduce road Page 239 casualties, and to achieve these more ambitious targets. Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources 1. Deliver agreed actions June 2012 Actions completed Transport Strategy and Staff from meeting with City Programmes Team cyclists Leader 2. Analyse all city accident May 2012 Analysis complete. Clear Road Safety Team Leader Staff details to establish feed into the RDRP common issues/potential safety improvements

3. Prepare Road Danger July 2012 Presented to P&T and Assistant Director (Local Staff Reduction Plan for S&W Committee Transportation) Publishing member approval 4. Publish 12 monthly July 2012 Presented to P&T and Assistant Director (Local Staff accident data analysis and S&W Committee Transportation) report to Streets and Walkways Committee on forward looking Action Plan

7 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

5. Deliver the Action Plan March 2013 Reduce casualties Road Safety Team Leader Extra staff time Education, Training and Additional revenue Publicity activity delivered resource Infrastructure changes programmed Additional capital resource (City). It is not possible to fund existing problems from S106 6. Hold bi monthly meeting On Going Integrated Programme Road Safety Team Leader Staff with CoL Police to share exists projects and intelligence Money People Environment Managing Business

Largely TfL L.I.P funding Road Safety Team possibly with Reduced confidence in cycling Working with City Police additional support from external and walking due to accident and TfL Page 240 consultants or contractors. figures will have carbon impact

8 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP5 To deliver the effective implementation of a time banding scheme for bagged waste

Supporting TCT To provide modern services Priority and This objective contributes to the City’s ambitions of being a Strategy themes: rationale (why world class city by improving the aesthetic appearance and Aligns to Corporate KPP1 are you doing cleanliness of the streets, removing obstructions from the Plan: KPP2 it?): pavement and proving better mobility for pedestrian users. It Departmental To manage all activities and will also help reduce litter by removing the opportunity for Strategic Aims: services that relate to the City’s people to leave lose litter on waste bags. This objective has streets been approved by the PHES committee. Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources 1. Visit all those registered concern or Recorded visits/ objecting to the scheme to ascertain detail of End of April Assistant Director Staff time possible communication to establish concerns/issues 2012 (Cleansing Services) finance details and actual issues Page 241 Number of premises where 2. Record all issues on spread sheet and By end May a solution has been agreed Assistant Director Staff time possible systematically agree resolution to each 2012 and adopted to comply with (Cleansing Services) finance individual address/business the new scheme. 3. Report progress on implementation to Approval of report by Assistant Director June 2012 Staff time PHES committee (Cleansing Services) 1. Produce a programme of inspections. 2. Record non- 4. Complete street by street survey of City to compliance. identify locations of bagged waste remaining Assistant Director End Sep 3. Apply enforcement on street and initiate enforcement action (Cleansing Services) 2012 policy. (informal/formal) 4. Record actions taken. Street Environment Team 5. Produce regular reports of non-compliance.

5. Final report to PHES Oct/Nov Approval of report Assistant Director Staff time 2012 (Cleansing Services)

9 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

Money People Environment Managing Business Existing local risk budgets Priority for Street Enforcement Improved visual impact of city Partnership with Officer Team. streets Enterprise. This will Some consultancy support necessary support value for money approach

Page 242

10 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP6 Improve project management practise entailing a review of the processes, functionality and resources used to manage projects, completing a comprehensive two year delivery programme and effective implementation of Project Vision.

Supporting TCT To provide modern services Priority and To deliver key departmental objectives and aims. As well as improve Strategy themes: rationale financial analysis and transparency. Aligns to KKP1, KKP2, KKP4 (why are Corporate Plan: you doing Departmental To manage all activities and it?): Strategic Aims: services that relate to the City’s streets To continue to renew and update the City’s streets and streetscene.

Page 243 Actions/Miles tones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources 1. Fully update Project Vision with all relevant project July 2012 100% of all initiated Team Leaders Staff Time data projects to be Project Managers uploaded 2. Update all RAG status reports on Project Vision April 2012/ 100% of all updates to Project Managers Staff Time monthly Ongoing be completed 3. Agree standard management reporting including trend June 2012 Management protocols Transportation & Public IT systems analysis etc agreed Realm Director Staff time 4. Accurately monitor officer time to deliver committee July 2012 System updated and Team Leaders Staff Time reports and projects in general input adjusted to produce monthly analysis all time on projects to include committee reporting and other corporate tasks. 5. Review effectiveness of all project processes and September Report to Director of Asst Directors Staff Time produce critique 2012 Built Environment (Transportation & Public Realm) 6. Establish ‘Streetworks’ impact of all projects and June 2012 Report format Asst Directors Staff Time

11 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

introduce routine consideration of ‘Streetworks’ impact in adjusted, and 100% of (Transportation & Public future reports reports to include Realm) 7. Agree budgets for : April 2012 Budgets set up Transportation and Public Staff Time i) Environmental Enhancement Section Realm Director ii) City Transportation section Asst Directors (Transportation & Public Realm) 8. Agree budget monitoring protocol April 2012 Protocol to be agreed Transportation and Public Staff Time Realm Director Asst Directors (Transportation & Public Realm) 8. Agree and report project pipeline to Streets and September Six monthly reports to Asst Directors Staff Time Walkways 2012 be produced for (Transportation & Public March 2013 Member consideration. Realm) Money People Environment Managing Business Page 244 Will clarify budgets needed Improved accountability and allocation of resources Programme focuses upon Partnerships with local and monitoring protocols. Environmental Enhancement. stakeholders including Focus also on greening the businesses, Members, City, encouraging walking residents associations and and safe cycling police

12 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP7 Ensure City of London effectively deliver effective local and strategic transportation support to Olympic games.

Supporting TCT To provide Priority and To support & deliver a successful Olympic Games for the City, for London and Strategy themes: modern rationale (why the Nation, including the minimisation of disruption to the City’s normal business, services are you doing visitor and residential functions. Aligns to Corporate KPP1 it?): Plan: KPP2 Departmental To manage Strategic Aims: all activities and services that relate to the City’s streets

Page 245 Actions/Milestones Targ et Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources 1. Assess, consult on, April 2012 Assessment & provisional Assistant Director (Local Staff time agree and deliver local agreement with LOCOG Transportation) transportation measures necessary to enable the May 2012 Public consultation Staff time, open event Grange Hotels to complete, objections Assistant Director (Local successfully considered & decided Transportation) accommodate the upon Paralympic delegates through the games July 2012 Construction complete Staff time, term contractor, Assistant Highways utilities Director 2. Hold 2 weekly Olympic April – September 2012 Meetings diarised & held PA to Transportation & Staff time Transport Coordination Public Realm Director meetings 3. Finalise Marathon April 2012 Route finalised Assistant Highways Staff time routes and assess Director implications for CoL June 2012 CoL contractor resources Assistant Highways Staff time, term contractor agreed Director Staff time, term contractor, July 2012 Highway adaptations Assistant Highways TfL funding 13 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

complete Director Staff time, funding, term Aug / Sept 2012 Staff support on the Day Assistant Highways contractor (x3) Director

4. Finalise Torch Relay April 2012 Appoint Event Manager Assistant Highways Staff time, funding required routes and assess Director implications for CoL. Staff time May 2012 Route finalised Assistant Highways Director Staff time, contractor, funding June 2012 Support to route animation agreed Assistant Highways Staff time, term contractor Director July 2012 Staff support on the day Assistant Highways Director Page 246 5. Agree Highway April 2012 Agree Highway Assistant Highways Staff time Management Delivery Maintenance Plan Director Plans for games duration April 2012 Agree Licensing Assistant Highways Staff time Authorisation Plan Director

May 2012 Agree Parking Assistant Highways Staff time Enforcement Plan Director

May 2012 Agree Streetworks Assistant Highways Staff time Management Plan Director

June 2012 Agree Emergency Works Staff time Plan Assistant Highways Director June 2012 Agree Emergency Staff time Response & Contingency Planning documentation Transportation and Public Realm Director

14 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

6. Maintain transport Weekly commencing April Web site updated weekly PA to Transportation and Staff time related issues on CoL 2012 Public Realm Director website 7. Highways & April 2012 Identification of SPOCs Transportation and Public Staff time Transportation reporting Realm Director to CoL BOCC June 2012 Reporting procedure & Transportation and Public Staff time staff rota agreed Realm Director

July-Sept 2012 Daily reporting to BOCC Transportation and Public Staff time Realm Director 8. Complete all Highways June 2012 Major resurfacing Assistant Highways Staff time, term contractor maintenance works complete Director necessary in preparation Staff time, term contractor for the games July 2012 Major maintenance works Assistant Highways complete Director Staff time, term contractor, Page 247 GLA funding July 2012 Bridge lighting Assistant Highways refurbishment complete Director 9. Deliver daily Olympic July-Sep 2012 Tweet completed TBC Staff time Transport Tweet throughout the duration of the games 10. Assess, consult on, May 2012 Assessment & provisional Assistant Director (Local Staff time agree and deliver local agreement with LOCOG Transportation) transportation measures necessary to facilitate Publicity National Olympic houses June 2012 Assistant Director (Local Staff time and other non-competition Transportation) venues Construction complete July 2012 Assistant Director Staff time, term contractor, (Highways) utilities 11. Conduct review of Oct 2012 Review complete Transportation and Public Staff time Olympic lessons learnt Realm Director Money People Environment Managing Business Additional staff costs for overtime Training re. plans and emergency Deliver safe environment for Working in partnership with term

15 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

etc. arrangements etc. games delivery. maintenance, contractor, resident, Staff will be required to work utilities and City Businesses. additional TOIL/overtime and the recruitment of possible contractors.

Page 248

16 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

TP8 Conducting a strategic review of street lighting.

Supporting TCT Priority and With much of the City’s street lighting inventory being used long after its anticipated life Strategy themes: rationale (why span, this project aims to: Aligns to Corporate are you doing • Detail the condition and effectiveness of the City’s current street lighting Plan: it?): inventory; Departmental Service • Identify the most suitable street lighting systems for the City as a result of a series Strategic Aims: delivery of new technology trials; • Recommend what levels of area based street lighting may be appropriate to suit the City’s future requirements; • Recommend how best to deliver the potential long-term energy and maintenance cost savings, and to meet anticipated carbon reduction targets. Actions/Milestones Target Da te Measure of Success Responsibility Resources

Page 249 1. Establish emergency April 2012 Contacts established Assistant Highways Staff time service contacts Director 2. Gather potential May 2012 Data gathered Assistant Highways Staff time equipment data & Director specifications

3. Gather survey data May 2012 Data gathered Assistant Highways Staff time from Local Transportation Director

4. Initial trials of new April 2012 Trials underway Assistant Highways Staff time, capital project funds cyclo-control system Director

5. Site surveys, sample June 2012 Surveys & criteria set Assistant Highways Staff time, capital project funds trials, set performance Director criteria 6. Member briefing & July 2012 Consultation complete Assistant Highways Staff time, project funds public consultation Director 7. Performance Aug 2012 Evaluation complete Assistant Highways Staff time evaluation Director 8. Report evaluation to October 2012 Report submitted Assistant Highways Staff time

17 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

Members Director Money People Environm ent Managing Business Costs of trials (capital), Staff Possible Training. Will reduce carbon footprint of Partnership working with JB Riney. time, and possible I.T. costs. operation. Will reduce running costs of streetlights.

Page 250

18 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DS1 Maximise workload in the challenging competitive market place through more direct contact with development intelligence from sections of the new department.

Supporting TCT * Is competitive and promotes Priority 1. a) To ensure that the office remains the principal provider of Strategy themes: opportunity and Building Control services in the City of London Aligns to Corporate KPP1 & KPP2 rationale Plan: (why are b) To provide sufficient workload for the office to cover its Departmental To improve the service to you doing chargeable expenditure, maintain the variety of projects to maintain Strategic Aims: developers and occupiers it?): levels of specialism and provide continuity of service provision.

Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Schedule quarterly September 2012 Quarterly meetings with Marketing Team Staff time & goodwill

Page 251 2012/13 meetings with CPAT, monthly CPAT and Planning to information stored in capture potential clients Future Work folder Produce database with March 2012 90% contact recorded Principal BCO Staff time contacts and follow up within a month of entry actions, which is monitored onto database checked by monthly report Produce competitive fee September 2012 Report twice annually to Senior Management Staff time quotes, monitoring bids DMT on bids won and lost, lost and won and at local level analyse results Maximise presence on the September 2012 An increase in the number Marketing Team Central website support new website, an increase of hits, downloads, on-line Website adoption of volume of online payments applications & payments SharePoint Staff time & training Money People Environment Managing Business The purpose of this objective is to Increased demands on staff time. If work is lost to competitors on Management of time spent and generate income from increased Software training (SharePoint) lowest cost basis checks on input from other departments. number of applications. compliance to national standards would be reduced.

19 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DS2 Reduce departmental overheads through increased use of flexible/mobile working

Supporting TCT * Is competitive and promotes Priority Reduce the amount of office space occupied Strategy themes: opportunity and rationale Meet customer expectations Aligns to Corporate KPP1 & KPP2 (why are Plan: you doing Enable remote working Departmental To improve the service to it?): Strategic Aims: developers and occupiers

Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Transfer all project data to March 2012 SharePoint document District Surveyor Windows 7 SharePoint management operational Senior Administrative Office 2010 Officer All other DS software

Page 252 compatible with above. Extend SharePoint to September 2012 Main DS storage of data District Surveyor IS support replace H drive files within SharePoint Senior Administrative Staff time Officer Investigate mobile devices July 2012 Report produced on the District Surveyor IS support e.g. netbooks, Ipads, smart options to put to DMT for Budget phones and Citrix consideration of alternative working patterns Trail during Olympics August 2012 Work standards maintained or All staff improved during period of alternative working Money People Environment Managing Business Possible increased expenditure on IT Change in work patterns Reduced carbon footprint of staff, Additional controls required to equipment and software. More IT training required. by increased use of home manage staff in remote efficient use of Guildhall floor space Management refresher training working and mobile working. locations. with cost saving. on home working DES issues.

20 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DS3 Improve financial transparency and VfM, as well as compliance with CIPFA and internal financial regulations by monitoring recording of staff time against projects and work classes.

Supporting TCT * Is competitive and promotes Priority To ensure: Strategy themes: opportunity and rationale • The service demonstrates value for money Aligns to Corporate KPP1 & KPP2 (why are • Compliance with CIPFA guidelines Plan: you doing • Correct budget allocation Departmental To improve the service to it?): • Customer satisfaction by ensuring value for money and Strategic Aims: developers and occupiers transparency

Actions/Milest ones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Modify Timemaster to May 2012 Staff inputting time against Assistant District Surveyor Action from Markets Page 253 record against relevant latest codes Dept. codes Staff accurately recording June 2012 100% complete All staff Staff time time spent on tasks and timesheets tested by line projects management check and monthly reports 6 monthly analysis of time September 2012 6 monthly review of Senior Management Staff time allocation to ensure CIPFA adherence to CIPFA compliance guidelines Review of Building January 2013 Review of charges and Senior Management Staff time Regulations charges to income produced annually ensure competitive quotes in preparation for and VfM committee report

Money People Env ironment Managing Business Ensuring budgetary compliance Increased demands on staff time. No adverse environmental effects Improve customer satisfaction. with CIPFA guidelines.

21 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DS4 Deliver successful graduate/junior training programmes, ensuring succession planning within the division and profession

Supporting TCT * Is competitive and promotes Priority To ensure: Strategy themes: opportunity and Aligns to Corporate KPP1 & KPP2 rationale • practical experience is added to proven academic ability Plan: (why are • progress is made to professional membership Departmental Provide better service to you doing • an efficient and productive workforce for the future Strategic Aims: developers it?): To develop our staff

Actions/Milestones Tar get Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Develop and monitor in- April 2012 Programme produced and Deputy District Time house training programme December 2012 agreed by management and Surveyor staff. Reviewed at 3 monthly Management

Page 254 intervals Training carried out in Continuous throughout the 3 monthly reviews, Deputy District Time accordance with the year programme targets being met Surveyor programme District Surveyor

Trainees rotated amongst September 2012 All trainees have new line- Deputy District teams manager Surveyor Assistant District Surveyor Progression through the September 2012 Trainees moved to career District Surveyor career grade grade based on experience and knowledge Money People Environment Managing Business Gradual additional salary Giving and receiving of training No adverse environmental effects Continually reviewing expenditure but offset against succession planning. savings made when replacing Career grade to be reviewed and experienced higher graded agreed with Corporate HR. members of staff

22 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

PP1 To update the statutory Development Plan (LDF) for the City of London to provide a context for sustainable growth to 2026, including development of the Community Infrastructure Levy

Supporting TCT * Supports all 5 TCT strategy themes and aids their Priority and Updating the City’s statutory development Strategy themes: implementation. rationale (why plan policies in accordance with national Aligns to Corporate KKP1, KKP2 are you doing and strategic guidance to provide a spatial Plan: it?): strateg y for the City’s development to 2026. Departmental Strategic Aims: Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Prepare City Community Draft spending procedure Public consultation on Policy & Performance Director Development Plan Infrastructure Levy (CIL) and report to H&PFG June preliminary CIL and draft aided by Assistant Director Team the procedure for prioritising 2012; to members Sept prioritisation procedure Oct (Planning Policy)

Page 255 CIL spending. 2012. 2012; draft CIL March Public consultation on 2013; preliminary CIL Oct 2012; [KPI PP1]. draft CIL March 2013. Prepare Development P&T Cttee approval Nov P&T Cttee approval Nov Policy & Performance Director Development Plan Management DPD as the 2012, public consultation 2012, public consultation aided by Assistant Director Team next part of the LDF. Jan 2013. Jan 2013, submission June (Planning Policy) Maintain other statutory Update LDS annually. 2013 [KPI PP2]. elements of the LDF. Update LDS annually. Prepare Supplementary 5 Conservation area SPDs adopted in Policy & Performance Director Various DBE Planning Documents as part strategies and the accordance with published overview. Some SPDs are Teams according to of LDF Sustainable Streets timetable in Local prepared by other Divisions in content. Manual by March 2013. Development Scheme. the Dept. Money People Environment Managing Business SPD documents will be prepared Staff may need extra training to keep Supplementary Planning Public consultation & liaison and consulted on in batches and up with the changing context, using Documents will provide further with neighbouring boroughs are online to reduce costs and avoid CPD, RTPI training season tickets guidance for achieving a more essential. Main risk is content consultation fatigue. and other free updates available. sustainable City in the future. of the NPPF due in March ‘12.

23 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

PP2 Develop the Corporate Geographic Information System (GIS) and support its wider use, and to increase corporate data sharing to boost corporate efficiency, effectiveness and service delivery.

Supporting TCT Supports all 5 TCT strategy themes by improving Priority and Corporate GIS Team provides a service Strategy themes: access to GIS data. rationale (why to the whole City Corporation. Greater Aligns to Corporate KKP1, KKP2 are you doing corporate use of GIS increases Plan: it?): corporate data sharing, increases Departmental Develop Corporate GIS and support its wider use efficiency and effectiveness and can Strategic Aims: improve service delivery. Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Agree and implement action Review existing use June Review report June 2012; Policy & Performance Director Corporate GIS plan for increased use of GIS in 2012; agree changes to agree proposals Sept aided by Corporate GIS Team; DBE staff DBE Divisions; increase use Sept 2012; 2012; implement Oct 2012. Manager with mapping implement Oct 2012. skills.

Page 256 Increase corporate GIS Quarterly corporate user Article in The Leader on awareness and use meetings; article in The GIS and new web pages Leader; promote with before promotion on GIS Corporate GIS Day Nov Day. 2012

Provide corporate GIS input to Corporate GIS input to projects as requested by IS projects as requested. Participate in 100% of Dept business relationship relevant projects. managers Ensure that the internal & the Available 98% of working Available 98% of working Policy & Performance Director Corporate GIS public–facing GIS services are day excluding IS Division day excluding IS Division aided by Corporate GIS Team available service disruptions [KPI service disruptions [KPI Manager PP5]. PP5]. Update GIS software Arc10 software upgrade Arc10 software upgrade Policy & Performance Director Corporate GIS tested by Oct 2012 and tested by Oct 2012 and aided by Corporate GIS Team ready for desktop rollout ready for desktop rollout by Manager by end 2012 [KPI PP5]. end 2012 [KPI PP5]. GIS integration with new Support projects & attend GIS integrated with Policy & Performance Director Corporate GIS corporate software, e.g. new project boards as needed relevant new corporate aided by Corporate GIS Team 24 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

Highways Mgt System (HyMS) to ensure integration. software Manager Data on internet by June 2012. Money People Environment Managing Business Corporate GIS facilitates significant Staff may need extra training to Greater use of Corporate GIS Corporate GIS Team corporate efficiency savings through maintain technical skills in the reduces the need for paper maps consults regularly with the resultant sharing of data and Corporate GIS Team to meet and the duplication of records, existing and potential maps across the organisation. corporate needs for greater use of thereby reducing the corporate GIS users. GIS. organisation’s effect on the Main risk to delivery is non- environment. involvement of Corporate GIS Team in relevant spatial projects.

Page 257

25 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

PP3 Influence national & strategic planning & transportation policy context to benefit City’s future development

Supporting TCT Supports all 5 TCT strategy themes and aids their Priority and Need to ensure that national and strategic Strategy themes: implementation. rationale (why planning and transportation policy context Aligns to Corporate Aligns with Vision to support and promote City as a are you doing remains complementary to the City’s Plan: world leader in international and financial business it?): economic role and future development as services. set out in the City’s development plan Departmental Aligns with P&T strategic aims SA1-SA4. Update (LDF Core Strategy). Strategic Aims: for DBE aims once known. Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Respond to Central Govt Respond within 3 month Manage localism, Policy & Performance Director Development Plan national policy initiatives as consultation deadline, neighbourhood planning & aided by Assistant Director Team; Monitoring statutory consultee to ensure agreed by Members or change of use proposals (Planning Policy) & Information

Page 258 they take account of City- Chief Officer as so that they are compatible Team; Strategic specific issues appropriate. with the City’s primary Transport Team. business role. Influence London Plan and Respond within 3 month Response leads to Policy & Performance Director Development Plan related changes during consultation deadline, changes that benefit the aided by Assistant Director Team; Monitoring drafting and through public agreed by Members or City’s future development. (Planning Policy) & Information consultation timely Chief Officer as Team; Strategic responses. appropriate. Transport Team. Agree working procedures Agreed working Internal procedures Planning Services and Dev. Management for when Mayoral CIL is procedures for when satisfactory & good Development Director, aided Division; Dev. operative. Mayoral CIL is operative relations with GLA over by Policy & Performance Plan Team; in April 2012. Review in viability issues especially Director, Assistant Director Chamberlain’s Sept 2012. during the first year. (Planning Policy). FSU3. Money People Environment Managing Business CIL Regulations allow some CIL- Development Plan team may need Planning policy work will continue Close liaison with CPAT, EDO related preparatory work costs to extra training to keep up with the to provide a development plan and GLA officers is essential. be set against future CIL income. changing context, using CPD, RTPI policy context that encourages a Mayoral election in May 2012 training season tickets and other more sustainable City in the provides uncertainty and risk free updates available. future. to existing relationships.

26 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

PP4 Planning data monitoring, analysis, and updated submissions to national gazetteer hub or Mayor in accordance with legal agreements

Supporting TCT Supports all 5 TCT strategy themes by monitoring Priority and Monitoring change in the City is essential Strategy themes: their implementation. rationale (why for evidence-based policy review & Aligns to Corporate Aligns with Strategic Aim to provide modern efficient are you doing implementation, & provides a corporate Plan: & high quality local services. it?): data resource; regular data submissions Departmental Aligns with P&T Dept strategic aims SA4 to provide consistent with national and regional legal Strategic Aims: high quality, cost effective, professional services. agreements. [Update for DBE aims ] Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Development pipeline Development Info & Development Info & Policy & Performance Director Monitoring & monitoring & regular Schedules published June Schedules published June aided by Assistant Director Information Team

Page 259 publication & December [KPI PP3]. & December [KPI PP3]. (Planning Policy) Regular updates to the Updates weekly (Property Timely submissions and Policy & Performance Director Monitoring & National Address Gazetteer Gazetteer) & monthly improve the gazetteer aided by Assistant Director Information Team & the London Development (Street Gazetteer). match to non-domestic (Planning Policy) Database Monthly LDD updates. rates records from 80% to 85% during 2012/13 [KPI PP4]. Prepare evidence reports & AMR replacement Dec Reports & maps are timely, Policy & Performance Director Monitoring & maps including AMR 2012 [KPI PP3]; initial relevant & error-free. aided by Assistant Director Information Team replacement & Census Census analysis Dec (Planning Policy) 2011results 2012; Public Access Map ongoing. Update street naming & Authorise all new Site visit to check 100% Policy & Performance Director Monitoring & building numbering developments 3 months occupied new aided by Assistant Director Information Team authorisations before completion. developments display (Planning Policy) correct names & numbers. Money People Environment Managing Business Evidence reports are only Staff may need extra training to Accurate address gazetteers and Best practice maintained published online to save keep up with the changing technical street numbering aid efficient through membership of resources. Gazetteer is a shared context, using CPD, RTPI training record keeping and navigation in London Gazetteers

27 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

corporate addressing resource season tickets and free updates the City, thereby saving Custodians Group. Main risk leading to efficiencies elsewhere available. environmental resources. to delivery is meeting in the organisation. changing software & user needs.

Page 260

28 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DM1 Deliver and administer an effective town planning service ensuring an efficient service to developers and occupiers; encouraging the development of high quality, sustainable buildings.

Supporting TCT Strategy * Is competitive and promotes Priority and themes: opportunity rationale To meet the objectives of the Golden Thread and in * Supports our communities (why are you particular the adopted LDF Core Strategy * Protects, promotes and doing it?): enhances our environment Aligns to Corporate Plan: KKP1, KKP2 Departmental Strategic Aims: Provide better service to developers and occupiers To develop our staff Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resourc

Page 261 es No. of permissions with BREEAM pre- September 2012 75% indicating a potential Planning Services & Additiona assessments March 2013 rating of Excellent or above Development Director l training reported twice annually Assistant Directors perhaps Planning Officers through CPD. Ensure staff are well trained to deliver September 2012 Production of bi-annual Planning Services & Time and quality decision taking. Encouraging March 2013 training evaluation reports Development Director additional membership of appropriate professional 30 th September 2012 Assistant Directors support bodies. 31 st March 2013 HR Business Partner from the RTPI status and training HRBP as needs discussed at appraisals. required.

Improve the quality and efficiency of Presentation to DM SMT Greater efficiency and better Planning Services & Staff time application processing by reviewing and – September 2012 tracking of cases including Development Director to mapping all procedures of the planning validation and consultation Assistant Directors conduct process and applications Bi-annual random documentation. Planning Officers clear checks: review, December 2012 Introduction of improved assessm 29 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

March 2013 procedures, with random ent and checks on timescales. improve ment of procedur es.

To demonstrate the evolution of September 2012 Present bi-annual City Planning Officer buildings, promoting high quality March 2013 presentations/reports to Planning Services & inclusive buildings in accordance with User/CAAC panel Development Director the LDF Core Strategy. demonstrating the Assistant Directors enhancement to schemes achieved during the negotiation phase Money People Environment Managing Business Page 262 There are significant changes expected in Staff may need additional training to Staff will continue to expand their The division is development, particularly due to CIL. ensure up to date legal and best knowledge of sustainable building currently Additional staff resources maybe required to practise knowledge, this will be done good practise to reduce as far as reviewing administer this additional income revenue. through CPD, RTPI training season possible, the impact of buildings procedures to ticket and other legal updates on the environment. ensure available. efficiency and Close working with access team to best practice is ensure inclusive design. followed.

30 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DM2 To secure, manage and monitor S106/CIL and other legal arrangements in relation to development management.

Supporting TCT Strategy * Is competitive and promotes Priority and themes: opportunity rationale To meet the objectives of the Golden Thread and in * Supports our communities (why are particular the adopted LDF Core Strategy you doing Aligns to Corporate Plan: KKP1, KKP2 it?): To meet the 2004 S106 Planning Obligations Report Departmental Strategic Aims: Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resou rces Set up a mechanism for processing July 2012 Reports approved and Planning Services & Additio

Page 263 the Mayors CIL, and producing October 2012 submitted to TfL: Development Director nal CIL quarterly financial reports January 2013 July 2012 Asst. Director Planning training April 2013 October 2012 Policy . January 2013 S106 Planning Officers Chamb April 2013 erlains support To continue to implement efficient April 2012 System will be operational Planning Services & Suppor procedures in relation to S106 and Review July 2012 from April 2012 Development Director t from integrate CIL procedures and Review after 4 months to Asst. Director Planning Chamb processes into this. assess efficiency and process Policy erlains S106 Planning Officers staff CPD for Officer s

Update and revise Planning Public Consultation Public consultation will begin Planning Services & Suppor Obligation SPD to reflect changes in September 2012 September 2012 Development Director t from policy and practise across all Asst. Director Planning Chamb spending departments as well as the Policy erlains introduction of our own CIL S106 Planning Officers staff

31 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

To update the format of the S106 Report agreed at May 2013 Reports submitted to P&T Planning Services & Suppor Annual Monitoring Report to include P&T Committee Policy & Committee/Policy Resources Development Director t from details of Mayor CIL receipts, Resources Asst. Director Planning Chamb administration spend and agreed Policy erlains income S106 Planning Officers staff

Money People Environme nt Managing Business Procedure and mechanisms will be set up to Staff may need additional training to Until 2019 all Mayoral CIL monies The new CIL ensure income streams are allocated within ensure up to date legal and best practise will be used for the development is a priority of time limits knowledge, this will be done through of , the outcome of the the Mayors, CPD, RTPI training season ticket and project should provide more and we need Page 264 other legal updates available. accessible stations entrances, as to adopt good well as more opportunity for retail, practise in Consideration of future resourcing needs street enhancement and green order to for this function. spaces progress the CoL CIL in 2014.

32 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DM3 To facilitate the planning aspects of the major infrastructure proposals required in the City eg Thames Tunnel, Crossrail, Bank station upgrade, Thames Water mains replacement programme etc, and to secure the best outcome for the City.

Supporting TCT * Is competitive and promotes Priority Strategy themes: opportunity and To meet the objectives of the Golden Thread and in particular * Supports our communities rationale the adopted LDF Core Strategy * Protects, promotes and (why are enhances our environment you doing Aligns to Corp orate KKP1, KKP2 it?): Plan: Departmental Strategic To provide a better service to our Aims: developers and occupiers

Page 265 Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resources Proposals in relation to Thames Respond and negotiate Achieve project, modified Planning Services & Additional admin Tunnel as required with as necessary to take into Development Director support decisions taken with account City objectives Assistant Director (West) agreed timescales. Comments and approvals in Respond and negotiate The City has a successful Planning Services & relation to Crossrail delivered as required with outcome of programme in Development Director within agreed times. decisions taken within relation to Crossrail Act Assistant Director (West) agreed periods. schedule 3, 7, 9 Through negotiation, secure Respond as required Improving gains in Planning Services & archaeological recording during with decisions taken archaeological information Development Director the Thames Water Main within agreed periods. and making this publically Assistant Director Replacements available through an onsite (Historic Environment) presentations, and publication of results. Money People Environment Managing Business There maybe additional cost required to Additional staff maybe required. Environmental impact is We anticipate successful bring in staff to ensure these priorities minimum relationships with are completed within timescales set partners during these externally. projects

33 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

DM4 Through the planning process ensure that the quality of the City’s environment is protected and enhanced, safeguard its heritage and special character and make it a more pleasant and inclusive place in which to work and live.

Supporting TCT Strategy * Is competitive and promotes Priority and themes: opportunity rationale To meet the objectives of the Golden Thread and in * Supports our communities (why are particular the adopted LDF Core Strategy * Protects, promotes and enhances you doing our environment it?): * Is vibrant and culturally rich Aligns to Corporate KKP1, KKP2 Plan: Departmental Strategic To deliver a better service to our Aims: developers and occupiers Page 266 Actions/Milestones Target Date Measure of Success Responsibility Resource s Improvement to historic environment March 2013 Addition of new data sets to Planning Services & record the uniform module eg. Development Director Historic Parks and Gardens. Assistant Directors Planning Officers To demonstrate the evolution of September 2012 Present bi-annual City Planning Officer buildings, promoting high quality March 2013 presentations/reports to Planning Services & inclusive buildings in accordance User/CAAC panel Development Director with the LDF Core Strategy. demonstrating the Assistant Directors enhancement to schemes achieved during the negotiation phase Produce 6 Conservation Area Public consultations Planning Services & No Character summaries anticipated May/June 2012; Development Director additional Smithfield August 2012 Oct/Nov 2012 Assistant Directors resources Bow Lane Planning Officers anticipated Queen Street P&TC approval July March 2013 2012/February 2013 Fenchurch Street Station

34 Department of the Built Environment Appendix E

St Paul’s Cathedral publication on website and adoptation as SPD

Money People Enviro nment Managing Business Staff training to ensure procedures are in Staff may need additional training to Better City environment, as well Delivery of core place ensure up to date knowledge, this will as the encouragement of job working with be done through CPD and other free sensitive and sustainable reuse of department training available existing buildings and the enhancement of biodiversity.

Page 267

35 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 268 Department of the Built Environment Appendix F

Health & Safety Top ‘X’ Reporting

Reference: Task Hazard and Consequence Rating Likelihood Rating Risk Proposed Action Risk Revised Tolerance Current Tolerance Revised

1 Inspecting • Imminent collapse 3 Major disasters - hardly 2 6 Emergency Planning 3 Dangerous • Falling objects ever. procedures in place - only Structures • Electricity/ Fire authorised personnel to • Toxic substances Minor incidents caused respond to Dangerous • Trips and falls by natural occurrences/ Structures call-outs and man. (likelihood 10 enter buildings. Page 269 times a year). Take advice from Fire Brigade and emergency services.

PPE issued and monitored.

January 2012 1 Department of the Built Environment Appendix F

Reference: Task Hazard and Consequence Rating Likelihood Rating Risk Proposed Action Risk Revised Tolerance Current Tolerance Revised

2 Entering Confined • Gasses 3 Regular inspections of 2 6 Atmosphere checks 3 Spaces/ Working • Low Oxygen sewers undertaken undertaken continuously. in Sewers • Rising water levels (Daily). • Entrapment Emergency evacuation • Falling debris Rotting organic matter procedures – staff attend creates gasses. Confined Spaces Training Rising water levels including periodic testing Page 270 following heavy rain. and familiarisation.

Slip & trips. PPE issued and monitored.

Breathing Apparatus issued.

First aid training provided.

January 2012 2 Department of the Built Environment Appendix F

Reference: Task Hazard and Consequence Rating Likelihood Rating Risk Proposed Action Risk Revised Tolerance Current Tolerance Revised

3 Staff operating Collision 3 Trade vehicles 2 6 Code of practice for 3 vehicles in areas • causing injury to supervised where designated drivers in with pedestrians; staff appropriate. place and will be reviewed or, operating in • staff causing injury and issued to all relevant areas were there to other persons Staff operate in staff. is vehicle industrial sites with movement; trade constant vehicle Walbrook Wharf – vehicles making movements. automatic barriers Page 271 deliveries installed to depot. Staff drive cars, vans and operate fork lifts etc. Training and licensing of Services have specific all fork lift truck users. policies / practices in place. Restricted access to pedestrians via signage. Where appropriate, PPE and training provided.

January 2012 3 Department of the Built Environment Appendix F

Reference: Task Hazard and Consequence Rating Likelihood Rating Risk Proposed Action Risk Revised Tolerance Current Tolerance Revised

4 Lone working, out Lone working 2 Officers may carry out 2 4 Ongoing issues with Lone 2 of hours and • Violence – enforcement action Working across services. security duties including physical which can cause force, verbal tension. Review of existing abuse, threats, practices currently being gestures and Services have lone undertaken to identify harassment working policies / additional measures/ • Illness whilst on practices in place but practices. Page 272 duty there are inconsistencies in policies. 5 Site Visits • Collision 2 Major disasters - hardly 1 2 Staff guidance note in place, 2 • Trips and falls ever. intranet updated as required • Vermin infestations Minor incidents caused • Outlook calendars used by all Fatality / RTA’s by natural occurrences/ • Lone working staff • Noise issues man. (likelihood less • Working at height than 2 per year) PPE issued

January 2012 4 Department of the Built Environment Appendix G

Learning and Development Plan – 2012/13

Priority Objective linked to Business Plan: Key skills/knowledge /qualifications Development Methods (by when) st To improve service to developers and • Knowledge of best practice. • Critical reading 31 March occupiers within the City, by ensuring a • Management and • Coaching 2013 more joined up departmental approach, leadership skills • Team briefings implementing a co-ordinated and • Knowledge of Project managed service throughout the Management systems development process • Project Management skills • Knowledge of how other teams/departments work

Page 273 st Strengthen financial management to • Financial understanding • Budget holders Insight lunch 31 March enable effective financial planning • Knowledge of best practice. • Presentations 2013 • Management Skills • Team briefings • Financial training • Cross-departmental working

st Update the Development Plan (LDF) for • Knowledge of best practice. • Individual and team CPD 31 March the City of London, including • Knowledge of legal changes • Conferences/seminars 2013 development of the City’s Community • Knowledge of changing • Team briefings Infrastructure Levy (CIL) context • RTPI season ticket seminars • Legal updates • Cross-departmental working

st To secure, manage and monitor • Knowledge of changing • Individual and team CPD 31 March S106/CIL and other legal arrangements 2013 Department of the Built Environment Appendix G

in relation to development management context. • Conferences/seminars • Team Working • Team briefings • RTPI season ticket seminars • Legal updates • Cross-departmental working

st Improve effective delivery and • Knowledge of changing • Team briefings 31 March monitoring of streetworks within the technical context • Cross-team working 2013 square mile

Deliver and administer an effective town • Knowledge of best practice. • Individual and team CPD st planning service ensuring an efficient • Knowledge of legal changes • RTPI season ticket seminars 31 March service to developers and occupiers; • Other free conferences/seminars 2013 encouraging the development of high •

Page 274 Team briefings quality, sustainable buildings. • Cross-departmental working

st Reduce road traffic dangers and • Knowledge of best practice. • Individual and team CPD 31 March casualties in the City • Knowledge of legal changes • Conferences/seminars 2013 and trends • City of London Police updates and briefings • TfL updates and briefings

st Deliver Area Enhancement Strategies • Knowledge of Project • Training on Project Management 31 March for the Aldgate, Liverpool Street and Management systems software 2013 Fenchurch Street areas • Project Management skills • Sharing of best practice • Knowledge of how other • Ongoing evaluation teams/departments work • Classroom based Project Management training • Job Shadowing Department of the Built Environment Appendix G

• Cross-team working

st Develop the Corporate Geographic • Technical skills to meet • Software specific traing 31 March Information System (GIS) and support changing needs • Sharing of best practice 2013 its wider use (links to SA4) • Knowledge of and ability to • Ongoing evaluation apply new software • Updates on Arc10 software • Cross-departmental working

st Maximise workload in the challenging • Knowledge of best practice. • Individual and team CPD 31 March competitive market place through more • Knowledge of legal changes • Professional seminars 2013 direct contact with development • Knowledge of changing • Other free conferences/seminars intelligence from sections in the new context • Team briefings department

Page 275 st Achieve Flexible/Mobile working for • Knowledge of best practice. • Sharepoint software training 31 August staff by August 2012, to ensure a trial • Knowledge of legal changes • DSE H&S refreshers 2012 can be run during the Olympic period • Knowledge of changing • Team briefings context • IT skills for use of handheld technology

st Deliver the effective implementation of a • Knowledge of best practice. • Team briefings 31 March time banding scheme for bagged waste • Knowledge of legal changes 2013 • Knowledge of changing context

st Support and develop our staff to ensure • Knowledge of best practice. • Professional qualifications 31 March each person achieves their potential • Knowledge of legal changes • Appraisals 2013 • Knowledge of changing • Individual and team CPD context • Professional seminars • Other free conferences/seminars Department of the Built Environment Appendix G

• Team briefings • Critical reading • Mentoring/Mentee • Secondments • Trainee schemes

Page 276 Department of the Built Environment Appendix H

city of london of city

Department of the Built Environment Workforce Planning 2012/2013

This document outlines the key workforce planning issues that the department will be focussing on during 2012/2013

Page 277 Department of the Built Environment Appendix H

WORKFORCE PROFILE DATA The key workforce profile data for the department is included in the appendices of the Business Plan. While it is important to analyse this data and understand what it is telling us, the focus of workforce planning this year is on what we know to be true of the department’s workforce, and taking tangible action to move closer to the ideal workforce.

To that end, this workforce plan presents the key pragmatic challenges facing the department’s workforce and planned actions to help resolve these.

Current position As a new department created from a combination of previously established departments, the Department is keen to assess and improve the management capability of managers typically in grades F/G and H in the newly formed department to ensure that it addresses five key issues as follows:

Key Issue 1 Without assessing the management capability of middle managers that currently exists, it is difficult to prepare for the future services that the department may be required to provide. This issue focuses on management behaviours and may need to be developed over some considerable time

Action Analysis of person specifications to assess profiles for roles. Assess through appraisals and management information gaps in key skills. Evaluate the effectiveness of the profiling exercise currently being undertaken by Transportation & Public Realm as a tool to assist with assessing existing skills in other divisions. Plan for the development of key skills, where identified.

Key Issue 2 There is a high proportion of the workforce in the over 50 category. Whilst this may mean that the department is in danger of losing the key knowledge and skills required to carry out the services it currently delivers, it has sufficient time to consider succession to minimise this risk.

Action Identify critical services Identify any employees who have indicated their intention to retire and who provide these critical services. Ensure short-term that there is a plan to transfer knowledge/skills prior to their departure. Identify a longer term plan to ensure that knowledge and skills are transferred and learned to allow for succession. The Actions at Key Issue 1 will assist with this.

Page 278 Department of the Built Environment Appendix H

Key issue 3 There is a need for a more integrated approach to the way the department works in order to effectively achieve the purpose of forming the new department. The capability of our managers is important to ensure that this happens.

Action Encouragement and adoption of the following practices:

• Identifying staff to partake in specific projects across the department and organisation • Identifying staff to shadow others across divisions • Encouraging secondments where there are opportunities • Sharing knowledge across divisions.

A key factor in the success of such working practices is freeing up the time that people are spending fire-fighting. Work is currently being undertaken to achieve a more joined-up approach on works and how they are programmed, planned and measured.

This work will involve:-

• Improved management of information and communication • Identifying areas of duplication across and within divisions • Implementing new processes where it is identified they can be streamlined • Process benchmarking with other departments or other local authorities to improve processes.

Key Issue 4 Inconsistencies identified in the management of sickness, indicates that there may be a gap in the knowledge that managers have in executing sickness procedures.

Action Improve the provision of sickness absence information to managers. Reinforce sickness absence procedures with managers. Regularly review the management of absence in accordance with the policy to ensure adherence.

Key Issue 5 Yearly moderation exercises indicate that objective setting for some managers can be improved upon to achieve SMARTer objectives that compare consistently across grades.

Action The setting of firm and SMART objectives in the Business Plan will flow through to appraisals to ensure consistency across grades. Forward looking moderation to be undertaken by peer managers and SMT to measure consistency.

Page 279 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 280 Agenda Item 12b

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no. Planning and Transportation Committee 24 th April 2012

Subject: Rescission of City Walkway – Middlesex Street Housing Estate Report of: Public The Director of the Built Environment For Decision Ward (if appropriate): Portsoken Executive Summary

This report recommends the rescission of the city walkway that was declared by the resolution of the Court of Common Council on the 20 th September 1973, and is known as Middlesex Street Housing Estate city walkway. The removal of the walkway is required to enable the approved works to the estate to take place, and as these works include the relocation of the existing community centre to ground floor level, there is no longer any requirement to have public access to this area. The immediate costs of processing the rescission of the city walkway Declaration should not exceed £5000 and can be met from the Director of the Built Environment’s local risk budget. Recommendation I RECOMMEND THAT your Committee resolves to rescind the resolution of the Court of Common Council dated 20 th September 1973 to discontinue the entire city walkway, being more particularly shown hatched on the City Walkway Rescission Plan NO. CWRP-01-12 (Appendix B to this report) in accordance with the resolution set out in Appendix A to this report.

Main Report

Background

1. In September 1973 the Court of Common Council resolved to declare as City Walkway all that way or place at second floor level with staircase to ground level at the Middlesex Street Housing Estate.

2. The stairs and upper level walkway provided public access to the community centre facilities located here.

3. On the 27 th October 2011 planning permission was granted under application number 11/00602/FULLR3 for the existing Middlesex Street stair to be enclosed at first floor level and secured by gates at street level, new 1 bedroom 2 person d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\1\6\5\ai00007561\$3wggkmp0.docPage 281 flats to second and third floors, and for a new community centre and library to be constructed within the existing ground floor car park.

Current Position

4. Because the community centre facilities are being relocated to the ground floor, and there are no other public facilities or public walkways linking to the existing walkway it is felt that there is no longer any requirement to have public access to this part of the estate, and as such the planning approval 11/00602/FULLR3 includes the gating of the stairs that provide access to and form part of the Middlesex Street Housing Estate city walkway.

5. Although saved policy TRANS 7 of the UDP 2002 indicates that this walkway is to be retained, the proposed works approved by the City mean the community centre is relocated to the ground floor and as stated above, that means there is no longer any requirement for the public to have access to this part of the estate.

6. In order for the approved works to be carried out, your Committee will need to approve the rescission of the Middlesex Housing Estate city walkway Declaration.

Proposals

7. The proposed rescission of the city walkway Declaration is required to enable the approved works to the Estate to be carried out. Once the city walkway status has been removed, gates will be erected on the stair.

Financial Implications

8. There is no provision included within the city walkway legislation to reclaim the costs associated with declaring, altering or discontinuing city walkways. These costs are normally met from the Director of the Built Environment’s local risk budget. They would not be expected to exceed £5000 in this case.

9. The closure of this walkway will represent a saving in terms of the highway maintenance budget as this will become a privately maintained area.

Background Papers: Resolution of the Court of Common Council dated 20 th September 1973 Planning Permission Ref: 11/00602/FULLR3 dated 27 th October 2011

Contact: Lucy Cannell 020 7332 1489 [email protected]

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\1\6\5\ai00007561\$3wggkmp0.docPage 282 Appendix A

RESOLUTION OF THE PLANNING AND TRANSPORTATION COMMITTEE

(under powers delegated to them by the Court of Common Council on 19 th July 2001)

DATED day of 2012

WHEREAS the Mayor and Commonalty and Citizens of the City of London acting by the Planning and Transportation Committee pursuant to the delegation to that Committee specified above (hereinafter called "the City") are authorised by Section 6 of the City of London (Various Powers) Act 1967 (hereinafter called "the Act") BY RESOLUTION TO DECLARE any way or place in the City of London appearing to the City:

(i) to be laid out or otherwise suitable for a City Walkway within the meaning of Section 5 of the Act,

(ii) to which access is available directly from a street or another way or place which is a City Walkway, and

(iii) which is laid out or rendered suitable for a City Walkway in accordance with one of the provisions specified in subsection (1) of the said Section 6.

TO BE A CITY WALKWAY as from such date as may be specified in such resolution

AND WHEREAS the City are further authorised by the said Section 6, by resolution, to vary or rescind any resolution declaring a City Walkway.

AND WHEREAS it appears to the City that the resolution made by them on the 20 th September 1973 (hereinafter called the “1973 Resolution”) should be rescinded to discontinue the City Walkway shown hatched on the drawing attached hereto and numbered CWRP-01-12 as “Existing city walkway to be discontinued.”

NOW THEREFORE the City in pursuance of Section 6(5) of the Act by resolution HEREBY RESCINDS the 1973 Resolution so as to discontinue the City Walkway described in the Schedule hereto on and after the 22 nd day of June 2012

THE SCHEDULE

ALL THAT way or place at second floor level with staircase to ground level at the Middlesex Street Housing Estate, the said way or place being more particularly shown hatched on the said drawing No.CWRP-01-12 as “Existing city walkway to be discontinued..”

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\1\6\5\ai00007561\$3wggkmp0.docPage 283

Dated the day of 2012

THE COMMON SEAL OF THE MAYOR AND COMMONALTY AND CITIZENS OF THE CITY OF LONDON was hereunto affixed in the presence of:-

Authorised Officer Guildhall, London, EC2P 2EJ

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\1\6\5\ai00007561\$3wggkmp0.docPage 284

Page 285 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 286 Agenda Item 12c

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no. Planning and Transportation 24 April 2012 Subject: Public Progress Report: Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy Report of: For Information Director of the Built Environment

Summary

This report seeks to inform Members of the results of the public consultation recently undertaken in relation to the Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy.

In order to develop the Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy, intensive workshops were undertaken to capture the views of stakeholders. 430 stakeholders participated in these workshops. The overall response to the workshops was very positive and many participants made useful comments giving shape to the area strategy; adding weight to analysis undertaken by landscape architects and urban designers. Various montages representing the views of stakeholders were produced to illustrate the developing Area Strategy proposals.

Following these workshops approximately 1270 questionnaires were posted out to residents and businesses in the area seeking views on the proposals. 42 stakeholders responded to the public consultation, with 88% in support of the Strategy.

The level of response was typical for a consultation of this nature; the Cheapside Area Strategy received 34 responses from a distribution of approximately 2000 questionnaires.

The Strategy that was consulted upon was based on the views of the local community, the City’s policies and urban design analysis.

The Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy aims to provide a greater sense of community, to improve linkages in the area and provide better quality public spaces, creating spaces to gather, improving biodiversity, reducing the effects of noise and improving air quality. It is intended that the full strategy will be presented to Members for consideration before the summer recess.

Recommendations It is recommended that this report be received for information.

Main Report

Background

1. In 2007 Members of this Committee considered a report suggesting the development of a Supplementary Revenue Project for the development of an area strategy for Aldgate. d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 287 2. The initial driver for this proposal was the developer Minerva Limited. Minerva, through the development of their proposals for the St Botolph Building site, had engaged with various local community groups in Aldgate and found huge support for change.

3. Subsequent to this, the City endorsed and recognised this aspiration through the adoption of Core Strategy Policy CS8 in the City’s Local Development Framework (LDF). This became an adopted document in September 2011.

4. Minerva has continued to provide funding for the development of a strategy for Aldgate. Over time, it has been accepted that a step change in quality can be achieved by removing the Aldgate gyratory and providing a new public open space.

5. Between July 2008 and January 2011, with the articulated bus route 25 on diversion Transport for London’s (TfL’s) Bus Priority Team funded an evaluation of a temporary contra-flow facility on Aldgate High Street. The progress of the area strategy was delayed whilst the investigations into the contra-flow were undertaken. However, this provided officers a valuable opportunity to assess the traffic impacts of removing the gyratory, replacing it with two-way traffic on Aldgate High Street and St Botolph Street.

6. Other property developers have been very keen to regenerate the City Fringe in the past. Exemplar, developers with a interests in a site over the Aldgate East Station and adjacent to the Royal Bank of Scotland building, funded the Aldgate Public Realm Strategy in 2008 with the ’s (GLA’s) urban design resource team, Design for London.

7. In early 2011, to further engage businesses, City of London’s City Property Advisory Team (CPAT) commissioned a strategy and brand design consultancy to interview a number of key stakeholders, developers, business and authorities, on their views for change in the area.

8. In the later half of 2011, the stakeholder group coordinated by CPAT continued their involvement in helping to shape the Area Strategy, requiring repeat workshops to meet both the availability of this stakeholder group and to have manageable group sizes at each workshop.

9. The London Borough of Tower Hamlets (LBTH) has also commissioned a number of strategy documents for different aspects of the area including a signing strategy, the Aldgate and City Fringe Regeneration Strategy, and the Aldgate Masterplan.

10. Although the intent behind the approval to undertake the Aldgate Strategy was limited to the gyratory and immediate vicinity, it became clear that the links throughout the area, both for general pedestrian movement, interchange and individual modes of transport, required a larger scale view. Thus, the area was extended and is now referred to as the Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy.

11. In comparison with other areas within the City, Aldgate and Tower has a significant variety of types of stakeholder. The area is recognised in the London Plan as an area of opportunity and it notes that the Portsoken Ward falls within the top 25% deprived areas within Britain. However, the area and its periphery, also boast a significant number of high end hotels and residential block d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 288 dwellings. Businesses in the area tend to provide support services to the City’s financial businesses. In this small area there are also a number of clubs and bars which attract night time visitors. Interestingly, the area is noted as an area of opportunity in the London Plan because it includes derelict buildings and cleared sites suitable for redevelopment, and in addition there is potential to build over the Aldgate bus station and underground station.

12. The Aldgate and Tower Area includes residential estates, resident apartment blocks, three Church parishes, businesses, luxury hotels, retail, an extensive public transport provision for interchanging commuters and visitors, and educational facilities. The education ranges from primary to tertiary including the City of London’s only Primary School, the Sir John Cass Foundation providing scholarships and special education facilities, and the Metropolitan University.

Pre Consultation Activity

13. The various stakeholder groups targeted for the early pre-consultation workshops included:

 the CPAT coordinated group of business and developer interests,

 a similar group coordinated by LBTH, originally set up to consult on LBTH strategies, involving business and community support interests,

 the resident associations from Middlesex Street Estate and Mansell Street Guinness Trust Estate,

 a group from Transport for London (TfL) representing the needs of different transport modes and TfL’s property interests in the area,

 City of London officers from various departments,

 the Sir John Cass Foundation representatives,

 the parishioners of St Botolph without Aldgate Church, and

 all 250 children from the Sir John Cass Primary School.

14. Workshops with business and authority groups ran smoothly and during normal working hours.

15. Most workshops with residents followed a resident association meeting in the evening.

16. One of the evenings that was spent with Middlesex Street Estate residents was a balmy late summer evening and officers set up outside in the central area of the estate near the main entry point. Residents were able to have a look on their way past and many stayed or returned to engage and provide comments. The approach was effective and successful.

17. The parishioners from St Botolph without Aldgate Church completed the first workshop under the direction of Reverend Burgess, but during the second round of workshops officers visited them on a Sunday following the morning service. d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 289 18. The Sir John Cass Primary School was very supportive. Following an introduction at morning assembly officers went back to the class with the oldest pupils and ran through the workshop material as had occurred with other stakeholder groups. This fits with the age group’s curriculum; which includes having to study town planning.

19. The workshop documents used with all stakeholders utilised a variety of photographs illustrating the different types of elements that might be included in an open space. Stakeholders (including the older pupils) were asked to circle those they were most keen on. The youngest pupils from the Primary School were provided with these photographs as stickers and asked to choose three and match them up to the choices on a board, effectively making a bar graph representing their wishes. The remaining middle year pupils were provided with stickers as well. In addition, they were also provided with an outline of the potential open space and asked to sketch out how they saw the open space looking; making notes to the side.

20. In an update report to this Committee in September 2011, Members agreed to consult the public on draft proposals demonstrating the main themes of the draft Area Strategy. Authority was delegated to the Town Clerk in consultation with the Chairman and Deputy Chairman, and the Director of the Built Environment to finalise the draft Aldgate (and now Tower) Area Strategy consultation Document.

21. The Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy covers only a small area of the Aldgate Ward, but much of the Tower Ward and Portsoken Ward. Naming the area to the north of Tower ‘Aldgate’ resonates with key stakeholders including London Borough of Tower Hamlets, residents, local businesses and developers. Inclusion of Tower in the Area Strategy title better represents the larger area it serves.

Public Consultation

22. Between 6 December 2011 and 24 January 2012 the public were consulted on proposals developed during these initial pre consultation workshops.

23. The public consultation period began with an exhibition event held for interested developers, local businesses, representatives of the two Estate resident associations and local authority stakeholders including local Ward Members. The exhibition was held at the Gensler offices in Aldgate House at the centre of the gyratory, providing views of the Aldgate area.

24. Approximately 1270 questionnaires were sent to all residents and businesses in the area, and 250 questionnaires were provided for the pupils of Sir John Cass Primary School to take home to their parents.

25. The exhibition was extended for the duration of the public consultation period and took place in the ground floor of the St Botolph building on the corner of Houndsditch and St Botolph Street. Many workers and passers-by viewed the exhibition. They were offered questionnaires and encouraged to express their views on the Area Strategy.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 290 26. A smaller version of the exhibition was made available for an evening discussion session arranged by the Tower Ward Members for local businesses and residents. The smaller boards were then exhibited at the St Olave Church.

27. The principal aims and objectives of the proposals consulted on were:

 To achieve a successful balance between pedestrians and other modes of transport in order to enhance the pedestrian experience.

 To introduce more green elements such as street trees and planting.

 To improve the quality and consistency of surface materials and street furniture to create an enhanced street scene with inclusive access for all.

 To remove the Aldgate one-way streets and make them two-way, creating a new public space.

 To improve links between transport hubs in the area.

 To smooth traffic flow and enhance journey-time reliability in the City of London.

28. This report summarises the responses received from the public consultation on the Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy and provides an update on the development of the final draft Strategy document.

Public Consultation Responses

29. Approximately 1270 questionnaires were posted out to residents and businesses in the area seeking views on the proposals. 42 stakeholders responded to the public consultation, with 88% in support of the Strategy.

30. The small number of response was expected; it is our experience when stakeholders are involved early in the consultation process, that the public consultation material already meets their expectations with no need to respond. For comparison, the Cheapside Area Strategy where stakeholders were also involved early received 34 responses from the distribution of approximately 2000 questionnaires.

31. Many comments referred to reducing existing traffic congestion on the TfL network and making it easier to walk or cycle through the area.

32. Many other comments were received which supported the illustrated public realm improvements, encouraging development and use of public spaces including further greening, biodiversity and opportunities for sport, play and recreational use.

33. All submissions received as part of the public consultation have been collated. Copies are available in the Member’s Reading Room, or on request from the Town Clerk’s office.

34. All submissions are in the process of being responded to individually.

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 291 Proposals

The Strategy

35. These comments have been reviewed and taken into account. The Strategy will be amended where appropriate.

36. It is intended that the full strategy will be presented to Members for consideration before the summer recess. If the Strategy is approved, individual projects will be managed through the corporate project management protocols.

37. It is expected that the implementation of the proposals will be externally funded from various financial sources, such as S.106 contributions, GLA Group funding streams, funding from Tower Hamlets, and other external funding bodies. The areas of funding will be reported as part of the overall strategy.

38. The final Area Strategy will encompass a variety of schemes which will be prioritised as high, medium and low. The pivotal scheme will be the conversion of the Aldgate gyratory and creation of the new public square which will have the highest priority.

Corporate & Strategic Implications

39. The Aldgate and Tower Area is one of 17 Area Strategies in various stages of completion. An Area Strategy is a considered approach, taking account of future developments and demands, as well as analysis of the existing user patterns and community needs within the area.

40. In addition, the following documents were taken into consideration whilst developing the Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy:

 the City of London’s Local Development Framework (LDF) Core Strategy document adopted September 2011. Specifically, Core Strategy Policy CS8,

 the Crescent Conservation Area Character Summary and Management Strategy Supplementary Planning Document (SPD),

 Lloyd's Avenue Conservation Area Character Summary and Management Strategy SPD,

 the Protected Views SPD, the draft Tree Strategy (an SPD in preparation),

 the Manual for Designing Sustainable Streets (a future SPD),

 the City’s Play Strategy, and

 the City’s emerging Air Quality Strategy.

41. Not only important corporately, the Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy meets strategic objectives set out by the Greater London Authority (GLA) in the London Plan.

42. The Strategy is consistent with the London Plan which aims to:

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 292 “support wider regeneration (including in particular improvements to environmental quality) and integrate development proposals to the surrounding areas especially areas for regeneration”

43. The proposals are also consistent with the London Plan’s objective: “The Mayor will, and boroughs and other stakeholders should, work to realise the potential of in ways that sustain and enhance its recent economic and demographic growth while also improving its distinct environment, neighbourhoods and public realm, supporting and sustaining existing and new communities, addressing its unique concentrations of deprivation, and improving quality of life and health for those living, working, studying or visiting there.” Portsoken Ward, for example, is amongst the top 25% deprived areas in England.

44. The London Plan has identified the City Fringe as an Area of Opportunity.

Implications

45. The sum allocated to complete the Area Strategy is £200,000, taken from the £1,042,407 sum earmarked to achieve a ‘New Public Square works’, a new square beside St Botolph’s Church, through the Minerva Ltd development voluntary S106 contribution.

46. Table 1 below details the total expenditure up to the preparation of this Report.

Table 1: Expenditure to date

Strategy Developmen t Phase Cost (£) Staff Costs 103,367.00 (CoL – City Transport and Projects, Highways. DBE) Co-ordinating pre-consultation and public consultation, document and report writing. External Fees 96,539.06 Specialist external consultant’s fees for undertaking the area analysis, facilitating the pre-consultation workshops, pre-consultation workshop material and production of graphics, and montage images. Total Expenditure to date 199,906.06

47. The Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy will provide an indication of the collection of schemes, their relative priority and potential funding streams.

Conclusion

48. The Aldgate and Tower Area Strategy proposals address the City of London’s LDF Core Policy CS8 to remove the gyratory, create a public space, and improve links through the area. It addresses the London Plan’s requirement for economic regeneration and improvement in the community infrastructure. d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 293 49. Proposals were developed with the aid of intensive pre consultation workshops with approximately 430 stakeholders.

50. Approximately 1270 questionnaires were posted out to residents and businesses in the area seeking views on the proposals. 42 stakeholders responded to the public consultation, with 88% in support of the Strategy.

51. It is intended that the full strategy will be presented for consideration by Members before the summer recess.

52. It is recommended that Members note the information provided in this progress report.

Background Papers:

53. The City Planning Officer’s Capital and Supplementary Revenue bids for 2008/09 P&R Committee Report 18 October 2007

54. Aldgate High Street Temporary Contra Flow Lane Feasibility Study – Supplementary Revenue Bid Report S&W Sub-Committee Report 21 July 2008

55. Land Bounded By Fenchurch Street, Fen Court, Fenchurch Ave & Billiter Street (120 Fenchurch Street) London EC3 P&T Committee Report 16 September 2008

56. 76 - 86 Fenchurch Street, 1 - 7 Northumberland Alley & 1 & 1a Carlisle Avenue London EC3N 2ES P&T Committee Report 9 December 2008

57. 60 - 70 St Mary Axe London EC3A 8JQ P&T Committee Report 9 December 2008

58. Aldgate High Street Temporary Contra Flow Lane: Progress Report S&W Sub- Committee 30 March 2009

59. Mitre Square, International House, Duke's Place, 11 Mitre Street & 1 Mitre Square London EC3 P&T Committee Report 1 February 2011

60. 24 - 26 London EC3N 1BQ P&T Committee Report 2 June 2011

61. City of London Local Development Framework, Core Strategy Development Plan Document October 2011

62. Aldgate Area Strategy: Progress Report P7T Committee 6 September 2011

Contact: [email protected] | telephone number: 020 7332 3564

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\2\6\5\ai00007562\$wcsfyuxg.docPage 294 Agenda Item 12d

Committee(s): Date(s): Item no. Planning and Transportation Committee 24 April 2012

Subject: Public Renew Waste Recycling Bins – Screen Displays Report of: For Information City Planning Officer and Comptroller and City Solicitor Executive Summary

1. This report updates members on arrangements regarding the display of public information on screens built into the Recycling Units which are currently being installed on public highway pursuant to in principle arrangements previously approved. It was previously considered that the displays would benefit from deemed advertisement consent. The provider’s proposals have now evolved in response to the development of their business model, and Renew have requested that in addition to public information additional material be displayed on the screens. Such material would not benefit from deemed consent and would require express advertisement consent. This report considers the likely impact of the proposed advertisements on amenity and seeks authority to delegate decisions on individual applications for advertising consent to the City Planning Officer.

2. Recommendations It is recommended that the City Planning Officer be given delegated authority to determine applications for advertisement consent to display information on the display screens, subject to: (i) the scale and size of the display being restricted to the form design and nature shown at Appendix 1 and an Agreement with the operator being entered into to ensure there are no displays on the screen other than in accordance with those agreed; and (ii) the City Planning Officer exercising the powers to determine applications for advertisement consent in the interests of amenity and public safety, taking into account the provisions of the development plan and any other relevant factors.; and (iii) the City Planning Officer first considering all relevant representations received in respect of site specific applications for advertisement consent.

Main Report

Background 1. At Port Health and Environmental Services Committee of 25 th September 2007, Policy and Resources Committee of 18 October 2007 and Street and Walkways Sub-Committee of 22 nd October 2007 it was resolved to approve proposals for the installation of up to an initial 100 sponsored recycling bins throughout the City. The proposals contemplated that the units would be

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\3\6\5\ai00007563\$wy34yujz.docPage 295 manufactured and installed at the provider’s expense with the City undertaking regular waste collections at the City’s cost. It was further contemplated that the units would incorporate display screens on which public information could be displayed (such as relating to travel information, news, financial messages, and, if required, emergency/security warnings).

2. On 11 th May 2011 Planning and Transportation Committee agreed to delegate authority to the City Planning Officer to determine applications for small sponsorship logos on the units themselves. No applications have been received to date. At that time it was anticipated that the information displayed on the screen would not require advertisement consent on the basis that it would benefit from deemed consent under Regulation 6 and Schedule 3 Part 1 of the Town and Country Planning (Control of Advertisements) (England) Regulations 2007 (“the Advertisement Regulations”) (“functional advertisements of local authorities”). A small sponsorship logo proposed to be displayed on the top right hand corner of the screen was not considered, on the basis of the information provided, to fall outside the ambit of the deemed consent described in Part 1 of Schedule 3. A similar approach had been adopted in relation to the display screens on the Barclay’s sponsored Cycle Hire docking station units).

3. Since the May 2011 report the provider’s proposals for the screens have altered. Although they still propose that the majority of the material displayed would be functional advertisements of the local authority, the extent of other material proposed is now such that it cannot be said that the advertisement is displayed wholly for the purpose of announcement or direction in relation to any of the functions of a local authority and therefore the displays on the screens fall outside the ambit of the deemed consent , and as a result express advertisement consent would be required.

Evaluation 4. The City’s relevant planning policy requires that all advertising be discreet and restrained in keeping with the dignified character of the local area. The relevant policy is set out at Appendix 2. Advertising on street furniture is normally resisted (saved UDP policy ENV 30). ENV 30 is saved until the adoption of the relevant Development Management DPD. A consultation draft will probably be reported to Committee Nov/Dec 2012 with public consultation Jan/Feb and adoption summer 2014. On the basis of responses to the Issues and Options consultation during Summer 2011 which supported the current approach to advertisements, the policy is being drafted on the basis that the substance of ENV 30 will be carried forward, retaining the restrained approach and resisting advertising on street furniture.)

5. When exercising its powers under the Advertisement Regulations which would include considering applications for advertisement consent, the City as local planning authority must exercise the powers in the interests of amenity and public safety taking into account the provisions of the development plan so far as they are material, and any other relevant factors.. The proposed

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\3\6\5\ai00007563\$wy34yujz.docPage 296 displays would comprise largely public information (advertisements displayed wholly for that purpose would benefit from deemed consent) . Since the “sponsorship” information would be limited to intermittent displays giving sponsor names only (not any words or images specifically inviting or encouraging the purchase of any goods or services), it is considered that, subject to consideration of relevant factors including the precise nature of the proposed display and the general characteristics of the locality, including the presence of any feature of historic, architectural, cultural or similar interest, the nature of the proposed displays would be unlikely to give rise to adverse amenity impacts (subject to the form and nature of the display being restricted to that currently proposed and secured by a legal agreement).

6. Although content of advertising material is generally considered outside of advertisement control and the local planning authority may not normally impose restrictions on content or subject matter, it should be noted that ENV 30 addresses the need for the form and design to be restrained and high quality and for the design of advertising material to respect and enhance the locality. The nature of the material, being largely “functional advertisement of the local authority” or other information or news of interest to local stakeholders, would indicate that the screen displays in association with the units were of an appropriate nature to be respectful of the locality.

Proposal 7. It is proposed that the City Planning Officer be delegated authority to determine applications for advertisement consent for displays on the screens on the recycling units in conformity with the details illustrated in Appendix 1. Pursuant to such delegated authority, the City Planning Officer may consider it in principle appropriate to grant the advertisement consents sought, subject to the consideration of the provisions of the development plan and other relevant factors including site specific circumstances and relevant representations. Nothing in this report or the in-principle evaluation is intended to prejudge the determination of individual applications on a case by case basis.

8. Any consents granted would be on the basis that the displays permitted conformed with the form, design and nature of display illustrated in Appendix 1. This would be achieved by means of an agreement with the operator. Section 106 Agreements can be entered into by a person having an interest in the land, and the restrictions “run with the land” so as to bind future owners. In this case, the operator has no interest in the land as it is public highway. It is proposed therefore that the agreement controlling the screen displays be entered into under Section 1 of the Localism Act 2011 and/or Section 111 of the Local Government Act 1972, and that assignment of the operating rights be subject to any future operator entering into the same agreement with the local planning authority.

Conclusion 9. The recommendation would establish a system for the determination of individual applications for advertising consent. Each application would have to be determined by the City Planning Officer on its merits. In determining each

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\3\6\5\ai00007563\$wy34yujz.docPage 297 application the City Planning Officer will be under a duty to exercise the powers in the interests of amenity and public safety taking into account the provisions of the development plan so far as they are material, and any other relevant factors. The report has been reviewed by Leading Counsel who confirms that the recommendation is one which may reasonably be agreed.

Background Papers: Appendix 1: Proposed displays Appendix 2: Relevant Planning Policy

Contact: 020 7332 1677 [email protected]

d:\moderngov\data\agendaitemdocs\3\6\5\ai00007563\$wy34yujz.docPage 298 Page 299 Page 300 Page 301 Page 302 Page 303 Page 304 Renew Waste Recycling Bins – Screen Displays Appendix 2

City of London Unitary Development Plan 2002 saved policy Advertisements POLICY ENV 30 To encourage a high standard of design of advertisements which are in keeping with the character of their location and to resist excessive or obtrusive advertising materials and inappropriate illuminated signs.

10.91 In order to protect and enhance the generally dignified character of the City’s streets, the Corporation considers that advertising material should be generally restrained in quantity and form. It has therefore, for many years, sought to exercise careful control over the display of advertisements and will seek improvement in their design and siting where appropriate. In accordance with the requirements of the relevant legislation the Corporation will exercise advertisement control having regard to the need to protect visual amenity and to ensure public safety.

10.92 Advertising hoardings and advertising on street furniture will not normally be permitted. The display of poster advertisements on construction site hoardings will be discouraged. Appropriate action will be taken to have unauthorised advertisements removed. The design of advertising material should respect and enhance its locality and use appropriate materials of high quality. Advertisements should be discreet to the frontage served and should avoid static or moving projection of images beyond the frontage, on to the pavement, for example. Particular care will be necessary on listed buildings, within conservation areas and where the setting of listed buildings is affected, and especially where illuminated signs are proposed.

10.93 The maintenance of public safety will be taken into account when considering the design and location of advertisements. For example, road signs and traffic lights should not be obscured or their interpretation hindered by poorly sited or designed advertisements, projecting advertisements should not be positioned so low as to obstruct vehicular or pedestrian movement, pavements should not be obstructed by poorly sited advertisements or merchandise on display which can be a hazard to pedestrians.

Page 305 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 306 Agenda Item 13

Committee: Date: Item no. Planning and Transportation 24 April 2012

Subject: Public Decisions taken under delegated authority or urgency powers Report of: Town Clerk For Information

Summary

This report provides details of action taken by the Town Clerk in consultation with the Chairman and Deputy Chairman of the Planning and Transportation Committee, in accordance with Standing Order Nos. 41(a) and 41 (b). Recommendations:- That the action taken since the last meeting be noted.

Main Report

Background 1. Standing Order Nos. 41(a) and 41(b) provide mechanisms for decisions to be taken between scheduled meetings of the Planning and Transportation Committee, either where it is urgently necessary that a decision be made or where the Committee has delegated power for a decision to be taken.

Decisions Taken under Urgency Procedures 2. The following actions have been taken under delegated authority Standing Order No. 41(b), since the last meeting of the Committee:-

• Redevelopment of International House, 26 Creechurch Lane and 1 Mitre Square, London, EC3 – Acquisition and Appropriation of Land

3. Approval was granted (with the approval of the Court of Common Council) to delegate authority to the Town Clerk in consultation with the Chairman and Deputy Chairman in respect of the following : -

(a) the land comprising International House, 26 Creechurch Lane, London, EC3 shown attached in Appendix 1 is no longer required for planning purposes for which it was originally acquired;

(b) that the City’s interest in the land shown in Appendix 1 as International House and 1 Mitre Square be appropriated for the planning purpose of facilitating the carrying out of the

Page 307 Development (in its current form or as it may be varied or amended);

(c) that when the freehold interest in 1 Mitre Square, London, EC3 shown on the plan annexed in Appendix 1 is transferred to the City it is acquired for the planning purpose of facilitating the carrying out of the Development (in its current form or as it may be varied or amended).

• Sustainable Drainage Systems – response to consultation

4. Approval was granted to delegate authority to the Town Clerk in consultation with the Chairman and Deputy Chairman to agree a more detailed response to the Sustainable Drainage Systems Consultation prior to the 13 March 2012 deadline.

5. The following action has been taken under urgency , Standing Order No. 41 (a), since the last meeting of the Committee : -

• Highway declaration – 51 Lime Street, EC3

Urgent action was taken to declare the subterranean land encompassed by the permitted development at 51 Lime Street EC3 to be surplus to highway requirements but excluding all such interests as necessary for any continuing statutory highway requirements. This was to enable suitable disposal to St Martins Property Corporation Limited. This disposal would not be detrimental to highway or planning purposes, and the disposal terms would be subject to the approval of the Property Investment Board at their meeting to be held on 18 April 2012.

Reason for urgency - To have a decision taken now rather than wait until the next meeting of the Planning and Transportation Committee on 24 April will enable the Property Investment Board to approve the disposal terms on 18th April 2012, rather than at its meeting on 23 May. The City Surveyor considers that this disposal will trigger the agreement, hopefully secured in April 2012, for the City to construct a new staircase from London Bridge onto land leased by St Martins Property Corporation from the City and, as far as practicable; he is keen for declaration/disposal and the agreement to be concluded at the same time.

Conclusion 6. Members are asked to note to contents of this report.

Contact: Katie Odling 020 7332 3414 [email protected]

Page 308 Agenda Item 17 By virtue of paragraph(s) 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act 1972.

Document is Restricted

Page 309 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 310 By virtue of paragraph(s) 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act 1972.

Document is Restricted

Page 311 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 312 Agenda Item 18 By virtue of paragraph(s) 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act 1972.

Document is Restricted

Page 313 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 322 Agenda Item 19 By virtue of paragraph(s) 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 12A of the Local Government Act 1972.

Document is Restricted

Page 323 This page is intentionally left blank

Page 326